Belarus 900-952-Eng

1
BELARUS
TRACTORS
900/900.3
920/920.2/920.3
950/950.3
952/952.2/952.3

900 0000010 OM

OPERATING MANUAL

2009
2

IMPORTANT!

If the tractor is operated by the user or lent/leased, make sure that the operator prior to
working on the tractor:
A. has been instructed on safety measures and proper tractor use;
B. has studied and understood the content of this Operating Manual.

NOTE!

Due to continual improvement of the products manufactured, some modifications not
reflected herein may be made to the design of some subassemblies and parts.
Some technical data and illustrations given herein may differ from the actual ones for
your tractor. The dimensions and weights are approximate (reference). For the detailed
information, contact the BELARUS trademark dealer.

General note: The references to the left and right in the text of this Manual are given
from the standpoint of the observer staying behind the tractor moving ahead.

Minsk Tractor Works Republican Unitary Enterprise, 2009

3

Table of Contents

Introduction 6
Adopted Abbreviations and Symbolic Notations 8
International Symbols 9
Safety Precautions 11
Technical Data 15
Controls and Instruments 32
Operating Instructions 81
Unitization 127
Adjustments 155
Maintenance 170
Troubleshooting 219
Tractor Transportation and Towing 227
Tractor Storage 228
Appendix . Electric Equipment 229

4
All rights reserved. This book shall not be reproduced or copied either fully or
partially without written permission of the Minsk Tractor Works Republican
Unitary Enterprise.

ATTENTION OF THE TRACTOR OPERATORS!

1. Prior to operating the tractor, read carefully this User Manual and follow strictly its
requirements.
2. Apply the climatic diesel fuel according to the Manual. Reduce the motor oil
changeover intervals by half, if the sulphur content in the fuel is below 1%.
3. Do not allow the diesel engine idling for more than 15 minutes.
4. Please keep in mind that the engine can be only started when the gearbox lever is
set to the leftmost position (to the position of engagement of the 1
st
or 2
nd
range of
gears).
5. When operating the tractor without the rear PTO, put the switchover shifter arm of
the independent two-speed PTO drive to position I (540 rpm), the independent
synchronous PTO drive to the neutral (middle) position and the control lever to
the position PTO OFF (refer to Section Operating controls and Instrumentation).
6. Use the synchronous PTO drive at the tractor unit movement speeds not exceeding
8 km/h. Otherwise, severe damages of the tractor transmission can be caused.
7. The tractor should be only operated at the 9
th
gear with the higher gear range (range
II) engaged.
8. The tractor cab is equipped with a single seat and only the operator must be in.
9. When shipping the tractor from the factory, some tractor components are packed in
the box of spare parts and accessories, toolbox or cab. Fit them onto the tractor by
your own.
10. When putting new storage batteries into operation, remove the airtight film from the
air holes or cut the lugs on PE plugs off.
11. Do not allow tractor operation with the clutch disengaged or incompletely engaged.
12. When starting the movement, make sure that the manual reserve parking brake is
off.
5
13. When using the tractor without drive shafts, put FDA lever to position forced.
14. Do not operate the tractor indoors without adequate ventilation (air exchange).
Exhaust gases can lead to fatal outcome.
15. Towing the tractor with front wheels lifted is strictly forbidden. Otherwise, the FDA
drive failure and emergency situation can occur.
16. Never lift the tractor by the front part of the tractor by the towing shackle. Use the
shackle for towing only.
17. The manufacturer is improving continually the tractor due to that there could be
some modifications of the design of some components and their operating rules is
not reflected in this Manual.
6
INTRODUCTION

The BELARUS wheeled universal tilling tractors of the 900 series belong to drawbar
category 1.4 and are designed to perform a wide range of agricultural works: from soil
preparation for sowing to harvesting and transporting operations; they can be used in
forestry, municipal servicing, construction and industry.

This Manual contains the description of the design peculiarities, brief technical data and
recommendations for operation and maintenance of the following BELARUS tractors of
900 series:
BELARUS- 900 (42) with the -243/-243C diesel engine (59.6 kW/2200 rpm) and
synchronized gearbox;
BELARUS-900.3 (42) with the -245.43 S2 diesel engine (62 kW/1800 rpm),
synchronized gearbox and updated design;
BELARUS-920 (44) with the -243/-243C diesel engine (59.6 kW/2200 rpm),
synchronized gearbox and FDA (72);
BELARUS-920.2 (44) with the -243/-243C diesel engine (59.6 kW/2200 rpm),
synchronized gearbox, FDA (822) and updated design;
BELARUS-950 (42) with the -245.5/-245.5C diesel engine (65 kW/1800 rpm),
synchronized gearbox;
synchronized gearbox and updated design;
BELARUS-952 (44) with the -245.5/-245.5C diesel engine (65 kW/1800 rpm),
synchronized gearbox and FDA (72);
BELARUS-952.2 (44) with the -245.5/-245.5C diesel engine (65 kW/1800 rpm),
BELARUS-952.3 (44) with the -245.5 S2 (70 kW/1800 rpm) diesel engine,
synchronized gearbox, FDA (822) and updated design.

Index .2 means upgrading of the respective model by installing one or several units of
higher engineering level:
FDA with planetary reducing gears (for 4x4 tractors);
Hydraulic lift-based hookup;
Bonnet, roof, cab fender of updated design.

Index .3 means installation of diesel engines with index S2 certified as per the 2
nd

stage of the ecological regulation of Directive 2000/25/EC, hydrostatic power steering
(HPS) system with an independent oil tank, as well as the bonnet, the roof and cab
fenders of renewed design.

Making any re-equipment or modifications to the tractor design, which are not
authorized by the Manufacturer is strictly forbidden.
7
The distinctive features of the tractors described in the Manual:
1. Transmission with synchronized gearbox (7/2) and synchronized reducing gear (step-
up gear): 14 forward and 4 reverse gears.
2. Hydrostatic power steering with the Danfoss metering pump, cylinder in steering
trapezium and steering tie rod.
3. Unified rear driving axle with more convenient external readjustment of planetary
gear brake bands.
4. Hydraulic system with a power regulator completely controlling the rear attachment
cylinder. Three sections of the distributor ensure the control of external cylinders of
machines and tools.
5. Safe comfortable cab meets the requirements of EC and OECD directives and is
featured by the improved interior, heating and ventilation system.

8

Adopted Abbreviations and Symbolic Notations

SB storage battery
DL differential lock
PCU pre-heater control unit
SCU starter control unit
UDP diesel piston upper dead point
PTO power take-off shaft
HMS hydraulic mounted system
HPS hydrostatic power steering
LOHE liquid oil heat exchanger
RMA rear mounted attachment
ID integrated display
GB gearbox
C clutch
CAC charge air cooler
FDA front driving axle
ADCS automatic tilling depth control system
M maintenance
DHM traction hitch mechanism
SRU speed reducer
ETPP electric torch pre-heater
D Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development

9
International Symbols

Manufacture uses standard international symbols concerning the application of devices
and the controls.
Below are given the symbols with their meaning.

See Manual

Control manipulations

Brake

Fast

Parking brake

Slow

Horn

Forward

Emergency alarm

Reverse

Fuel level in the tank

Battery charging

Cooling fluid

Cab light

Starting flame preheater Clearance lights

Engine speed

Turn indicator

Oil pressure in the engine

Upper beam

Engine cooling fluid
temperature
Lower beam

Off/Stopped

Working lights

On/Start

Differential locking

Ramping

PTO engaged

Lever down FDA engaged
10

Lever up

Fan

Lifting position of the
distributor sliding valve

Windscreen washer

Lowering position of the

Windscreen wiper

Floating position of the

Rear screen wiper

Oil pressure in the gearbox

Trailer turn indicator

Air pressure in the
pneumatic system

Oil pressure in the
hydrostatic power steering

High voltage
Oil pressure in the
transmission

Cooling fluid level Brake fluid level

Road train lights

Air pressure in the brake
system

Air filter clogging

Safety Precautions BELARUS series 900

11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Strict observance of safety precau-
tions, accurate execution of tractor
driving and operation regulations
and maintenance shall guarantee
complete safety of its application.
Safety precautions when operat-
ing the tractor
ATTENTION! When starting up the en-
gine and operating the controls, always
stay in the cab on the operators seat
General Instructions
Prior to tractor use, study operators

manual carefully. Insufficient
knowledge on tractor driving and op-
eration can result in accidents.
Specially trained and qualified
operators only are allowed to oper-
ate the tractor.
If the tractor is equipped with a
safety belt, use it during operation. If
not, contact the dealer.
Never admit a passenger to the cab
unless the latter is provided with an ad-
ditional seat and hand-rail. There is no
other safe seat for a passenger in the
cab!
Keep all warning plates clean. In case of
their damage or loss, replace them by
new ones.
Prior to operation, carefully in-
spect the tractor and a trailed
mechanism. Start operation having
made sure that they are in good re-
pair. The trailed agricultural mech-
anisms and transport trailers shall
be fitted with rigid hitches excluding
their swinging and rear-end colli-
sion with the tractor during trans-
portation.
Prior to starting the diesel engine,
the parking brake shall be applied;
the gear shift lever shall be set to
the neutral position and the PTO
lever in the OFF position.
Prior to starting the movement,
warn the bystanders and the per-
sons working on the trailed mecha-
nisms with a horn.
Never leave the moving tractor.
Prior to leaving the cab, disen-
gage the PTO, stop the engine, ap-
ply the parking brake, take off the
starter switch key and set the bat-
tery disconnect switch to the OFF
position.
It is forbidden to de-energize the
electric equipment system by the
starter and instrumentation switch
and/or battery disconnect switch
until the engine is stopped.
Do not operate the tractor indoors
without necessary ventilation. Ex-
haust gases can result in fatal out-
come!
In case of failure of the engine or
steering control, stop the tractor
immediately. Keep in mind that
turning the steering wheel for con-
trolling the tractor when the engine
is stopped requires much more
force. In case of failure of the steer-
ing control, a lamp of emergency oil
pressure in the HVSS lights up.
Do not work under lifted agricul-
tural implements. During durable
stops, leave the attached imple-
ment lifted.
If the front part of the tractor takes
off when attaching heavy mecha-
nisms and implements, mount front
weights.
When operating the front lift, fill in
the rear tires with liquid ballast.
Prior to lifting and lowering the at-
tached agricultural implements as
well as when turning the tractor,
make sure that there is no risk of
hitting or snagging on somebody or

12
any obstacle.
When moving with attached
mechanisms or implements, always
apply a mechanism to lock on the
attachment in lifted position.
The drive shaft transferring the ro-
tation from the tractor PTO to the
driven components shall be en-
closed.
Make sure that any additional
equipment or auxiliaries are in-
stalled correctly and that they are
designed for application with your
tractor. Keep in mind that your trac-
tor, if used unduly can be danger-
ous both for yourself and other per-
sons. Do not operate equipment
not designed for installation on the
tractor.
To avoid turnover, be careful
when driving the tractor. Choose
safe speed corresponding to road
conditions, particularly when driving
cross-country, passing the ditches,
slopes and during sharp turns.
When operating on the slopes, in-
crease the tractor track to the max-
imum value.
Do not make sharp turns under
full load and high speed.
When using the tractor for trans-
portation works:
- increase the tractor track to at
least 1800 mm;
- interlock the brake pedals, check
and, if necessary, adjust the brakes
to synchronous action;
- check operation of the parking
brake, brake pneumatic drive and
trailer brakes;
- check the state of the light and
audio alarm devices;
- transport trailers shall be fitted
with rigid hitches and connected by
means of the safety chain or rope;
- never drive downhill with
switched-off gear (coasting), apply
the same gear both down and up-
hill;
- it is forbidden to work with the
trailer without independent brakes,
if its weight exceed half actual
weight of the tractor. The faster you
move and the larger the towed
mass is, the larger the safety dis-
tance shall be;
- disengage the FDA to avoid ex-
cessive wear and tear of the drive
parts and tires;
- do not use rear axle differential
lock (DL) at the speed of above 10
km/h and during turns;

Important! Use the synchronous
PTO drive at the lower gears of the
gearbox at the tractor movement
speed not exceeding 8 km/h. Other-
wise, the tractors power train can be
severely damaged.

- do not stop the tractor on the
slopes. If the stop is still necessary,
engage the 1
st
gear and apply the
parking brake.
when operating the equipment
driven by PTO, make sure that the
PTO coupler shank has fully
stopped after stopping the engine
before leaving the cab and discon-
necting the equipment.
Do not wear loose clothes when
operating PTO or near the rotating
equipment.
When operating stationary mech-
anisms driven by PTO, always ap-
ply the parking brake and lock on
the rear wheels from the front and
behind. Make sure that the mecha-
nism has been reliably secured.
Make sure that the PTO coupler
shank protection has been installed
and, if the PTO is not used, refit the
cap of the PTO coupler shank.

13
Do not clean, adjust or maintain
the equipment driven with PTO,
when the engine is running.

Safety precauti ons duri ng the
mai ntenance

Never refuel the tractor when the
engine is running.
Never smoke when refuelling.
Never fill the tank to the top.
Leave some space for fuel expan-
sion.
Never add gasoline or mixtures to
diesel fuel. These combinations
can increase the risk of fire or ex-
plosion.
Use the summer or winter fuel
grades properly. Refill the tank at
the end of each day to reduce night
moisture condensation.
To avoid fuel spillage during the
mechanized refuelling of the trac-
tor, remove the mesh filter from the
fuel tank neck. The mesh filter is
designed for tractor manual refuel-
ling under field conditions.
Fill in the tractor with oils and lub-
ricants recommended by the manu-
facturer. Application of other lubri-
cating materials i s stri ctl y forbi d-
den!
Any operations related to cleaning
the engine and tractor, pre-
operation, maintenance, etc. should
be performed with the engine
stopped and tractor braked.
Cooling system operates under
pressure, which is maintained by a
valve installed in the cap of the fill-
er neck. It i s dangerous to re-
move the l i d on the hot di esel
engi ne. To avoid burns of hands
and face, unplug the radiator neck
cap on the hot engine carefully,
having put a thick cloth on the cap
and a gauntlet on the hand.
To avoid burns, be careful when
draining the cooling fluid or water
from the cooling system and/or hot
oil from the engine, hydraulic sys-
tem and transmission.
When servicing the storage bat-
teries, be careful because the con-
tact of electrolyte with the skin
causes burns.
To avoid the risk of explosion,
keep any sources of open flame
away from the engine fuel system
and storage batteries.
Keep the tractor and its equip-
ment, particularly the brakes and
steering, in serviceable condition to
ensure your and bystanders safety.
Do not make any modifications to
the tractor or any parts thereof
without approval of your dealer and
manufacturer.

Safety requi rements duri ng op-
erati on and mai ntenance of el ec-
tri cal equi pment

To avoid damage of semiconduc-
tor devices and resistors, observe
the following precautions:
- do not disconnect the storage bat-
tery (SB) terminals with the engine
running. This will cause peak volt-
age to appear in the discharge cir-
cuit and lead to unavoidable failure
of diodes and transistors;
- do not disconnect electric cables
until the engine is shut down and
all switches are off;
- do not allow a short circuit to oc-
cur due to incorrect wire connec-
tion. Short circuit or wrong polarity
will cause failure of diodes and
transistors;
- do not connect the SB to electrical
equipment system until the polarity

14
of outputs and voltage is verified;
- do not check the presence of
electric current by producing a
spark, since this would lead to im-
mediate breakdown of the transis-
tors.

Hygi eni c requi rements

Fill in a vacuum flask with fresh
portable water daily.
Firs-air kit shall be necessarily
stuffed with bandages, tincture of
iodine, ammonia spirit, borated pet-
rolatum, soda, validol and dipyrone.
Depending on the operating con-
ditions, use the natural ventilation
of the cab or the latters heating
and cooling unit.
Should the durations of the con-
tinuous work on the tractor exceed
2.5 hours within a working shift, the
noise protection facilities to State
Standard 12.4.051-87 (ear-
plugs, antiphones) shall be used.

Fi re safety requi rements

The tractor shall be provided with
fire-fighting equipment, i.e. a spade
and fire extinguisher. It is forbidden
to operate the tractor without fire-
extinguishing equipment.
The places for parking the tractor
and storing the combustive and lu-
bricating materials shall be tilled
with a strip of min 3 m wide and
provided with fire-extinguishing
equipment.
Do not allow manifold and silenc-
er soiling with dust, fuel, straw, etc.
Do not allow straw to wind around
rotating parts of mechanisms unit-
ized with the tractor.
When washing the parts and as-
sembly units in kerosene or gaso-
line, take measures excluding igni-
tion of flushing liquid vapours.
Do not operate the tractor in fire-
risky place with the bonnet and
other protective facilities removed
from the heated engine parts.
Do not allow using open flame to
heat oil in engine pan or burn out
soiling of radiator core.
If a seat of fire occurs, strew sand
over it and cover it with tarpaulin,
sack cloth or other thick fabric. Use
a carbon dioxide fire extinguisher.
Do not extinguish burning fuel with
water.
Watch that there are no highly in-
flammable materials near the mani-
fold and the silencer when the en-
gine is running.
When harvesting hay, straw,
working in places of higher fire risk,
apply spark suppressors in the ex-
haust system as an assembly with
the silencer or independently.

Specifications BELARUS series 900

15
SPECIFICATIONS

Parameter 900/900.3 920/920.2/920.3 950/950.3 952/952.2/952.3
Length, mm: total
without weights
to wheels
4120/4440
3840/4440
3700
4120/4130/4440
3970/4000/4060
3840/3850/3850
4120/4440
3840/4060
3700
4120/4130/4400
3970/4000/4060
3840/3850/3850
Width, mm 1970
Height to cab top, mm 2820 2850 2820 2850
D Longitudinal base, mm 237020 245020 237020 245020
Rear wheel track, mm 1500-1600/1800-2100
F Front wheel track, mm 1450-1850 1410-1990/1420-1970 1450-1850 1410-1970/1420-1970
G Clearance, mm 465
Tire size: front wheels 9,00-20;9,00R20 13,6-20;360/70R24 9,00-20;9,00R20 13,6-20;360/70R24
rear wheels 18,4R34 (-11)
16,9R38;
18,4R34 (-11)
18,4R34 (-11)
16,9R38;
18,4R34
Service weight
(without ballast), kg
3850/3950 4100/4200/4300 3850/3950 4100/4200/4300
Numbers of tractor component parts
Name plate of the tractor containing the
serial numbers of the tractor and engine.


16
The serial number of the tractor is replicat-
ed on the front end of the right-hand side
member of the half-frame (on the right
plate of front balance weights).

Engine number (is duplicated on engine
name plate attached on the right of the
cylinder block).

Clutch number (on the left of the clutch
housing).
Gearbox number (on the left of the
gearbox housing)


17

Transmission number (on the rear axle
housing from behind).

Transmission number for the tractor with
hydraulic lift (on the rear axle housing at
the joint with the gearbox on the right).

FDA number (on the right-hand sleeve at the
front of the FDA (822) or on the central housing
at the front of the FDA (72)).

Cab serial number and OECD certificate num-
ber (inside the cab on the left).


18
Engine

Engine make -243/243C -245.5/-245.5C -245.43 S2 -245.5 S2
Type Four-stroke, in-
line, naturally as-
pirated
Four-stroke, in-
line, turbocharged
Four-stroke, in-
line, turbo-
charged, with in-
termediate charge
air cooling
Four-stroke, in-
line, turbo-
charged, with in-
termediate charge
air cooling
Number of cylinders 4
Method of mixing Direct injection
Compression (calculated) 16 15.1 15.1 15.1
Bore, mm 110
Stroke, mm 125
Displacement, l 4.75
Order 1-3-4-2
Cooling system Liquid
Rated speed, rpm 2200

1800 1800 1800
Max speed, rpm 2380 1980 2050 2070
Min speed, rpm 600 700 800 800
Rated power, kW (H.P.) 60 (81)
at 2200 rpm
65 (89)
at 1800 rpm
62 (83.7)
at 1800 rpm
70 (94.5)
at 1800 rpm
Max torque Nm
296.9 at 1400 rpm
386
at 1400 rpm
411
at 1400 rpm
464
at 1400 rpm
Clearance between intake
and exhaust valves and
rockers at idle running,
mm
0.250.30
0.250.30 for
intake valves,
0.400.45 for
exhaust valves
0.200.30 for
intake valves,
0.350.50 for
exhaust valves
0.200.30 for
intake valves,
0.350.50 for
exhaust valves
Advance angle of fuel in-
jection before upper dead
point (UDP), degrees
201/161
181/131
or 91
4.00.5 4.00.5
Fuel injection pressure,
MPa
21.622.4 21.622.4 23.524.7 23.524.7

19

Diesel engine lubrication system
Type: combined, with oil radiator (or
LOHE for tractors
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3).
Min oil pressure:
0.08 MPa (0.8 kgf/cm
2
) at 600 rpm.
Normal oil pressure:
0.20.3 MPa (23 kgf/cm
2
).
Max pressure at cold diesel engine: up
to 0.6 MPa (6 kgf/cm
2
).
Lubrication system capacity: 12 l.
Motor oil brands:
- from -40 to +5: -8; -82,
-82 or 43/82 (SAE-20,
SAE 10W-20);
- from +5 to +50: -10; -102;
-102 (SAE-30);
- multigrade oil: SAE 15W-40.
Engine feed system
Fuel pump: 4-plunger pump, in-line, with
boost pump.
Governor: mechanical, variable-speed
(with antismoke pneumatic equalizer for
diesel engines -245.5/-245.5C/
-245.5 S2/-245.43 S2).
Turbocharger: centripetal radial turbine
on a shaft with centrifugal compressor (-
245.5/ -245.5C/-245.5 S2/-245.43
S2).
Charge air cooler (for -245.5S2/-
245.43S2): air-air type, mounted prior to
water radiator.
Fuel filters: coarse filter and secondary fil-
ter (with removable paper filter element).
Fuel brand: Diesel: summer
-0.2-40, -0.5-40; winter -0.2, -0.5; at -
50 -0.2, -0.4.
Fuel tank capacity: 130 l
(2 tanks); 120 l (one tank) for tractors with
hydraulic lift.
Air cleaner: combined, with centrifugal
and oil-bath air cleaning.
Air cleaner oil bath capacity: 1.5 l (3.0 l
for the -245.5 engine).
Donaldson dry-type air cleaner for -
245.5 S2/ -245.43 S2.
Engine starting system
Electric starter type, 12 V or 24 V.
Easy starting facilities:
- electric torch pre-heater (filament plug in
the intake manifold) or filament plugs in
diesel cylinder head (for the engines with
the index S2).
Engine cooling system
Type: water, closed with forced liquid cir-
culation, temperature controlled by the
thermostatic regulator and a shutter from
the drivers seat, with expansion tank (for
-245.5 S2/-245.43 S2).
Normal operating temperature: from 80
to 100.
Cooling system capacity: 20 l.
Steering control
Type: Hydrostatic power steering with
steering cylinder in the steering linkage.
Independent oil tank of HPS (for Belarus -
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3).
Safety valve adjustment pressure 14
MPa.
Shock valve adjustment pressure 20
MPa.
Oil brands:
BECHEM Stariol 32;
ADDINAL Hydraulikol HLP 32;
THK Hydraulic HLP 32.
Feed pump capacity: 21 l/min (28 l/min)
*

Hydraulic cylinder: two-way type,
bore: 50 mm (63 mm)
*

stroke: 200 mm.
Metering pump: volumetric constant: 100
cm
3
/rev (160 cm
3
/rev)
*
, operating pres-
sure: from 10 to 14 MPa. Installed at the
front wall of the cab.
Steering wheel position control limits:
by inclination: from 25 to 40 with fixa-
tion through 5;
by height: within the range of 100 mm.
Steering wheel free play: not more

*
For the FDA with planetary-cylindrical reducing
gears (BELARUS-920.2/920.3/952.2/952.3)

20
than 25.
Clutch
Type: friction, dry, single-disk, with tangen-
tial suspension of the pressure plate.
Driven disk diameter 340 mm.
Gearbox
Type: 7/2, mechanical, stepwise, syn-
chronized, dual-range.
I range (stage): 1
st
, 2
nd
and 3
rd
gear of for-
ward motion and one gear of reverse.
II range (stage): 1
st
, 2
nd
, 3
rd
and 4
th
gears
of forward motion and one of reverse.

ATTENTION! The 4
th
gear can be only
engaged if the II range is selected.

Calculated speeds (km/h) of BELARUS 900 series tractors:

Rated engine rotational speed, rpm: 2200
Rear tyres: 18.4R34
Synchronized splitter
Motion
Gear
number
Gear
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I
2.5
3.2
2
7.1
9.4
3
8.4
11.1
1
II
4.2
5.5
2
12.1
16.0
3
14.3
18.9
4
26.6
35.2
rear
1R
5.2
6.8
2R II
8.8
11.6

Rear tyres: 16.9R38
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I
2.5
3.4
2
7.4
9.8
3
8.7
11.6
1
II
4.3
5.7
2
12.6
16.6
3
14.9
19.7
4
27.7
36.6
rear
1R I
5.4
7.1
2R II
9.1
12.1

21

Rear tyres: 16.9R38
Synchronized multiplier
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I
2.8
3.6
2
8.0
10.6
3
9.5
12.5
1
II
4.7
6.2
2
13.6
18.0
3
16.1
21.3
4
29.9
39.6
rear
1R I
5.8
7.7
2R II
9.9
13.1
Rear tyres: 18.4R34
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I
2.7
3.5
2
7.7
10.2
3
9.1
12.0
1
II
4.5
6.0
2
13.1
17.3
3
15.5
20.5
4
28.8
38.1
rear
1R I
5.6
7.4
2R II
9.5
12.6
Rear tyres: 18.4R34
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I
2.0
2.7
2
5.8
7.7
3
6.9
9.1
1
II
3.4
4.5
2
9.9
13.1
3
11.7
15.5
4
21.8
28.8
rear
1R I
4.2
5.6
2R II
7.2
9.5
Rear tyres: 16.9R38
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I
2.1
2.8
2
6.0
8.0
3
7.1
9.4533
1
II
3.5
4.7
2
10.3
13.6
3
12.2
16.1
4
22.6
29.9
rear
1R I
4.4
5.8
2R II
7.5
9.9

22

ATTENTION! Simultaneous engage-
ment of the 4
th
forward gear and re-
verse gear is excluded by the design to
avoid high reverse speeds of the trac-
tor.

Rear tyres: 16.9R38
Reverse gear
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I 2.8
II 4.7
2
I 8.0
II 13.6
3
I 9.5
II 16.1
4 29.9
rear
1
I 2.6
II 4.4
2
I 7.5
II 12.7
3
I 8.8
II 15.0
Rear tyres: 16.9R38
Reverse gear
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I 3.4
II 5.7
2
I 9.8
II 16.6
3
I 11.6
II 19.7
4 36.6
rear
1
I 3.1
II 5.4
2
I 9.1
II 15.6
3
I 10.8
II 18.7
Rear tyres: 18.4R34
Reverse gear
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I 2.7
II 4.5
2
I 7.7
II 13.1
3
I 9.1
II 15.5
4 28.8
rear
1
I 2.5
II 4.2
2
I 7.2
II 12.2
3
I 8.5
II 14.5
Rear tyres: 18.4R34
Reverse gear
Motion
Gear
number
Range
number
V tr,
km/h
front
1
I 3.2428
II 5.5215
2
I 9.3909
II 15.9898
3
I 11.1207
II 18.9353
4 35.2157
rear
1
I 3.0266
II 5.1534
2
I 8.7648
II 14.9238
3
I 10.3794
II 17.6730

23
Calculated speeds (km/h) of the BELARUS tractors of the series 900 with a speed-
reducing unit:

Rear tyres: 18.4R34

V tr with a mechanical
speed-reducing unit, km/h V tr with a hydraulic speed-reducing unit, km/h
Mechanical
speed-
reducing unit
range I
Mechani-
cal speed-
reducing
unit range
II
Hydraulic speed-reducing
unit range I
Hydraulic speed-
reducing unit
range II
G
e
a
r

N
o
.

R
a
n
g
e

N
o
.

V

t
r
,

k
m
/
h

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

4.28 1.44 1.03 0.34 4.28 1.44 1.03 0.3
1
I

2.0 0.47 1.4 2.0 5.9 0 0.5 0.8 1.4 2.0 6.0
2.7 0.6 1.8 2.6 7.8 0.12 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.6 7.9
2 5.8

7.7
3 6.9
9.1
1
II

3.4 0.8 2.4 3.3 10.0 0.3 0.8 1.7 2.4 3.34 10.0
4.5 1.1 3.1 4.4 13.3 0.5 1.1 2.3 3.1 4.4 13.3
2 9.9

13.1
3 11.7
15.5
4 21.8
28.8
1R I 4.2 1.0 3.0 4.1 12.4 0 1.0 0 3.0 4.1 12.4
5.6 1.3 3.9 5.4 16.4 0.3 1.3 0.3 3.9 5.4 16.4
2R II 7.2 1.7 5.0 7.0 0.6 1.7 0.6 5.0 7.0
9.5 2.2 6.6 9.2 1.1 2.3 1.1 6.7 9.2


24

Rear tyres: 18.4R34

V tr with a mechanical
speed-reducing unit, km/h
V tr with a hydraulic speed-reducing unit, km/h
Mechanical
speed-
reducing unit
range I
Mechanical
speed-
reducing
unit range II
unit range I
Hydraulic
speed-reducing
unit range II
G
e
a
r

N
o
.

R
a
n
g
e

N
o
.

V

t
r
,

k
m
/
h

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

4.28 1.44 1.03 0.34 4.28 1.44 1.03 0.3
1
I

2.5 0.6 1.7 2.4 7.2 0 0.6 0.8 1.7 2.4 7.2
3.2 0.8 2.3 3.1 9.5 0.1 0.8 1.2 2.39 3.1 9.5
2 7.1

9.34
3 8.4
11.1
1
II

4.2 1.0 2.9 4.1 12.3 0.3 1.0 1.7 2.9 4.1 12.3
5.5 1.3 3.8 5.4 16.2 0.5 1.3 2.3 3.8 5.4 16.2
2 12.1

16.0
3 14.3
19.0
4 26.6
35.2
1R I 5.2 1.2 3.6 5.0 15.2 0 1.24 0 3.6 5.0 15.2
6.8 1.6 4.7 6.6 20.1 0.3 1.6 0.3 4.7 6.6 20.1
2R II 8.8 2.1 6.1 8.5 0.6 2.06 0.6 6.1 8.5
11.6 2.7 8.1 11.3 1.1 2.7 1.1 8.1 11.3


25

Rear tyres: 16.9R38

V tr with a mechanical speed-
reducing unit, km/h
Mechanical
speed-reducing
unit range I
Mechanical
speed-
reducing
unit range II
unit range I
Hydraulic speed-
reducing unit
range II
G
e
a
r

N
o
.

R
a
n
g
e

N
o
.

V

t
r
,

k
m
/
h

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

4.28 1.44 1.03 0.34 4.28 1.44 1.03 0.3
1
I

2.1 0.5 1.4 2.0 6.1 0 0.5 0.8 1.4 2.0 6.1

2.8 0.6 1.9 2.7 0.1 0.6 1.2 1.9 2.7 8.1
2
6.0

8.0
3
7.1

9.5
1
II

3.5 0.8 2.5 3.4 10.4 0.3 0.8 1.7 2.5 3.4 10.4

4.7 1.1 3.3 4.6 13.8 0.5 1.1 2.3 3.26 4.6 13.8
2
10.3

13.6
3
12.2

16.1
4
22.6

30.0
1R I
4.4 1.0 3.0 4.3 12.9 0 1.0 0 3.0 4.3 13.0

5.8 1.4 4.0 5.6 17.1 0.3 1.4 0.3 4.0 5.6 17.1
2R II
7.5 1.7 5.2 7.3 0.6 1.7 0.6 5.2 7.3

9.9 2.3 6.9 9.6 1.1 2.3 1.1 6.9 9.6


26

Rear tyres: 16.9R38

V tr, with a mechanical
speed-reducing unit, km/h
Mechanical
speed-
reducing unit
range I
Mechani-
cal speed-
reducing
unit range
II
unit range I
Hydraulic speed-
reducing unit
range II
G
e
a
r

N
o
.

R
a
n
g
e

N
o
.

V

t
r
,

k
m
/
h

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

h
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

4.28 1.44 1.03 0.34 4.28 1.44 1.03 0.3
1
I

2.5
0.6 1.8 2.5 7.5 0 0.6 0.8 1.8 2.5 7.5
3.4
0.8 2.3 3.3 10.0 0.1 0.8 1.2 2.3 3.3 9.9
2 7.4

9.8
3 8.7
11.6
1
II

4.3
1.0 3.0 4.2 12.8 0.3 1.0 1.7 3.0 4.2 12.8
5.7
1.3 4.0 5.6 16.9 0.5 1.3 2.3 4.0 5.6 16.9
2 12.6

16.6
3 14.9
19.7
4 27.7
36.6
1R I 5.4
1.3 3.7 5.2 15.8 0 1.3 0 3.7 5.2 15.8
7.1
1.7 5.0 6.9 20.9 0.3 1.7 0.3 5.0 6.9 20.9
2R II 9.1
2.1 6.3 8.9 0.6 2.1 0.6 6.3 8.9
12.1
2.8 8.4 11.7 1.1 2.82 1.1 8.4 11.7


27
Rear tyres: 16.9R38
Reverse gear

V tr, with a mechanical speed-reducing
unit, km/h
Mechanical speed-
reducing unit range I
Mechanical speed-
reducing unit range
II
Motion Gear No. Range No. V tr, km/h
1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

4.28 1.44 1.03 0.34
front

1 I 2.8 0.6 2.0 2.7 8.1
II 4.7 1.1 3.3 4.6 13.8
2 I 8.0

II 13.6
3 I 9.5
II 16.11
4 30.0
rear

1 I 2.6 0.6 1.8 2.5 7.6
II 4.4 1.0 3.0 4.3 12.9
2 I 7.5

II 12.7
3 I 8.8
II 15.0
4

Rear tyres: 16.9R38
Reverse gear

unit, km/h
Mechanical speed-
Mechanical speed-
reducing unit range
II
1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

4.28 1.44 1.03 0.34
front

1 I 3.4 0.8 2.3 3.3 10.0
II 5.7 1.3 4.0 5.6 16.9
2 I 9.8

II 16.6
3 I 11.6
II 19.7
4 36.6
rear

1 I 3.1 0.7 2.2 3.1 9.2
II 5.4 1.3 3.7 5.2 15.7
2 I 9.1

II 15.5
3 I 10.8
II 18.4
4

28
Rear tyres: 18.4R34
Reverse gear

unit, km/h
Mechanical speed-
Mechanical speed-
reducing unit range
II
1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
-
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
-
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

4.28 1.44 1.03 0.34
front

1 I 2.7 0.6 1.8 2.6 7.8
II 4.5 1.1 3.1 4.4 13.3
2 I 7.7

II 13.1
3 I 9.1
II 15.5
4 28.8
rear

1 I 2.5 0.6 1.75 2.4 7.3
II 4.2 1.0 2.9 4.1 12.4
2 I 7.2

II 12.2
3 I 8.5
II 14.5
4

Rear tyres: 18.4R34
Reverse gear

unit, km/h
Mechanical speed-
reducing unit range
I
Mechanical speed-
reducing unit range
II
1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
-
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

1
s
t

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
-
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

2
n
d

g
e
a
r

o
f

t
h
e

m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

s
p
e
e
d
-
r
e
d
u
c
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

4.28 1.44 1.03 0.34
front

1 I 3.2 0.8 2.6 3.1 9.5
II 5.5 1.3 3.8 5.4 16.2
2 I 9.4

II 16.0
3 I 11.1
II 19.0
4 35.2
rear

1 I 3.0 0.7 2.1 3.0 9.0
II 5.2 1.2 3.61 5.0 15.2
2 I 8.8

II 15.0
3 I 10.4
II 17.7
4


29
Synchronized splitter (reducing gear)
Type: mechanical, synchronized, with
direct drive and retarding gear. Located
between the clutch and gearbox and
controlled by the lever under the steer-
ing column. Allows reducing speed at
each gear 1.32 times and obtaining 14
forward gears and 4 reverse gears.

direct drive and multiplying gear. Locat-
ed between the clutch and gearbox and
allows increasing speed at each gear
1.32 times.

Reverse gear (optional)
forward motion and reverse (i=-1.07 or
i=-1.88). Installed instead of step-down
reducing gear and allows obtaining 9
forward gears and 8 reverse ones.

Speed-reducing unit (optional)
Type: mechanical, two-range, two-
speed. It allows super low speeds to be
obtained. Installed instead of left cover
of the gearbox and allows obtaining ad-
ditionally 16 forward gears and 16 re-
verse ones.

Important! When using the speed-
reducing unit, engage only the 1
st
gear
in the gearbox and the 1
st
reverse gear
(I-I and I-R).

30
Rear axle
Main gear: a pair of bevel gears with
circular sprocket teeth.
Final drive: a pair of cylindrical gears.
Differential: conical, four-satellite type.
Differential lock mechanism: hydraulic,
dry, friction coupling or multi-disk friction
coupling of wet type (optional).
Brakes
Service: rear wheels: dry two- and three-
disk type with mechanical servo drive. Disk
diameter: 204 mm (or 8-disk type operating
in an oil bath (optional))
Parking: dry disk-type with mechanical
manual drive. Disk diameter: 180 mm (or 4-
disk type operating in an oil bath (option-
al)).

Front driving axle
Type: portal, with sliding housings of bevel
reducing gears (Belarus-920/952) or portal,
with non-sliding bar, with planetary reduc-
ing gears (Belarus-
920.2/952.2/920.3/952.3)
Main gear: bevel gears with auger teeth.
Differential type: self-locking, of higher
friction.
Final drive: wheel reduction gears with
straight bevel pairs (Belarus-
920.2/952.2/920.3/952.3).
Transmission oils: -15, -15 or
-10 (SAE 80W-90); -17.
Drive: from transfer gear by two cardan
shafts with intermediate support.
FDA control: mechanical, by the lever for
operators right hand.
3 operating modes:
FDA is DISENGAGED;
FDA is ENGAGED forcedly;
FDA is ENGAGED/DISENGAGED auto-
matically.

Power take-off shaft (PTO) drive
Type: independent two-speed and syn-
chronous.
Master clutch: planetary reducing gear
with band brakes.
PTO control: mechanical (electro-
hydraulic for tractors with a hydraulic
lift) by means of the lever at the right-
side control board.
PTO coupler shank speed:
Independent drive:
540 rpm at 2081 rpm of the diesel en-
gine (Belarus-900/920);
540 rpm at 1632 pm of the diesel en-
gine (Belarus-950/952);
gine (Belarus-900/920)
gine (Belarus-950/952)
Synchronous drive: 4.76 revolu-
tions/metre of travel with the rear tyres
16,9R38 mounted.
Removable PTO coupler shank: in ac-
cordance with the SAE standard with 6
splines for 540 rpm and 21 splines for
1000 rpm.
Rotation: clockwise as seen from the
shaft butt.
Hydraulic system
Type: universal, unit-principal, with in-
dependent power cylinder (Belarus-
900/920/950/952) or with hydraulic lift,
with two self-contained cylinders
(Belarus-900.3/920.2/920.3/
950.3/952.2/952.3).
Maximum pressure in the hydraulic
system: 18...20 MPa.
Distributor: spool valve type:
80-3/4-222- (80-3/4-111- op-
tional);
70-1221C; RS213 Belarus for trac-
tors with power governor;
70-1221; RS213 Mita flow-type
for tractors with hydraulic lift.
Hydraulic system outlets: two side
and one rear outlets (drain one op-
tional).
RMA control system has three operat-
ing modes:
power;
position;
high-altitude.
Hydraulic system oil brands:
BECHEM Stariol 32;
ADDINAL Hydraulikol HLP 32;
THK Hydraulic HLP32.
Rear mounted attachment
Type: three-point mounted system of

31
category 2
Lifting capacity: 3000 kg at the ends of
longitudinal rods
Electrical equipment
Voltage: 12 V.
Start system voltage: 12 V or 24 V.
Power supply system: two storage bat-
teries, 12 V each, connected in parallel
(series connection when starting the en-
gine for supplying the starter with the
voltage of 24 V).
Alternator
14 V, 1000 W (1150 W for Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3).
Lighting system and light alarm:
front headlights with lower and dis-
tance light;
front and rear work lights;
clearance and brake lights;
dashboard, cab and number plate light-
ing;
emergency warning lights;
road-train sign.

Pneumatic system
Compressor
Type: single-cylinder, air-cooled.
Trailer brake control actuator
Type: pneumatic, single-ended, inter-
locked with tractor brakes.
Twin actuator for Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3
Pressure restricted by safety valve:
0.650.80 MPa.

Wheels
Front:
9.00R20 or 9.0-20 (Belarus-
900/900.3/950/950.3) main;
13.6-20 (Belarus-920/952) main;
11.2-20 (Belarus-920/952) optional;
360/70R24 (Belarus-920.2/920.3/
952.2/952.3) main.

Rear:
16,9R38 (Belarus-920/952) main;
18,4R34 (Belarus- /920.3/952.2/
952.3) main;
18,4R34 (-11) (Belarus-900/
900.3/920.2/950/950.3) main.

Other equipment
Front and rear wipers, cab heating and
ventilation system, windshield washer,
cab lighting dome, air conditioner (op-
tional).

Controls and Instrumentation BELARUS series 900

32
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

1. Cooling system radiator shutter con-
trol.
2. Emergency control lamps switch.
3. Steering-wheel-mounted multifunction
switch (turn, turn indicators, up-
per/lower beam).
4. Combination meter.
5. Control lamps block.
6. Electric tachospeedometer.
7. Air distributors.
8. Radio receiver (if installed).
9. Recirculation shutters.
10. Windscreen wiper switch.
11. Cab fan and heater switch.
12. Rear working lights switch.
13. Front working lights switch.
14. Road-train sign lighting switch.
15. Cab light switch.
16. Control of the left-side outputs of the
hydraulic system.
17. Control of the right-side outputs of
the hydraulic system.

18. Control of the left rear outputs of the
hydraulic system.
19. Tachospeedometer control board.
20. Starter and instrumentation switch.
21. Control of the step-down reduction
gear and shuttle gear (if installed).
22. Starting aid switch (for tractors
equipped with an electric torch pre-
heater).
23. Windscreen washer switch.
24. Clearance lights and headlights
switch.
25. Fuel feed control pedal.
26. Right service brake pedal.
27. Left service brake pedal.
28. Rear axle differential lock control.
29. Steering column inclination control.
30. Engine shutdown cord handle
31. Cab heater valve control (if installed).
32. Clutch pedal.
33. Plug.


33
33. Parking brake lever.
34. Gearbox control lever.
35. Stop bumper of power governor con-
trol lever.
36. Fuel feed control arm.
37. PTO control lever.
38. Power governor control arm.
39. Signal switch arm of power and posi-
tion control sensors (if installed).
40. SB switch (on the BELARUS-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3 tractors, the SB
switch is located under the bonnet in the
SB zone)

41. Speed-reducer gear switch arm (if
installed).
42. Speed-reducer gear range switch
arm (if installed).
43. Control handle of the hydraulic hook
claws.
44. PTO switch arm (independ-
ent/synchronized).
45. Arm for fixing the hinging mechanism
in the lifted position (version with a power
governor).
46. FDA drive control arm.
47. Gearbox control levers.
48. Rear axle differential lock control
49. PTO control
50. Hydraulic hoist control levers
51. Joy stick for remote control of the hy-
draulic system distributor (if installed)

IMPORTANT! Prior to working on the tractor, study the controls and instrumentation
and their functions.

34
Instrumentation and Switches
Starter and instrumentation switch (1)
Switch (1) has four positions:
0 Off
I Consuming units On
II Starter On (not fixed)
III Radio receiver ON (key turned counter-
clockwise)


35
1. Instrumentation
The schematics of the instrument dashboards 80-3805010-1 and 826-3805010 are giv-
en in the section Appendix.
The instrumentation includes:
- the combination meter (2) with sensors;
- the electric tachospeedometer (1) with the control board (3) and sensors;
- the electric light and audible alarms combined into two pilot lamp units (HG1 and HG2)
in the instrument dashboard 80-3805010-1 or into the pilot lamp unit and combination
meter in the instrument dashboard 826-3805010.
To switch on the instruments, turn the starter and instrumentation switch to the I posi-
tion. Then the voltage will be applied to the terminal K3 of the switch, then to the relay
for power supply of the instruments, to the fuse (F2) of the unit and further to the units
(HG1 and HG2), tachospeedometer (1), alarm device (2), combination meter (1)
and speed sensors (BV1 and BV2).
The instrument pointers shall move to the zero position or to the position corresponding
to the true value of the parameter controlled by the system at the moment.
In case of deviation of readings of the instruments from their true values, detect the
cause of the fault following the recommendations below.

1.1. Tachospeedometer 70.3813 (Fig. 1)

Fig. 1. Tachospeedometer (1):

1. Engine crankshaft rotational speed scale, rpm.
2. PTO II rotational speed scale 1000 rpm.
3. PTO I rotational speed scale 540 rpm.
4. PTO rotational speed display (LED).
5. Engine running hours indication, h.
6. Tractor speed indication, km/h.
7. Display of engine running hours and tractor speed, km/h.
8. Pointer indicator of the engine crankshaft speed (LCD).

The electric tachospeedometer 703813 installed in the dashboard operates as follows:
On setting the starter and instrument switch is put to position I when the tractor is
stopped, the display (7) shows the engine running hours (5);

36
When the tractor is moving, the display (7) shows the tractor speed indication (6)
(km/h), while the indication (5) disappears. The electric signal of the speed comes from
the speed sensors mounted on the rear axle cover (BV1, BV2). The speed readings are
taken through a signal from the sensor mounted on the pinion of the final drive of the
wheel rotating at lesser speed. The calculated speed is higher than the actual one, be-
cause no tractor skid is the taken into account;
On starting the engine, the pointer indicator (8) moves round the index dial (1) to display
the rotational speed of the engine crankshaft. At the same time, the display (4) shows the
PTO indication (rpm). The scale (3) is assigned to the PTO I and the scale (2) to the
PTO II. The electric signal of the rotational speed is taken from the phase winding of the
alternator.
1.2. Tachospeedometer control board (Fig. 2)
The control board is installed in the dashboard and serves for programming the
tachospeedometer to the specific model of the Belarus tractor.

Fig. 2. Control board (3):

1 Button for setting the tachospeedometer to the programming mode and selecting the
programming parameter on the tachospeedometer display (7). 2 Button for selecting
the value of the coded parameter shown on the display (7)

1.3. Programming the tachospeedometer 70.3813
ATTENTION! The tachospeedometer has been programmed just to your tractor make at
the factory. Re-programming is required in case of tyre type changing. Do not re-program
the tachospeedometer, if unnecessary.
The tachospeedometer shall be programmed to ensure the correct display of the follow-
ing tractors parameters: engine rotational speed, tractor motion speed and PTO rota-
tional speed (540 and 1000 rpm).
Programming procedure:
Remove the control board cover;
Press the button (1) to enter the programming mode (Fig. 2).
1. To ensure the correct display of the tractor motion speed, it is necessary to program
the tachospeedometer to the number of teeth of the pinion at the place of installation of
the speed sensors (parameter Z) and rear wheel rolling radius (parameter R). To do
this:
press the button (1) of the board and call the parameters Z and R in turn to the dis-
play (3) of the tachospeedometer (4);
press the button (2) of the board and set the number of teeth (Z) according to Table 1
and value Rk according to Table 2:
PARAMETER VALUE

37
Table 1
Number
of teeth
(Z)
Tractor make
69 Belarus 590; 80.1; 890; 900; 922; 950

Table 2
Tyre
mark
16,9R30 18,4L30 15,5R38 9,5-42
18,4R34
(-11)
16,9R38 18,4R38
Rk, m 0.698 0.720 0.755 0.730 0.770 0.800 0.830
Number
coded
700 720 755 730 770 800 830

3. To ensure the correct display of the engine and PTO rotational speeds (540 and
1000), program the engine make (parameter D):
press the button (1) and call the parameter D to the tachospeedometer display (3);
press the button (3) and set the necessary engine make according to Table 3:
Table 3
Engine make -243 -244 -245
-
245.5
Rated rotational
speed, rpm
2200 1700 2200 1800
Number pro-
grammed
243 244 245 245.5

On the expiry of seven seconds after programming, the instrument returns automatically
to the operating mode. Refit the board cover.
Note: If no information on the type of the tyre fitted is available, it is allowed to measure
the value Rk as a distance from the wheel axis to the ground prior to beginning the oper-
ation of the tractor.

1.4. Connecting the tachospeedometer
To connect the tachospeedometer to the instrumentation system, a 9-contact block is
provided on the rear panel of the instrument (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3

38
The identification of the block pins is given in Table 4.
Table 4
Pin Identification
1 to the terminal
2 to the power supply unit +12
3 to the board output Parameter selection
4 to the board output Parameter value
5 to the board output Mode
6 to the speed sensor BV2 (left wheel)
7 to the speed sensor BV1 (right wheel)
8 to the phase winding W of the alternator
9 to the instrument backlight lamps

1.5. Tachospeedometer diagnostics and troubleshooting
1. No instrument backlight:
Check the power supply wire connected to the pin 9 of the 9-contact block of the in-
strument (Fig. 3) check if the backlight lamps are intact.
2. Jerking and jumps of the pointer of the engine rotational speed indicator over
the dial: poor contact on the alternator terminal and, therefore, poor signal from the
phase winding of the alternator. Repair.
3. Jerking of the pointer and understating the reading of the engine rotational
speed:
- Check and adjust the tension of the alternator driving belt.
4. Over- or understated readings of the engine and PTOs rotational speeds (with
the normal movement of the pointer):
- Check the correctness of programming the instrument according to the engine make
(parameter D): (see item 1.3);
5. The counter of astronomical hours of the engine running fails to accumulate the
operating time: Check the connection of the wire to the contact 8 of the instrument
block and the presence of the frequency signal from the phase winding of the alternator.
6. Over- or understated readings of the tractor speed:
- Check the correctness of the instrument programming according to the rolling radius of
the rear wheels (Rk) (see item 1.3);
- Check the correctness of the programming according to the number of teeth of the half-
axle pinion (Z) (see item 1.3).
7. No readings of the tractor motion speed: Check the presence of signals from both
the speed sensors (BV1, BV2).
8. The readings 0207 km/h appear on the instrument indicator when the tractor
is moving:
- the numbers 0207 and, 12 seconds later, 0 appear from the right side of the scale
no signal from the right speed sensor (BV1).
- the numbers 0207 and then 0 appear from the left side of the scale no signal
from the left speed sensor (BV2).

39
1.6. Combined indicator 8083

Fig. 4. Tachospeedometer (1):
1 Engine rotational speed indicator (pointer indicator).
2 PTO 1000 rotational speed scale (opposite to the respective value of the PTO ro-
tational speed).
3 PTO 540 rotational speed scale (opposite to the respective value of the PTO rota-
tional speed).
4 Five-digit indicator.
5 LEDs lighting up in the mode of programming the coefficients K, R and Z
(opposite to the respective LED).
6 LEDs lighting up in the mode of display of the motion speed km/h and total en-
gine running time h (opposite to the respective LED).
7 Alarm of the overvoltage in the tractor on-board power system (red) operates, if
the voltage exceeds 18.5 V.
In this case the instrument is switched off because the protective device operates. Should the voltage
drop down to 16.5 V, the indicator returns to the operating state and the overvoltage indicator goes out.

Indicator operating procedure
On switching on the power supply, the indicator is switched to the main operating
mode. In case of absence of signals from the speed sensors the digital indicator (4)
shows the reading of the total engine running time and the LED located next to the sym-
bol h lights up.
Total engine running time:

Appearance of the pulses from the speed sensors at the input of the pulse indicator
causes the switching-on to the motion speed indication mode. Then the measured
calculated speed reading is shown on the digital indicator and the LED located next to
the symbol km/h lights up.
The calculated motion speed (km/h).

40

1.7. Programming the indicator 8083
Programming procedure:
- remove the control board cover;
- press the button (1) of the control panel and hold it down for at least 2 seconds;
- the display (7) shows the mode Adjusted total engine running time. In this case, the
LED located next to the symbol lights up.

- press repeatedly the button (1) to switch over cyclically the programmable parameters;
- press the button 2 to enter the required value of the selected parameter, then the least
significant digit (the first on the right) of the selected parameter of the indicator starts
blinking with the period of 0.3 s;
- set the required value of the less significant digit of the selected parameter by pressing
the button 2;
- press shortly the button 1; then the second from the right digit of the digital indicator
shall start blinking;
- set the required value in the second from the right digit of the parameter to be corrected
by pressing the button 2;
- press shortly the button 1; then the third from the right digit of the digital indicator shall
start blinking;
- set the required value in the third from the right digit of the parameter to be corrected by
pressing the button 2;
- fix the entered value of the parameter by pressing the button 1;
- on pressing the button 1 next time, the switching to the next parameter will occur.
To exit the programming mode, enter the adjusted time mode, press and hold down the
button (2) for at least 2 s; then the readings 8.8.8.8.8 shall be shown in the five-digit in-
dicator for 1-4 seconds and all the LEDs of the PTOs scales shall light up.


41
1. To display correctly the tractor motion speed, it is necessary to program the following
parameters in the following order:
2. Gear ratio of the wheel reduction gear (parameter K1) from Table 5:

Table 5
Gear ratio of the wheel reduction
gear (K1)
Tractor make
1.00 Belarus 590; 80.1; 890; 900; 922; 950
according to the number of teeth at the place of installation of the speed sensors (param-
eter Z1) from Table 6:

Table 6
Number
of teeth
(Z1)
Tractor make
69 Belarus 590; 80.1; 890; 900; 922; 950

rear wheel rolling radius (parameter R) from Table 7:

Table 7
Tyre
mark
16,9R30 18,4L30 15,5R38 9,5-42
18,4R34
(-11)
16,9R38 18,4R38
Rk, m 0.698 0.720 0.755 0.730 0.770 0.800 0.830
Number
coded
700 720 755 730 770 800 830

2. To display correctly the engine rotational speed, it is necessary to program the gear ra-
tio of the alternator drive (parameter K2) from Table 8 in the specified order:

42

Table 8
Gear ratio of the alternator
drive (K2)
Engine mark
2.36
-242 -243 -245
-
245.5

3. To display correctly the PTOs rotational speed (540 and 1000), it is necessary to pro-
gram the gear ratios of the PTO 540 K3 and PTO 1000 K4 from Table 9 and the num-
ber of teeth of the pinion at the place of installation of the PTO sensor Z2 in the speci-
fied order:

Table 9
The gear ratio of
the PTO drive
Engine mark
-242 -243 -245
-
245.5
540 (K3) 0.33 0.26 0.26 0.33
1000 (K4) 0.60 0.46 0.46 0.60

- in case of absence of the PTO rotational speed sensor (from the phase winding of the
alternator serves as that for indication of the PTO rotational speed), the entered value of
the parameter Z2 shall be equal to 0.

43
1.8. Indicator Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
1. The diagnostics of the faults according to items 1-3 and 5 is similar to that of the
tachospeedometer;
2. Over- or understated readings of the engine rotational speed and PTOs rota-
tional speed (with the normal movement of the pointer):
Check the correctness of programming the instrument according to the gear ratio of the
alternator drive (parameter K2): (see item 1.7);

1. Check the correctness of programming the instrument according to the rolling radius of
the rear wheels (R) (see item 1.7);
2. Check the correctness of programming according to the number of teeth of the half-
axle pinion (Z1) (see item 1.7);
3. Check the correctness of programming of the gear rate of the wheel reduction gear
(K1) (see item 1.7).
4. No readings of the tractor motion speed:
Check the presence of the signals from the both speed sensors (BV1, BV2).

5. Signalling of operation of the speed sensor in case of absence of a signal from
one of them:
a) in case of absence of the signal from the right wheel speed sensor (BV1), the symbol
is displayed on the right of the digital indicator within 12 s after starting the motion;
check the connection and serviceability of the right wheel speed sensor;
b) in case of absence of the signal from the left wheel speed sensor (BV2), the symbol
is displayed on the left of the digital indicator within 12 s after starting the motion;
check the connection and serviceability of the left wheel speed sensor.

44
1.9. Combined indicator 80.3813 and combined indicating unit 8105 (mounted
on the tractors with the instrument dashboard 826-3805010)
The combined indicator (hereinafter referred to as the CI) and the control board (herein-
after referred to as the CB) monitor the operational parameters of the systems and units
of the Belarus tractors and provide the operator with the information on malfunction or
failure of a particular system.
The CI includes the indicators and alarm lamps monitoring the following parameters:

1 speed indicator (pointer-type);
2 engine rotational speed indicator (pointer-type);
S1 LCD, multifunction indicator (for the description and principle of operation of the
S1 in more detail, see below)
S2 PTO rotational speed indicator (light indicator);
HG1 pilot lamp-alarm of the overvoltage in the on-board power supply system (red);
HG2 pilot lamp-alarm of the parking brake application (red);
HG3 pilot lamp-indicator of switching on the turn indicators of the tractor (green);
HG4 pilot lamp-indicator of switching on the turn indicators of the trailer (green);
HG5 pilot lamp-indicator of switching on the upper beam of the headlights (blue);
HG6, HG10 PTO scale segments (yellow);
HG7 HG9 PTO scale segments (green);
HG11, HG12 scale range indicator of the PTO 1000 and 540, respectively (yellow);


45

Operating principle of the PTO rotational speed indicator:
1. In the absence of the PTO rotational speed sensor, the designations of the
540 and 1000 scales as well as the indicator of the scale ranges HG11, HG12 light up
simultaneously on starting the engine (when a signal comes from the phase winding of
the alternator).
The indication of the PTO scale segments (with the account of the selected value
of the coefficient KV2) occurs on reaching the calculated PTO rotational speed equal to
750 (rpm).
For reference: the indication of the PTO scale segments occurs on reaching the
engine rotational speed of 1400-1500 (rpm) and more.
Here, depending on the selected PTO speed mode (540 or 1000), the lit PTO
scale segments designate the rotational speed values according to Table 10.

Table 10
Values of operation of the
1000 scale segments
(rpm)
Segment location on the
scale
Values of operation of the
540 scale segments
(rpm)
1150 HG6 650
1050 580
950 HG8 500
850 420
750* HG10 320

2. In the presence of the PTO rotational speed sensor installed over the pinion of the
PTO shank, the combined indicator selects automatically the range (320-750 or 750-
1250) depending on the rotational speed of the shank that is accompanied visually by
switching on the backlight of the digital designation of the scale 540 (HG11) or
1000 (HG12), here the threshold values of operation of the scale segments change in
accordance with the requirements of Table 10.
The five LED 5 scale segments (HG6 HG10) of the PTO light up starting from
the bottom one including the segment with the current value of the PTO rotational speed
included in the range of the lit state of that segment.

Notes:
- (*) is the rotational speed value, at which the 1000 scale designation is switched on;
- the 540 scale designation is only switched on in the presence of the signal from the
sensor and switched on switching on the 1000 designation or in case of absence of the
signal for more than 3 s.
- the exact value of the PTO rotational speed can be seen on the indicator S1.

S1, the LCD multifunction indicator displays simultaneously:

1. Digital designation of the position of the gearbox
control level (digits from 0 to 6) or lettering of the re-
duction gear switch (letters L, M, H, N);
2. Current numerical value of one of the parameters
of the tractor systems.

The combined indicator receives the information on
the position of the gearbox control lever from the
transmission control unit (if the complex electronic control system (CECS) is available) or
LCD information fields

46
from the control unit of the range reduction gear (if provided). This parameter is displayed
on the information field 1. If the control units are absent or not connected or in case of
wire breakage, the letter A is displayed in the information field 1.

The information field 2 displays the following parameters:
1. Total astronomic time of running the engine in hours.

The counter accumulates the information on the total engine running time and saves the
same on switching off the power supply.
The reading range is from 0 to 99999 hours of the engine running.

2. PTO rotational speed:

In this mode, the PTO rotational speed is displayed in the digital form depending on the
signal from the PTO rotational speed sensor.
The mode is active if the tractor is equipped with the PTO rotational speed sensor.

3. Volume of the fuel remaining (if the frequency fuel volume sensor FFVS is provided):

In this mode, the current volume of fuel in the tank (in litres) is displayed.
Attention! This mode is only available on the stopped tractor in the absence of signals
from the speed sensors.

NOTE. To switch over between the indication modes Total astronomic time of running
the engine, PTO rotational speed, Volume of the fuel remaining and fault messag-
es, press the Mode button of the control panel.

Operating principles of the pilot lamps

HG1 is the indicator of the overvoltage in the on-board power supply system:
It lights up when the voltage of the on-board power supply system of the tractor exceeds
19 V and goes out when the power supply voltage level drops down to 17 V;
In this case the CI is fully de-energized and restores its serviceability when the voltage
drops down to the rated value.

HG2 is the indicator of the parking brake application:
The Parking brake ( ) indicator starts blinking on operation of the
parking brake switch;

HG3, HG4 is the indicator of switching on the turn indicators of the tractor and trailer:
It blinks when the right or the left turn indicator is switched on by the steering-wheel-
mounted multifunction switch.


47
HG5 is the indicator of switching on the upper beam of the road headlights; it lights up
when the upper beam of the road headlights is ON.

Note! The indicators light up and go out synchronously with the changes in the states of
the system sensors.
Indicator control board

The programming board makes it possible to perform the manual programming of
the combined indicator by means of the Parameter () and Value ()
buttons and to modify the mode of display of the parameters to be shown on the LCD.
The diagnostic connector 1 located on the front panel of the control board
makes it possible to perform the automatic programming (reprogramming) of the CI by
means of a special instrument (if provided). Should such an instrument be unavailable,
the programming shall be performed by means of the above buttons.

1.10. CI programming procedure

1. On selecting the fixed value of the programming parameter:
1.1. On pressing the Parameter () button for the first time, the LCD is
switched to the mode of viewing the parameter to be programmed and its numerical val-
ue. On pressing this button repeatedly, the parameters are switched over cyclically.
1.2. On pressing successively the Parameter () button, the numerical value of
the set parameter to be programmed changes.
1.3. The mode is exited automatically if neither Parameter () nor Value
() button has been pressed within 7.0 sec.
On exiting the mode, the last values of the parameters selected by the Value
() button are saved.

2. When entering the unfixed value of the programming parameter:
2.1. Select the parameter, the values of which shall be set, by means of the Parameter
() button;
2.2. Press twice the Mode () button; the least digit of the numerical value starts
blinking;
2.3. To change the value of the blinking digit of the parameter, use the Value
() button;
2.4. To go to the more significant digit, press the Parameter () button;
2.5. To exit the mode of programming an unfixed value of any parameter, press twice the
Mode () button;
2.6. On exiting the above mode, the digits of the entered value of the parameter become
lit steadily;
2.7. The newly entered value is set the last in the list of the parameter values allowed to
be programmed;
MODE VALUE
PARAMETER

48
Entering the parameters to be programmed:
1. To display correctly the tractor motion speed, it is necessary to program in the speci-
fied order the following parameters:
Parameter Z is the number of teeth of the pinions of the final shafts of the driving
wheels (right and left), over which the (rotational) speed sensors are installed;

Select from the Table:
Number
of teeth
(Z)
Tractor make
69 Belarus 590; 80.1; 890; 900;
922; 950
Parameter I is the multiplying factor of the gear rate of the wheel reduction gear;

Select from the Table
Gear ratio of the wheel reduction
gear (I)
Tractor make
1.000 Belarus 590; 80.1; 890; 900; 922; 950
Parameter R
R is the rear wheel rolling radius (mm);

Tyre mark 16,9R30 18,4L30 15,5R38 9,5-42
18,4R34
(-11)
16,9R38 18,4R38
Rk, m 0.698 0.720 0.755 0.730 0.770 0.800 0.830
Number
coded
700 720 755 730 770 800 830

2. To display correctly the engine rotational speed, it is necessary to program in the spec-
ified order the gear ratio of the alternator drive (parameter K) from Table 8-6:


49
Gear ratio of the alternator
drive (2)
Engine mark
2.36
-242 -243 -245
-
245.5
2.41 D-260
3. To display correctly the PTOs rotational speeds (540 and 1000), it is necessary to
program the gear ratio PTO V2 and the number of teeth of the pinion at the place of
installation of the PTO sensor ZV in the specified order:

Gear ratio of the
PTO drive
Engine mark
-242 -243 -245
-
245.5
(V2) 0.60 0.46 0.46 0.60
- in the absence of the PTO rotational speed sensor (the signal from the phase winding of
the alternator serves as a signal for indication of the PTO rotational speed) the value of
the parameter ZV to be entered shall be equal to 0.
- in the absence of the PTO rotational speed sensor (the signal from the phase winding of
the alternator serves as a signal for indication of the PTO rotational speed) the value of
the parameter ZV to be entered shall be equal to 0.
4. To display correctly the residue of fuel in the tank (if the FFRS sensor is installed), it is
necessary to program the fuel tank volume V in the specified order:

For tractors with plastic fuel tank, set the value of 140 litres.
Also, when pressing the Parameter () button in the programming mode, the
list of programmable parameters displays the independent parameter of the adjusted
content of the counter of the astronomic time of running the engine. This parameter is
unavailable for measurement; it presents the precise (to 1/10 hours) value of the number
of hours of the engine running.

On switching on the backlight of the instrument scales (the main light switch (MLS)
is set to the positions II The backlight of the instrument dash and clearance lights are
ON and III The consumers of the position II and front road headlights and clearance
lights are ON), the brightness of the PTO indicator segments and LCD is automatically
reduced.

50

IMPORTANT! Each time the power supply of the CI is switched ON, the functioning
of the pointer indicators and PTO indicator scale elements is tested. Within one sec-
ond after this, the indicator pointers deviate from the initial marks beyond the follow-
ing first marks of the scales (beyond 5 for the motion speed and beyond 10 for the
rotational speed), and all the segments and designations 540 and 1000 of the
PTO scale are switched on.

1.11. Connecting the tachospeedometer

To connect the tachospeedometer to the instrumentation system, a 13-contact block
(1) and a 9-contact block (2) are provided on the rear panel of the instrument (Fig.
5).

Fig. 5
The identification of the pins of the blocks is given Tables (11) and (12).
Table 11
Contact Address of the XP1 connector pin
1 To the terminal (common)
2 To the power supply unit +12 V
3 To the rotational speed sensor PTO
4 To the rotational speed sensor Left wheel
5
6 To the rotational speed sensor Right wheel
7
8 To the phase winding of the alternator
9 To the switch of the backlight
10 To the switch of the headlight upper beam
11 To the switch of the trailer turn indicators
12 To the switch of the parking brake
13 To the switch of the tractor turn indicators


51
Table 12
Contact Address of the XP2 connector pin
1 To the terminal (common)
2 To the control board contact Indication Mode
3 To the control board contact Parameter Selection
4 To the control board contact Parameter Value
5
6
7 To the fuel volume sensor
8 To the control board contact M
9 To the control board contact +UBZ

1.12. Indicator Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
1. No instrument backlight:
Check the power supply voltage at the pin 9 of the 13-contact of the contact block (1)
of the instrument (Fig. 5);
2. Jerking and jumps of the pointer of the engine rotational speed indicator over
the dial: poor contact on the alternator terminal and, therefore, poor signal from the
phase winding of the alternator. Repair.
3. Jerking of the pointer and understating the reading of the engine rotational
speed:
- Check and adjust the tension of the alternator driving belt.
4. Over- or understated readings of the engine and PTOs rotational speeds (with
the normal movement of the pointer):
- Check the correctness of programming the instrument according to the gear ratio of the
alternator drive (parameter K): (see item 1.10);
5. The counter of astronomical hours of the engine running fails to accumulate the
operating time:
- Check the connection of the wire to the contact 8 of the instrument block (1) and
the presence of the frequency signal from the phase winding of the alternator.
1. Check the correctness of the instrument programming according to the rolling radius of
the rear wheels (R) (see item 1.10);
2. Check the correctness of the programming according to the number of teeth of the
half-axle pinion (Z) (see item 1.10).
3. Check the correctness of programming the multiplying factor of the gear rate of the
wheel reduction gear (I) (see item 1.10).

7. The FUEL reading appears on the indicator display

Check the connection and serviceability of the frequency fuel volume sensor (FFVS) to
the contact 7 of the block (2).

52
8. No readings of the tractor motion speed:
- Check the presence of the signals from the both speed sensors (BV1, BV2).

9. The 0km/h---- or ----0m/h readings appear on the indicator display within 10-
12 s after starting the motion of the tractor:

- no signal from the left speed sensor (BV2) check the serviceability of the sensor.

- no signal from the right speed sensor (BV1) check the serviceability of the sensor.

ATTENTION! The speed readings are affected considerably by the speed sensor set-
ting and adjustment performed when replacing or repairing the speed sensor. The gap
S between the end face of the sensor (2), Fig. , and projection of the tooth of the fi-
nal pinion (6) of the rear axle shall be as specified in Table below

A brief message about faults (Example: 0----, FUEL) is shown according to the
priority on the LCD regardless the information displayed. On pressing successively the
Mode () button, the messages shall be paged. When viewing the last message
and pressing repeatedly the Mode button, the LED is switched to the mode of display-
ing over the cycle of the operating parameters specified below. The faults are displayed
on the LCD each time the instrument is switched on until the fault is eliminated.

Note:
- On switching on the power supply of the CI, the LED shows the information in the in-
dication mode selected until the power supply of the CI is switched off in case of ab-
sence of the messages about faults.

53

1.13. Setting and Adjustment of the speed
sensors (BV1, BV2) (Fig. 6)
The speed sensors (2) are fastened by means
of the bolts (3) to the cover of the rear axle
housing (1) in the zone of the left and right fi-
nal pinions (6) of the final drives.
The gap S between the end face of the sen-
sor and projection of the tooth of the final pin-
ion shall be adjusted by means of the spacers
(5) as follows:
1. Measure the dimension from the sur-
face of the cover (1) to the tooth projec-
tion;
2. Select and place the necessary number
of spacers for setting the gap S corre-
sponding to the measured value
(see Table 13);
Install the ground wire (4) and tighten the bolts
(3).

Table 13
,
mm
Number
of
spacers
(Pos. 5)
S,
mm
Note
11.25-12 4
1.05-
1.6
When using
the cover (1)
with the
thickness
S=6 mm
12.1-13 3 0.8-1.8
13.1-
13.73
2
0.9-
1.53
13.25-14 2
1.05-
1.8
When using
the cover (1)
with the
thickness
S=8 mm
14.1-
15.73
1
0.9-
2.53

Fig. 6. Setting the speed sensors:
1 cover of the rear axle cover;
2 speed sensor (BV1, BV2);
3 bolt;
4 ground wire;
5 adjusting spacers;
6 final pinion.


54

1.14. Combination meter (Fig. 7)

The combination meter includes the five
gauges (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) monitoring the various
parameters of the tractor. All the gauges are
provided with emergency control lamps. The
gauges (1, 2, 3, 5) have the red control lamps,
and the indicator (4) the yellow control lamp.
To switch on the combination meter, turn the
key of the starter and instrumentation switch
(SA6) to the I position. In this case, the
pointer of the oil pressure indicator (2) and
temperature indicator (1) shall move to the ze-
ro marks of the scale and the pointers of the
air pressure indicator (3), fuel level indicator
(4) and voltage indicator (5) shall be set to the
positions corresponding to the actual positions
of the parameter monitored.
The electrical circuit of the instruments is pro-
tected by the fuse 2 in the unit (F2).

Engine cooling fluid temperature indicator
(1) with the emergency temperature control
lamp (red). It operates with the temperature
sensor (BK1). The indicator scale has three
zones:
operating 80100C green;
non-operating 4080C yellow;
100120C red.

Engine oil pressure indicator (2)
with emergency pressure drop control lamp
(red). It operates with the pressure sensor
(BP1).
The indicator scale has three zones:
operating 100500 kPa green;
non-operating 0100 kPa and
500600 kPa red.
When starting the cold engine, the pressure of
up to 600 kPa is possible.

Indicator of the air pressure in the pneumatic
system (3) with the red emergency pressure
control lamp. It operates with the air pressure
sensor (2).
The indicator scale has three zones:
- operating 500800 kPa green;
- non-operating 0500 kPa and
8001000 kPa red.

Fig. 7. Combination meter:
1 engine cooling fluid temperature indicator;
2 indicator of the engine oil pressure;
3 indicator of the air pressure in the pneu-
matic system;
4 indicator of the fuel level in the tank;
5 indicator of voltage of the storage battery
or alternator.

Scale zones marked by hatching:
red
yellow

green
orange


55
Indicator of the fuel level in the tank (4)
with orange control lamp of reserve level. It op-
erates with the fuel level sensor (BN1).
The instrument has the points: 0-1/4-1/2-3/4-
1.
Do not allow consuming the fuel to empty
tank (instrument pointer is at orange zone).
Voltage indicator (5) with the red control
lamp red of additional SB charging.
It displays the SB voltage, when the engine
is running and the starter switch key is in the
I position. When the engine is running, it
indicates the voltage at the generator termi-
nals.
The reading values are given in Table 14 be-
low.
Table 14
Scale zone, col-
our
Power supply system state
when the engine
is running
when the engine
is not running
13.0 15.0 V
green
Normal charg-
ing mode

10.0 12.0 V
red
Generator is
not working
SB is run down
12.0 13.0 V
yellow
No charging of
SB (low charg-
ing voltage)
SB has
normal
charging
15.0 16.0 V
red
SB overcharg-
ing
SB has normal
charging
White hairline in
yellow zone

The rated emf
of the SB is12.7
V

1.15. Connection the combination meter
To integrate the combination meter to the in-
strumentation system, the rear panel is pro-
vided with two blocks 1 and 2 (Fig. 8).
The purpose of the contacts of the blocks of
the combination meter is shown in Tables
15, 16.

Fig. 8. Blocks for connecting the combination meter (rear
view):
1 9-contact block;
2 7-contact block.

Block 1
Table 15
Contact Address
1 To the instrument backlight switch
2 To the terminal of the battery
3 Monitoring the storage battery charging
4 Buzzer
5
To the sensor of the oil pressure in the en-
gine (1)
6
To the sensor of the emergency tempera-
ture of the engine cooling fluid (S1)
7
To the sensor of the emergency oil pressure
in the engine (SP2)
8
To the sensor of the cooling fluid tempera-
ture (BK1)
9 To the + SB terminal (12 V)

Block 2
Table 16
Contact Address
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 To the fuel level sensor (BN1)
4
To the gearbox oil pressure sensor (not
used)
5
To the sensor of emergency drop of the
air pressure (SP4)
6
To the sensor of the reserve fuel level
(BN1)
7 To the sensor of the air pressure (2)

56
1.16. Combination Meter Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting
1. No backlight of the instrument scales
on setting the SA10 central light switch:
1. Check the presence of the power supply
voltage at the terminal 1 of the block 1
(to the instrument backlight switch) and at
the terminal 9 (to the power supply unit +
12 V).
In case of absence of the voltage, eliminate
the open circuit. If the voltage is present:
2. Check the intactness of the backlight
lamps and replace them, if necessary.
2. The temperature indicator (1), Fig. 9,
operated jointly with the thermistor-type
temperature sensor BK1 (-02, re-
sistance range: 24322.5 ).
2.1. The temperature indicator pointer
goes off-scale:
1. Breakage of the wire to the terminal 9 of
the block 1 (+ 12 V of the SB);
the block 1 ( of the power supply);
3. If there is no breakage, the temperature
indicator is faulty.
2.2. The pointer of the temperature indi-
cator is set before the initial point of the
scale:
the block 1 (+ 12 V of the SB);
the block 1 (to the temperature indicator
BK1);
3. Fault of the temperature sensor;
4. Fault of the temperature indicator.
3. Indicators of the oil pressure in the en-
gine (2) and air pressure in the pneumatic
system (3). They operate from the follow-
ing sensors:
Rheostat-type oil pressure (1) (-6;
10184 ) and rheostat-type oil pressure
(2) (-10-01).
3.1. The indicator pointer is set before the
initial point of the scale:
the block 1 ( of the power supply);
the block 1 (+ of the power supply);
3. If there is no breakage, the pressure indi-
cator is faulty.

Fig. 9.

IMPORTANT! To avoid errors in the tem-
perature indication, use the 02
temperature sensors mentioned above.

3.2. The indicator pointer goes off-scale:
1. Breakage of the wires to the terminals 4,
5, 7 of the block 1 or short circuit inside
the indicator;
2. The pressure indicator is faulty.

4. Fuel level indicator (4).
It operates with the float-type rheostat sensor
(BN1) installed in the fuel tank (-21
(3200 )).
NOTE! Should there be no fuel in the tank
when switching on the indicator; the indica-
tor pointer shall be at the initial point of the
scale. If the indicator is switched off or there
is a wire breakage, the indicator pointer
shall go off-scale.
4.1. The indicator pointer is before the initial
point of the scale:
the block 1 (to the terminal +12V);
the block 2 (to the fuel level sensor);
3. The fuel level sensor is faulty;
if there is no breakage and the sensor is in
good repair, replace the combination meter

57
or repair the fuel level indicator.
4.2. The indicator pointer goes off-scale:
1. Breakage of the wire to the terminal 2
of the block 1 (output of the power
supply);
2. If there is no breakage, the fuel level indi-
cator is faulty. Repair the indicator or replace
the combination meter.

Front windscreen washer switch (1)
Pressing the button (1) switches the
windscreen washer on.
Three-position light switch (2)
The button (2) has three positions:
OFF;
Dashboard lighting, clearance lights
and number plate light ON;
All control lamps units including the
front headlights ON.
Fault signalling switch (3)
fault signalling on. There is a control
lamp inside the button, which blinks
simultaneously with the flashing light
signalling.

58

Steering-Wheel-Mounted (Multifunction)
switch (1)
It ensures the switching-on of the turn
indicators, toggling the beam of the road
headlights (lower/upper beam), warning by
upper beam warning and horn beep.
Turn indicator
Turning the arm (1) up or down switches
on the right or left turning indicator, re-
spectively.
NOTE: After completing the turn of the
tractor, the arm (1) is returned automati-
cally to the neutral position.
Upper/lower beam
When the road headlights are switched on
by the switch (2), pushing the arm (1)
switches the upper beam on and pulling
the same switches the lower beam on.
Pulling the arm (1) further from the lower
beam position towards the operator up to
the stop switches on shortly the upper
beam (non-fixed position).
Horn beep
Pressing the arm (1) in axial direction
switches the beep on.


59
Front windscreen wiper switch (1)
Pressing the button (1) switches front
windscreen wiper on.
The switch has three positions:
OFF;
Low speed ON;
High speed ON.
NOTE: In the OFF position wind-
screen wiper automatically returns to
initial position
Cab heater and fan switch (2)
Pressing the button (2) switches the cab
air ventilation on.
The switch has 3 positions:
OFF;
Low air supply mode ON;
High air supply mode ON.
Rear working lights switch (3)
Pressing the button (3) switches the rear
working lights on or off. The lights being
on, the button (3) is illuminated with a
built-in backlight lamp.
Front working lights switch (4)
front working lights on or off. The lights
being on, the button (4) is illuminated
with a built-in backlight lamp.
Road-train sign lighting switch (5)
On pressing the button (5), the three or-
ange lights on the roof forepart are
switched on and the button is backlit.

Radio receiver switch
(if installed)
1 On (Off) and volume control;
2 Tuning.
NOTE: The radio receiver operates
only in starter key positions I or III
only.


60
Control lamps of the dashboard (dashboard 80-3805010-1)

1 and 14 Buttons for testing the ser-
viceability of the control lamps unit. On
pressing the button, all the lamps shall
be lit.
2 Air filter blocking. The control lamp
(orange) lights up when the maximum
allowed level of filter blocking is ex-
ceeded and it needs cleaning.
3 Reserved.
4 Engine start lamp: This orange con-
trol lamp lights up on turning the starter
switch key to position II to indicate that
the starting system functions properly. If
the lamp blinks at the frequency of 1.5
Hz, the gearbox control lever is not in
neutral position or the engine starting
locking switch circuit is out of order. If
the lamp blinks at the frequency of 3.0
Hz, there is a failure in the alternator
phase winding circuit. Eliminate the fault
and restart.
5 Starting aid lamp: This orange con-
trol lamp is on when pressing the but-
ton of electric torch pre-heater (ETP).
After 30 s the lamp will start blinking,
indicating that diesel engine starting
system under cold conditions is ready
for operation.
6 HPS emergency oil pressure. The
lamp (red) lights up when oil pressure in
HPS feeding system is below the allowa-
ble level.
7 Reserved.
8 Upper beam indicator: Blue control
lamp lights up when switching on the
upper beam of the front headlights.
9 Rear axle differential locking control
lamp. The lamp (green) is on when
switching automatic differential locking
(ADL).
10 Reserved.
11 Tractor turn indicator (green).
12 Trailer turn indicator (green).
13 Parking brake indicator (red).

61
Control lamps of the dashboard (dashboard 826-3805010)

1 Reserved indicator (green)
2 Reserved indicator (green)
3 Reserved indicator (red)
4 HPS emergency oil pressure. The
lamp (red) lights up when oil pressure in
HPS feeding system is below the allowa-
ble level.
5 Air filter blocking. The control lamp
(orange) lights up when the maximum
allowed level of filter blocking is ex-
ceeded and it needs cleaning.
6 Reserved indicator (blue).
7 Rear axle differential locking control
lamp. The lamp (green) is on when
switching automatic differential locking
(ADL).
8 Starting aid lamp: This orange con-
trol lamp is on when pressing the but-
ton of electric torch pre-heater (ETP).
After 30 s the lamp will start blinking,
indicating that diesel engine starting
system under cold conditions is ready
for operation.
9 Reserved indicator (red).
10 Reserved indicator (red).


62
Fuses

Three electric circuit fuse boxes are in-
stalled in the dashboard. To get access
to the fuses, remove the screw on the
dashboard cover and open it.
The fuses protect the following electric
circuits of the tractor against overloads:
1 Braking signal (15 A);
2 Cab light and rear working lights (15
A);
3 Fault signalling (15 A);
4 Windscreen wiper and washer (15
A);
5 Horn (7.5 A);
6 Upper beam of the road headlights
(15 A);
7 Left clearance lights (7.5 A);
8 Right clearance lights and backlights
of the dashboard and registration plate
(15 A);
9 Lower beam of the left road head-
light (7.5 A);
10 Lower beam of the right road head-
light (7.5 A);
11 Instrumentation, control lamps
block, parking brake indicator (7.5
A);
12 Turn indicator relay (7.5 A);
13 Front working lights (25 A);
14 HMS supply (25 A);
15 Side board supply (PTO, DL) (15
A);
16 Heating system fan (25 A).
The storage battery charging circuit is
protected with the fuse rated at 60 A.
WARNING! To prevent the electric wir-
ing from burning, never apply fuses of
higher current rating than specified
above. If the fuse blows often, detect
the reason and eliminate it.

63
In case of blowing of the fuse due to a short circuit, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the wires from the pilot lamp to the terminals of the fuse box at the place of
the fuse blown.
a) If there is a short circuit, the lamp will be lit with incandescence,
b) If the circuit and consumer are intact, the lamp will not be lit or will be lit dimly.
2. Connect the circuit from the fuse to the consumer and ensure that the lamp is not
lit or is lit dimly (in the presence of a switched on consumer in the circuit);
3. Fit a new fuse.

During the operation, the contact resistance between the fuse and its holders can in-
crease due to oxidization.
It results in increase of the voltage drop in the circuit and heating causing the circuit fail-
ure. The defect is detected by the disturbance of the operation of the consumer (reduc-
tion of the power) and heating of the fuse. Eliminate the defect by cleaning the holder
and fuse from the oxide film.

64
Electric equipment connector
components
A standard 8-pin socket is designed for
connecting the current-consuming units
of a transport machine or trailed agricul-
tural implement. It is installed on the
cabs rear support. A plug of the wire
bundle of the hitched machines is con-
nected to the socket.
Socket connection terminal marking:
1 Turn indicator, left;
2 Horn;
3 Ground;
4 Turn indicator, right;
5 Right clearance light;
6 Stop light;
7 Left clearance light;
8 Hand lamp connection.
Installing the monitor on the tractor
An electronic monitor can be installed on
the cab front wall. There are two open-
ings on the front wall between the front
and the lower glasses to the left and right
from the dashboard.

65
Gearbox single-lever control
The 7F/2R synchronized gearbox com-
bined with synchronized reduction gear al-
lows obtaining 14 forward and 4 reverse
gears.
The gears are shifted by means of the lever
(1) in accordance with the shifting pattern.
Prior to putting in the gear, select the re-
quired range (stage).
IMPORTANT! The ranges are selected
and the gears are shifted by means of a
single lever (1), the range (either I or II)
being selected first.
The reduction gear lever (2) shall be al-
ways in the engaged: either forward (di-
rect transmission H) or reverse (retarded
transmission L).

NOTE: The lever of the reduction gear or
multiplier has no fixed neutral position. The
lever is allowed to be set to the neutral posi-
tion when starting the engine in cold season
only.
Multiplier lever (2) has two positions:
- L - direct gear (OFF) foremost po-
sition;
- step-up gear (ON).
ATTENTION: using the gear R in traction
mode is not allowed.

66
Gearbox two-lever control

The 7F/2R mechanical two-range fixed-
ratio transmission gearbox with two-lever
control (gears are shifted and the ranges
are selected by means of separate levers).
Jointly with the synchronized accelerator,
the gearbox allows obtaining 14 forward
and 4 reverse gears.

Selecting the ranges and shifting the
gears

The gears are shifted and the rang-
es are selected by means of separate lev-
ers according to the patterns shown in Fig.
Select the required speed of the
tractor motion according to the information
plate on the right side glass of the cab.
To put in the gear corresponding to
the required speed of the tractor motion,
proceed as follows:
1. Step on the clutch pedal and set the re-
quired range in the gearbox by moving the
range reduction gear lever (2) forward or
backward, according to the pattern shown
on its handle.
ATTENTION: The stages of the range re-
duction gear are switched over when the
tractor is completely stopped and the
clutch pedal is stepped on.
ATTENTION: The gearbox range reduc-
tion gear has no neutral position; therefore
the 1
st
or 2
nd
reduction stage is always en-
gaged in the reduction gear.
2. Step on the clutch pedal and move the
change-gear lever (1) to the position of the
required gear according to the pattern
shown on its handle.
ATTENTION: The first forward gear and
the reverse gear are put in after full stop of
the tractor with the clutch pedal stepped
on.
Putting on the 1
st
forward gear and
reverse gear as well as switching over the
stages of the range reduction gear are not
synchronized and are performed by mova-
ble pinions on the tractor fully stopped.
Prior to putting in the said gears or stages
of the range reduction gear release slightly
and step on fully the clutch pedal again. It
will ensure the turning-over of the pinions
and light putting-in of the gears or ranges.
3. Start the smooth motion of the tractor in
the gear selected by releasing the clutch
pedal.

ATTENTION: When operating the tractor,
do not hold the foot on the clutch pedal. It
will prevent the clutch slip, which causes
the overheating and premature failure of
the clutch.

ATTENTION: To avoid the increased noise
in the gearbox, the design of the gearbox
control mechanism is provided with an inter-
lock excluding the simultaneous putting-in of
the 4
th
(direct) gear and the 1
st
stage of the
range reduction gear. Therefore, the 4
th

gear can be put in with the 2
nd
stage of the
range reduction gear only.

67
Shuttle-gear control
(if installed)
The shuttle gear is controlled with lever (2)
having the following positions:
ON rearmost position;
OFF (forward motion) foremost position.

ATTENTION! When putting the gearbox
lever to position R (reverse motion),
the lever being in rearmost position, the
tractor will move forward.

Speed reducer control
(if installed)
The change-gear lever of the speed reducer
(1) has five positions:
OFF;
ON;
N neutral;
1 first gear of the speed reducer;
2 second gear of the speed reducer.
The rod for switching over the speed reducer
ranges (2) has three positions:
I first range corresponding to reduced
speeds (lower position);
II second range corresponding to in-
creased speeds (upper position);
N neutral (mid position).

68
Control of engagement of the front
driving axle (Belarus 920/920.2/
920.3/952/952.2/952.3)
The control lever (1) has three fixed po-
sitions:
FDA OFF lowermost position.
Use it when driving on hard surface
roads to prevent the increased wear of
the tyres.
FDA forcedly ON uppermost po-
sition. Only use this mode in case of
incessant skidding of the rear wheels
and when moving backwards, when
the engagement of the FDA is re-
quired.
FDA automatically ON (OFF) mid
position. In this mode, the FDA is en-
gaged and disengaged automatically
by the free running coupling, depend-
ing on rear wheel skidding. Use this
mode during different field works.
ATTENTION! When using the tractor
without cardan shafts, put the control
lever (1) to the uppermost position
(FDA forcedly ON).
Hitch fixation mechanism control (2)
(for tractors with power governor)
Lever (2) has two positions:
Hitch unlocked rightmost position;
Hitch locked in upper position left-
most. To lock the hitch, lift the imple-
ment to uppermost position, having
put power governor arm (4) to position
Lifting, and turn handle (2) to the
left. Release down arm (4).
To unlock the hitch, lift the implement
and turn lever (2) to the right.
Control of lock of the hydraulic hook
(3)
The handle (3) has two positions:
Unlocked upper position;
Locked lower position.
To unlock the hydraulic hook, lift it with
arm (4) to upper position, pull handle (3)
up and fix it. To lock the hook after hitch-
ing the trailer to the tractor, lift the hook
with arm (4), release handle (3) from fix-
ation and move it to lowermost position.

69

Rear PTO control
Switch of the independent and syn-
chronized drive of the rear PTO
Lever (1) has three positions:
PTO independent drive ON right-
most position;
PTO synchronized drive ON left-
most;
OFF mid position.
To engage the synchronized drive, pro-
ceed as follows:
Start the engine;
Step on the clutch pedal up to the
stop and put in the 1
st
or 2
nd
gear;
release slowly the clutch pedal and
move simultaneously the lever (1) to
the leftmost position.

IMPORTANT! Use the synchronous
PTO drive in lower gears in the lowest
gears of the 1
st
and 2
nd
gearbox ranges
at the tractor motion speed not more
than 8 km/h. Otherwise power transmis-
sion can be damaged.
Switch of the 2-speed independ-
ent drive of the PTO (2)
The shifter arm (2) of PTO independ-
ent drive has two positions:
I 540 rpm extreme, counter-
clockwise;
II 1000 rpm extreme, clockwise.
To set the required PTO speed, release
bolt (1), rotate the shifter arm (2) to the I
or II position and retighten the bolt (1).

70

PTO control lever
The PTO control lever (1) has two posi-
tions:
PTO OFF front position of the lev-
er (1);
PTO ON back position of the lever
(1).

Control of the rear axle differential
lock (1)
To engage shortly the lock press pedal
(1).

IMPORTANT! Engage the forced differ-
ential lock (1) only shortly to overcome
road obstacles and carry out the field
and transportation works.
WARNING: Do not use the differential
lock at the speeds exceeding 10 km/h
and when turning the tractor. Other-
wise the tractor control becomes diffi-
cult and running gear and power
transmission are quickly worn out.


71
Rear PTO control (for tractors
equipped with a hydraulic lift)
To engage the rear PTO, the key switch
(4) and push-button switch (5) located on
the panel above the right control board
are used. The switch (4) has two fixed
positions:
PTO ON when pressing the
lower part of the key switch;
PTO OFF when pressing the up-
per part of the switch.
To engage the PTO:
Press the lower part of the key switch;
Shortly press push-button switch (5).
Control lamp (3) will be on and PTO
shank will start rotating.
NOTE: On stopping the engine, the PTO
is disengaged automatically.
To disengage the PTO, press the up-
per part of the switch. The pilot lamp
will become dim.

ATTENTION! The PTO engagement
operations shall be only performed with
the engine running.

Rear axle differential lock control (for
tractors equipped with a hydraulic lift)
The differential lock (DL) is controlled
with key (1) having three positions:
DL OFF mid fixed position to be
used when performing the transport
works on the hard surface roads;
DL ON automatically by pressing
the upper part of the key (1). Fixed
position. It is to be used when per-
forming the works with substantial rear
wheel skidding.
In the automatic mode, the rear wheels
are locked during the straight-line motion
and unlocked when turning the guide
wheels at the angle exceeding 13 in any
direction.

DL ON forcedly by pressing
the lower part of the key (1). Fixed posi-
tion. It is to be used for locking shortly
the rear wheels when overcoming the
obstacles. On releasing the lower part of
the key, it returns to the mid position. On
activating the DL, the pilot lamp (2) lights
up, which becomes dim when unlocking
the DL in the automatic mode and on set-
ting the key (1) to the mid position.

ATTENTION! Activate the DL under the
increased skidding conditions when per-
forming the field and transport works.

IMPORTANT! Disable the DL at the
tractor motion speed exceeding 10 km/h.
Otherwise, the service lift of the power
transmission would be shortened and
the tractor control would be impeded.
The forced locking shall be used shortly
only to overcome road obstacles.

72
Hydraulic system pump control
The control lever has two positions:
Pump ON upper position;
Pump OFF lower position.

IMPORTANT! Switch on the pump only at
the minimum rotational speed of the en-
gine idling. Disengage the pump when
starting the cold engine and maintenance.

Control of the hydraulic system dis-
tributor (external cylinder)
Each of three arms controls the external
cylinders and has four positions:
Neutral lower mid position (fixed);
Lifting lower non-fixed position.
When releasing the arm, it returns to
Neutral (for the distributors 80-3/4-
111; -70-1221; -70-1221;
RS213 Mita; RS213 Belarus). For the
distributors 80-3/4-222, this position is
fixed. The handles are returned auto-
matically to the Neutral position at the
pressure of 15.520 MPa.
Forced lowering upper mid non-
fixed position between the Floating
and Neutral ones. On releasing the
arm, it automatically returns to Neu-
tral;
Floating upper fixed position.

NOTE: If any distributor arm is put into
the Lifting or Lowering position, the
operation of the power governor in the
automatic control, lifting and lowering
modes is interrupted.

73
Remote control of the hydraulic sys-
tem distributor (if installed)
If the tractors are equipped with the RS-
213 Belarus hydraulic distributors, the
remote control of the distributor spool
valves is executed by the manipulator
(joystick) (1) and arm (2) with the two-
way cords. The manipulator and the arm
are mounted on the right control board
in the tractor cab.
The manipulator (1) makes it possible to
control two distributor spool valves (sec-
tions) at the same time:
When shifting the manipulator lever
lengthwise, the spool valve connected to
the left side outlets of the hydraulic sys-
tem is controlled.
When shifting the manipulator lever
crosswise, the spool valve connected to
the right side outlets and rear outlets
(optional) is controlled.
The arm (2) can be only shifted length-
wise and controls the central spool valve
connected to the rear left outlets of the
hydraulic system.

74
Control of the power/position gov-
ernor of the hydraulic system
The control is performed by means of
the lever (1). The control method, ei-
ther power or position shall be previ-
ously set.
The lever (1) has the following posi-
tions:
N Neutral (fixed position);
Lifting rearmost position (non-
fixed). Hold the lever with the hand
to lift the implement to the required
height. After releasing, it returns
back to Neutral;
Automatic control range (control
zone) between the Neutral and
Lowering positions. Beginning the
lowering of the implement corre-
sponds to the control zone onset
(minimum cultivation depth). The
control zone end corresponds to the
maximum cultivation depth;
Lowering foremost position
(non-fixed). Hold the lever to low-
er the implement to the required
level. After releasing the lever, it
returns to control zone end.

NOTE: If any of the distributor levers
is set to the Lifting or Lowering
position, the power governor opera-
tion in automatic control, lifting or
lowering modes is interrupted.

75
Switch of power and position con-
trol methods (1)
To get access to the switch, remove the
cover under the seat. The switch has the
following positions:
N OFF;
I Power control;
II Position control.
Correction rate governor (2)
To reduce the implement position cor-
rection rate, turn the hand wheel (2)
clockwise until jerks transferred during
correction to the tractor are stopped.

ATTENTION! Prior to setting the lever
to the selected position, lift the RMA to
the uppermost position


76
RMA hydraulic lift control
The hydraulic lift is controlled by means
of two levers (1, 2) located on the board
in the cab at operators right hand.
The power control arm (1) is located
close to operator and has the following
positions:
Rightmost: maximum tillage depth (digit
9 on the board);
Rearmost: minimum tillage depth (digit
1 on the board);
Full control range of the soil cultivation
depth: from 1 to 9.
Position control lever (2) has the follow-
ing positions:
Foremost: minimal height of the imple-
ment above the soil surface (digit 9 on
the board);
Rearmost: transport position (digit 1 on
the board);
The maximum height of lifting the im-
plement by the position control lever is
provided by the adjustable stop (3).
NOTE: The combined control is provided
by limiting the tillage depth with the posi-
tion control lever in the mode of power
control by means of the lever (1).
IMPORTANT! If any of the distributor
control handle is set to the Lift or Low-
ering position, the hydraulic lift control
by means of the levers (1, 2) is automati-
cally ceased.


77

Compressor control
The handle (1) has two positions:
Compressor ON when turning
the handle so that the arrow on the
arm would be directed backwards
with respect to tractor motion;
Compressor OFF when turning
the handle to 180 so that the arrow
would be directed forward with re-
spect to tractor motion.
Changing the steering wheel position
To change the position of the steering
wheel by height:
Remove the cover (2);
Unscrew the clamp (1) by 35 turns;
Move the wheel to the required posi-
tion;
Tighten the clamp (1) by hand and
refit the cover (2).
NOTE: The steering wheel adjustment
range by height is 100 mm.
The steering column can be inclined to
four different positions from 25 to 40
with the step of 5. To incline the steering
column, pull the rod (3).


78
Cab heater control
When switching the heater on, ensure
that the following conditions are met:
1. After filling the cooling system,
start the engine and let it work at a
medium rotational speed to heat wa-
ter to the temperature of
+50C+60C, after which open the
valve (1), increase the engine rota-
tional speed and after 1-2 min make
sure that the cooling fluid circulates
through the heat exchanger by open-
ing slightly the drain valve cap (5) on
the cab right side. The heat exchang-
er shall start warming-up. Then the
cooling fluid level in the engine cool-
ing system radiator will decrease.
2. Add cooling fluid into the radiator
to the required level (5060 mm be-
low the upper edge of the filler neck).
3. Turn the heater fan on by means of
the switch (3) and direct the air flow
by means of air distributors (4).
4. The flow of fresh air delivered to
the cab can be controlled by opening
the recirculation flaps (2).
To drain the cooling fluid from the
heating system, the drain plugs (5)
are provided on the right and left
sides of the cab. After draining the
cooling fluid, it is necessary to blow
out the system, having closed prelimi-
nary the valve on the cylinder block
and unscrewed the plugs (5). After
blowing-out, tighten the plugs.
NOTE: The valve shall be closed to op-
erate the system in the ventilation mode
during warm season.


79
Belarus Seat

The seat is provided with mechanical
suspension consisting of two spiral tor-
sion springs and a gas-filled two-way
shock absorber. Shear-type guiding
mechanism ensures strictly the vertical
displacement of the seat. Dynamic mo-
tion of the seat is 100 mm.

The seat has the following controls:
1. Adjustment by operators weight
within the range from 50 to 120 kg
with indication of the suspension
travel middle position. Turn the
handle (1) clockwise (as seen from
the operators seat) to adjust the
seat to larger weight and vice versa.
2. Transverse adjustment within 80
mm from middle position. Lift the
lever (2) upwards to the stop and
move the seat forward or backward
to comfortable position.
3. Back inclination adjustment within
the range from 5 to 25. Lift the arm
(3) upwards to the stop, turn the
back and release the arm. The back
will be fixed in the given position.

The seat can be adjusted by height
within 30 mm by moving consequently
it manually upwards to increase the
height. To decrease the seat height, lift
it abruptly upwards to the stop and then
push it down.


80
Grammer Seat
(if installed)

Important! Prior to beginning the op-
eration of the tractor, adjust the seat
to the position being the most conven-
ient for you. Perform all the adjust-
ments while sitting on the seat.

The seat is provided with mechanical
suspension having the total travel of 100
mm and hydraulic shock absorber pro-
tected by a rubber boot.
The armrests being adjustable to height
and safety belts are standard.

The seat is equipped with the following
controls (handles):
1. Back inclination: to 12.5 forward and
5 backward with the step of 2.5.
2. Weight indicator.
3. Weight control: from 50 to 130 kg
steplessly.
4. Forward/backward motions: within
the range of 150 mm with the step of
15 mm.

The adjustment of the seat height within
60 mm is provided in three positions. To
set the required height, pull the seat
upwards. The indicator click determines
a new position. Should the seat be
pulled upwards from the uppermost po-
sition, the lowering mechanism will op-
erate and the seat will be lowered to the
lowermost position.

Note: Do not use solvents for clean-
ing the seat upholstery. Use only
warm water with small amount of de-
tergent.

Operating Instructions BELARUS series 900

81
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Tractor pre-operation
When preparing a new tractor for opera-
tion, re-activate it: To do this:
remove protective covers and plugs fit-
ted on the engine;
install peacocks of the radiator and cyl-
inder block;
fill in all the refill tanks;
unpack the silencer put in the cab and fit it
onto the exhaust manifold so that exhaust
pipe outlet cut would be directed forward
along the tractor motion. Install the retain-
ing clip at the distance of 812 mm from
the silencer branch end. Tighten the clip
nuts with the torque of 4454 Nm;
drain the sediment from the coarse and
fine fuel filters and fuel tank;
fill the fuel supply system with fuel and
bleed the system to remove air from it;
check the fan belt tension;
check and adjust the air pressure in the
tyres;
make the service of the storage bat-
tery;
tighten the fasteners;
grease all the lubrication points using a
gun;
check and adjust, if necessary, the
front wheel toe-in.

WARNING! To avoid injuries, make
sure that all protective guards are in
their places prior to starting the die-
sel engine.
ATTENTION! Starting a new engine,
which is not run-in, by towing is not al-
lowed to avoid the intense wear of the
engine parts.

Running-in

Your new tractor will work reliably and
for long time, provided that running-in is
made properly and necessary mainte-
nance is provided within the recom-
mended terms. When executing the 30-
hour running-in, observe the following
rules:
1. Watch constantly the instrument
readings and operation of lubricating,
cooling and feed systems. Monitor he
oil and fluid levels in refill tanks.
2. Check the tightening and retighten the
external fastening junctions.
3. Run in the tractor on light transport
and field works (harrowing, cultiva-
tion, sowing, etc.), gradually increas-
ing the load at different gears.
4. Do not overload the engine, do not
allow fuming or drop of the rotational
speed. The overload symptoms are
abrupt drop of the rotational speed,
fuming and failure to respond to
higher fuel feed.
5. The operation of the tractor at very low
gear with small load at high rotational
speed of the engine will result in ex-
cessive fuel consumption. The correct
gear selection for each particular work
provides the fuel saving and reduces
the engine wear.
6. Regularly perform time-shift mainte-
nance in accordance with recommen-
dations stated in this Manual.
7. After running-in the tractor, perform
the maintenance works (see Section
Maintenance).


82
Starting the engine
Starting under normal conditions:
Check the level of oil in the crankcase
and of cooling fluid in the radiator and
the presence of fuel in the tank.
IMPORTANT! Never start the engine
with the empty cooling system!
IMPORTANT! Start the engine and
check the instrument operation while sit-
ting in the operators seat only.
WARNING: Never operate with tractor
indoors.
IMPORTANT! The BELARUS-
900.3/920.3/950/950.3/952/952.2/952.3 tractors are equipped with turbocharged diesel
engine. High rotational speeds of the turbocharger require the reliable lubrication when
starting the engine. Therefore prior to first starting or after long-term storage, rotate the
crankshaft by the starter for 10 s without fuel supply to lubricate the turbocharger bear-
ings. Prior to loading the engine, let it run idle for 23 min.

1. Apply parking brake (1);
2. Set the change gear lever (2) to neutral
position, move it to the leftmost posi-
tion and hold it in this position until the
start is completed and the step-down
reducing gear lever (9) to the extreme
position (back or front);
3. Set the PTO lever (3) to the OFF posi-
tion and the Synchronous
Independent switching lever to the
Neutral position;
4. Set the ground switch (4) to the ON posi-
tion;
5. Set the fuel feed arm (5) to the mid-
dle position;
6. Step on the clutch pedal (6);
7. Turn starter key (7) to the position II
(Start) and hold it until the engine is
started, but not more than 15 s. Then
the start control light in the pilot lamp
block unit (8) will light up. When the
engine starts running, the light shall
become dim. If the engine fails to
start, repeat starting after at least
3040 s.

ATTENTION! If the starter fails to op-
erate and the pilot lamp of the starter
control board blinks at low frequency
(about 1.5 Hz), this indicates that the
change gear lever is not in neutral po-
sition or there is a breakage in the
start locking circuit. If the light blinks at
high frequency (about 3 Hz), there is a
failure in the alternator circuit (terminal
W or ~).

8. Release the clutch pedal (6). After
starting the engine, check the opera-
tion of all indicating lamps and in-
strument readings (cooling fluid tem-
perature, oil pressure in the engine
and storage battery charge).
Let the engine run at 1000 rpm to sta-
bilize the oil pressure in the operating
range.

83
Starting at low temperatures
(+4 and below)

Important! To avoid the damage of the
power gear, do not push or pull the
tractor to start the engine by towing.

The engines of the BELARUS-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3 tractors are
equipped with glow plugs. When
energizing them, the plugs get red-
hot and heat the air taken into
each engine cylinder.
At steadily low temperatures, use
the winter oil grades in the engine
crankcase, gear box and hydraulic
system in accordance with the
recommendations of this Manual.
Keep storage batteries always
charged.
Use pure winter diesel fuel not
contaminated with water.
To avoid failures, drain sediments
from the coarse fuel filter and fuel
tanks every day.

Attention! If the tractor is equipped
with electric torch pre-heater, use
previously published Operating
instructions.

Procedure of starting the engine
at low temperatures:
Switch off the hydraulic system
oil pump drive to reduce the re-
sistance to the crankshaft turning;
Check the level of oil in the en-
gine pan and of cooling fluid in the
radiator;
Apply the parking brake to keep the
tractor from motion;
Set the change gear lever and
the range lever (2) to the neutral
position, move it to the leftmost posi-
tion and hold it in this position until
the start is completed and the step-
down reducing gear lever to the ex-
treme position;
Set the PTO control lever (3) to the
OFF position and the Synchronous
Independent switching lever to the
Neutral position;
Set the ground switch to the ON posi-
tion;
Set fuel feed control arm (5) to the
mid position;
Step on the clutch pedal;
Hold the key in the I position for
more than 2 s. Then the starting aid
warning lamp will light up at the pilot
lamp block, signalling about the
glow plugs energizing. Hold the key
in this position. As soon as the
warning lamp starts blinking at the
frequency of 1 Hz, the glow plugs
and the engine are ready for start-
ing;
Turn the starter key to the II posi-
tion and start the engine under nor-
mal conditions as stated above. Af-
ter starting the engine, the pilot
lamp will become dim and audible
warning will be silenced.
Note: The system ensures the oper-
ation of the glow plug within 3
minutes after starting the engine
(then the pilot lamp is off).

Attention! If the glow plug pilot
lamp lights up in the blinking mode
at the frequency of 2 Hz after start-
ing the engine and operation within
3 minutes, this indicates that the
glow plugs are not switched off af-
ter finalization of the full cycle by
the system. Shut down the engine,
turn the ground switch off and
eliminate the failure. A probable
reason can consist in sticking the
electromagnetic relay contacts.

Release the clutch pedal. Warm up
the engine.


84
Starting the tractor motion
ATTENTION! When selecting the re-
quired gear, use the gearbox switching
diagram.
To start the movement, proceed as fol-
lows:
step on the clutch pedal fully;
select the required gearbox range;
shift the lever (1) to the leftmost po-
sition and set the range II or I, re-
spectively, by moving the lever for-
ward or backward;
return the lever to the neutral position
and then to the right, select the re-
quired gear and set the required speed
by moving the lever (1) forward or
backward;
set the lever 2 to the required ex-
treme position (forward or back-
ward)
*
.
Release the parking brake and re-
lease smoothly the clutch pedal while
increasing slightly the fuel feed. On
starting the motion, increase the fuel
feed.
Avoid starting the motion with high trac-
tion load (e.g. a plough deepened into
the soil).

ATTENTION! Always step on the
clutch pedal prior to engaging the
range (step) and putting in the gear.
Do not hold the foot on the clutch pedal
during operation on the tractor, since
this can lead to clutch slipping, its over-
heating and failure.

*
Forward direct gear, back reducing the speed
for tractors with reducing gear and increasing the
speed for tractors with multiplier.

85

Stopping the tractor
To stop the tractor:
Reduce the engine crankshaft speed;
Step on the clutch pedal;
Set the change gear lever to neutral
position;
Stop the tractor by applying the ser-
vice brakes;
Apply the parking brake.
Steering control
IMPORTANT! The tractors are
equipped with the hydrostatic power
steering system. If the engine is
stopped, the pump does not supply the
system and it begins automatically op-
erating in the manual mode where turn-
ing the tractor requires applying more
force to be applied to the steering
wheel.
IMPORTANT! To stop the tractor in
case of emergency, step on the clutch
pedal and twinned service brakes pe-
dal at the same time.
Shutting down the engine
IMPORTANT! Prior to shutting down
the engine, lower the implement onto
the ground and let the engine operate
at 1000 rpm within 12 min. This will
decrease engine temperature.
To shut down the engine, proceed as fol-
lows:
set manual fuel feed arm to minimal feed
position (back to the stop);
disengage the PTO and set all the dis-
tributors levers to neutral position;
lower the implement onto the ground;
pull engine shut-off lever cord handle to
fully stop the engine;
turn ground switch off to avoid storage
battery run-down.

86
Switching over the transmission with
a shuttle gear (if installed)

Switch the gearbox and the shuttle gear in
accordance with the changeover scheme.
Using the tractor in the shuttle mode
makes it possible to change quickly the di-
rection of the tractor motion by means of
the lever (2) without using the change
gear lever (1).
The shuttle gear control lever (2) is
located under the steering column
(unlike the reducing gear lever, it is
bent to the left) and has two posi-
tions:
Reverse OFF foremost position;
Reverse ON rearmost position.

IMPORTANT! When changing motion di-
rection, step on the clutch pedal and stop
the tractor.

NOTE: When the shuttle gear is engaged
and the change gear lever (1) is set to the
gear I-R and II-R, the tractor moves for-
ward.

87
Operation of the tractor equipped with a
speed reducer (optional)
1. Set the change gear lever (4) to neutral
position and reducing gear lever (1) to
foremost or rearmost positions.
2. Set the speed reducer controls as fol-
lows:

gear handle (2) to the ON position;
range rod (3) to the N position
(neutral).
To start the tractor motion:
1. Set the minimum idling speed of the
engine.
2. Step on the clutch pedal.
3. Set the speed reducer gear handle from
position ON to neutral.
4. Select the required speed reducer gear.
5. Set the required speed reducer range.
ATTENTION! It is forbidden to put in the
2
nd
gear of the speed reducer range II at
the 2
nd
gearbox reverse gear.
6. Put in the required gear of the gearbox
in the range I.
7. Release smoothly the clutch pedal. If
necessary, increase fuel feed.
8. Adjust the tractor speed by varying fuel
feed.
Speed reducer gear switching
1. Set the minimum engine idling speed.

3. Wait for 35 s and then set the change
gear lever to the neutral position.
4. Put in the required speed reducer
drive.
5. Put in the 1
st
gear of the gearbox.
6. Release smoothly the clutch pedal.
7. Adjust the speed by the foot-operated
or manual fuel feed control.
Stopping the tractor
1. Set the minimum engine idling speed
3. Wait for 35 s and then set the change
gear lever to neutral position.
4. Stop the tractor by applying the service
brakes. Apply the parking brake.

88

Hydraulic system
The hydraulic system for three-point rear
attachment control is equipped with power
governor
*
, which ensures system operation
in the following modes:
power control;
position control;
height control.
Power and position control
The power/position control makes the sys-
tem sensitive to variation of operating con-
ditions. Effective application of these
modes depends on the unitized machines
and land conditions.
Position control
It provides the accurate and sensitive moni-
toring of the position of the attached
equipment like spraying machine, leveller
and others above the ground. The position
control can be used with the tillage ma-
chines, semi-hookup ploughs with external
cylinders, etc. However, it is not recom-
mended to use this control on uneven fields
when using the tillage machines and im-
plements.
Hydraulic lift (if installed)
The HMS with hydraulic lift provides for op-
eration in the following modes:
lifting the RMA and lowering it under its
own weight;
position control;
power control;
combined control (adjusting the cultiva-
tion depth according to the soil condi-
tion with limiting the maximum depth by
the position control).

*
The Belarus tractors with index .2 are
equipped with RMA hydraulic lift and do
not have power governor
Power control
It is the most suitable mode for operation
with mounted implements, the working
parts of which are deepened into the soil.
The system is sensitive to traction effort var-
iation (caused by the changes in the soil re-
sistance or soil tillage depth) via central rod
of the hitch mechanism. The hydraulic sys-
tem responds to these changes by lifting or
lowering the implement to maintain the giv-
en tractive force at constant level. The sys-
tem reacts to the compressing and stretch-
ing forces in the central rod, i.e. is a dual-
action system.
Height control
When tilling the soil with greatly varying
density and resistance, and uneven sur-
face, if the power or position control does
not ensure satisfactory tillage quality ac-
cording to land treatment requirements, it is
recommended to use the height control
(using the implements with supporting
wheels).

89
Working equipment to attach ag-
ricultural machines to the tractor
(for tractors with power governor)

ATTENTION! Prior to attaching the ma-
chines read carefully this section.

Rear three-point mounted attachment:
to join mounted and semi-mounted agri-
cultural machines ploughs, seeders, cul-
tivators, spraying machines, etc.

Traction hitch mechanism (cross-bar)
-1: to work with trailing machines,
potato combines and others (except sin-
gle-axle ones) with the speed of up to 15
km/h.

ATTENTION! Using the -1 when
performing the transportation works is
strictly forbidden.

Traction hitch mechanism -2 (hy-
draulic hook): to operate single-axle
trailers and other machines.

Traction hitch mechanism -1
(floating lever): to operate with heavy trail-
ing machines (optional). A combined variant
with a hook for working with the semitrailers.

Traction hitch mechanism - (trail-
er gear with automatic hitch): to operate
two-axle trailers.


90

Rear mounted attachment (HMS
with power governor)
The second-category three-point mount-
ed attachment ensures the connection of
mounted and semi-mounted agricultural
machines and implements to the tractor
with the following attachment compo-
nents:
hanger axle length L (distance be-
tween joints A and B) is equal to
870 mm;
machine support height is 460 mm;
510 mm;
pin diameter to connect to lower rod
joints (1) is 28.7 mm;
pin diameter to connect to upper rod
(2) is 25 mm.
The lower rods consist of two parts:
front part or rod itself;
rear end with the ball joints. Standard
length of the low rod: 885 mm.
To increase the hanger length, install the
rod ends with deflected front joints (70-
4605050-01/055-01).
To increase the load-carrying capacity of
the mounted unit, replace the rear rod
ends (400 mm long) by the rod ends
having the distance of 320 mm between
the joint axis and the front aperture (50-
46050402/0452). Total lower rod
length will become 805 mm.
ATTENTION! When the rod length is
805 mm, the carrying capacity of the
mounted unit will be increased by 10%
with decreasing the lifting height by 10%.
The same load-carrying capacity can be
ensured by installing the angle brace (1)
at the additional points (the lifting height
will be also decreased by 10%).


91
To increase the clearance when cultivat-
ing the high-stem crops, install the front
ends of the lower rods onto the addition-
al hanger axles located at the distance of
110 mm above the lower rod axis. To im-
itate field profile crosswise when operat-
ing wide-cut implements, connect the
angle braces (1) with lower rods (2) via
longitudinal grooves.
IMPORTANT! To avoid the damage of
the angle brace, the angle brace fork
grooves shall be behind the aperture.
Upper rod and angle braces
The upper rod length is adjusted within
500740 mm. The length of the right ad-
justable angle brace can be adjusted
within 425520 mm by rotating the han-
dle (1). When being shipped from the
factory, the right angle brace length is set
to the standard value of 475 mm. When
the tractor is shipped from the factory,
the left (non adjustable) angle brace
length is set to standard 475 mm.
During operation, the left angle brace
length can be changed within 395510
mm, depending on the standard equip-
ment of the tractor and type of unitized
machines and implements.
IMPORTANT! Make adjustment of the
implement laterally with the right angle
brace only.
Depending on the tillage depth and soil na-
ture, install upper rod to one of the three
*

positions:
I light soils and small tillage depth at
power control;
II medium soils and medium tillage
depth at power control;
III heavy soils at large tillage depth, as
well as at position control or without
power governor.

*
For tractors equipped with HMS with hydraulic
lift, the upper rod is installed in one position.
425-520

92
Reinforced rear mounted attachment

The tractors with power governors may
be equipped optionally with a reinforced
rear mounted attachment with telescopic
lower rods, which are to be installed onto
the shaft with the diameter of 35 mm in-
stead of that with the diameter of 32 mm.
If necessary, the length of the rods equal
to 885 mm may be adjusted stepwise
with the step of 80 mm, in this case,
the carrying capacity of the mounted at-
tachment will be varied.
For working with trailed agricultural ma-
chines, the double cross-bar (4) for the
lower telescopic rods (1) with the pivot
(5) is optionally delivered. In this case,
its tips (3) are fitted instead of the rear
ends of the rods (2). The distance from
the end face of the PTO to the pivot
(hitching point) in such version will be
470 mm
ATTENTION! It is strictly forbidden to
use the double cross-bar when per-
forming the transportation works.


93

Rear mounted attachment of the tractors equipped with the hydraulic lift
Machines: mounted (ploughs, cultivators, seeders, cutters, etc.), semi-mounted
(ploughs, soil-tilling units, seeders, potato combines, etc).

Lower rods Telescopic, one-piece - optional
Length of lower rods, mm:
telescopic
one-piece*
805,885,985
885
Rod joint width, mm: upper (b1)
lower** (b2)
51
38 or 45
Nominal diameter of attachment components,
mm:
upper rod pin**
lower rod joints (d2) 22 or 25 28
Distance from PTO face to hanger axle 595
Load carrying capacity, kN (kgf):
on hanger axle
on 610 mm overhang
43 (4300)
27 (2700)

______________________________________________
* Optional rods with quickly connectable attachment
** (Quickly connectable attachment). To be agreed when acquir-
ing the tractor.

94
Traction hitch mechanisms (THM) of the tractors equipped with hydraulic lift
-1-01 (double cross-bar)
-1* (single cross-bar)
Machines: semi-mounted (seeders, potato-planters, potato combines, vegetable-
harvesting machines, etc.), semi-trailer (mowing machines, balers, haulm gatherers,
etc.).

-1-01 (double cross-bar) as a unit with telescopic rods optional
-1 (single cross-bar)
with one-piece or telescopic rods on hanger
axle optional
Telescopic rod front end length mm 570
Distance between PTO face to attach-
ment pin axle
mm 410,490,595
*

Attachment pin size mm 030 (0 30 )
12(1200) 6,
5* (650)*
Vertical load on THM kN (kg f)
Machine turning angle relative to the
tractor
degree 65 ( 80)

*
Indices are given for -1


95
15 Lifting THM of the tractors equipped with hydraulic lift
1.-2 (fork)
Machines: semi-trailed (semi-trailers, machines for fertilizing, etc.), trailed (disk harrows,
tillers, hoeing ploughs, hitch of harrows, cultivators and seeders, etc.).

Hitch mechanism
Fork with the possibility of the verti-
cal displacement
Distance from the fork to supporting surface for
machines without PTO drive, mm
403.. .858 (91 8*) stepwise
via 65 mm
Fork position for machines with PTO drive Lowermost or
uppermost
Distance from PTO face to attachment pin ax-
le, mm
160 or 110
Attachment pin diameter 40
Vertical load on THM, kN (kg f) 20 (2000)
Machine turning angle relative to the tractor, de-
gree
65
* With turning over the fork

96
2. - (fork)
Machines: trailed (automobile-type two-axle trailers, etc), semi-trailed (same as for -
1-01).

Hitch mechanism

Rotating fork with vertical displacement
Distance from the fork to support-
ing surface for machines without
PTO drive, mm
mm 288.. .808 (962*) stepwise via 65 mm
Fork position for machines with
PTO drive
lowermost or uppermost, including overturn
Attachment pin size mm 040
Distance from PTO face to at-
tachment pin axle, mm
mm 400
Vertical load on THM kN (kg f) 12 (1200)
Machine turning angle relative to
the tractor
degree
55 (trailers),
85 (agricultural machines)
* With turning over the fork

97
17 3. -1 (dragbar)

Machines: heavy trailed with active drive of driven elements.

Hitch mechanism Fork with variation of position relative to
PTO face
Distance from the fork to supporting surface,
mm
402 (297*)
Distance from PTO face to attachment pin
axle, mm
400 or 500
Attachment pin diameter, mm 30
Vertical load on THM, kN (kg f) 12 (1200)
Machine turning angle relative to the tractor,
degree
85

98
Hitching machines to the tractor
1. When hitching machines to the tractor,
make sure first that there is nobody
within hitching zone.
2. Lower the attached device to the lower
position by using the power governor han-
dle, drive the tractor back and attach the
machine to lower rods. Splint the pins.
Stop the engine.
3. Make the upper rod (1) longer or shorter
and connect the rod ball joint with the
machine. Splint the pin.
4. If necessary, adjust the upper rod to ini-
tial or required length.
5. If necessary, adjust the machine lateral
tilt by using the right adjustable angle
brace (2). Increase the angle brace
length, turn arm (3) clockwise and vice
versa.
6. Prior to operation, check that:
the tractor parts are not in danger-
ous proximity to machine compo-
nents;
the central rod is not in contact with
PTO enclosure at the lowest posi-
tion of the machine;
the PTO cardan drive is not extreme-
ly long, with large joint angles and
there are no thrust forces;
the PTO enclosure is not in contact
with that of machine cardan drive.
7. Slowly lift the machine and check the
clearance of at least 100 mm between
the tractor and the machine in lifted
position.
8. Check the lateral swing of lower rods
and, if necessary, adjust them by us-
ing tie rods.

99
The machine (implement) is also attached
to the tractor by the automatic hitch CA-1
connected to the tractor hookup at three
points (two rear joints of longitudinal rods
and rear joint of the central rod).
To prevent spontaneous disconnection of
the machine from the tractor, fix the auto-
matic hitch latch with a spring cotter pin.
Limiting (telescopic) tie bars ()
The tie bars are use to limit lateral swing-
ing of hanger lower rods both in transport
and working states. This is especially re-
quired during the works on the slopes,
near the excavation pits, wall, etc.
Rear end of the tie bar is attached to the
lower rod and the front one to the hold-
er in one of four positions, depending on
the works:
Position 1. The tie bars exclude imple-
ment swinging in transport state.
ment lateral swinging both in transport
and working states.
IMPORTANT! Positions 3 and 4 should
be used only when installing lower rods
onto additional axes of the hanger (upper
axes).
ment lateral swinging in transport state.
Position 4 The tie bars exclude imple-
ment lateral swinging both in transport
and working state.
ATTENTION! The tie bars shall be in-
stalled only into the second from bottom
apertures for holders (position 2) to
avoid tie bar failure.

100
Partial locking of telescopic tie bars
To ensure the required lateral displace-
ment of the machine, e.g., a plough, adjust
the tie bars in the operating condition as
follows:
rotating the screw (2), set the handle
(3) at the middle of flat B;
pull out the cotter (5) from the tie bar;
attach the machine to the lower rods
(7) and raise it a little to pull off the
ground;
having aligned the apertures of the internal
tube (4) with the groove of external tube (6),
insert the cotter (5) in the middle of the groove
IMPORTANT! Install the cotter (5) so
that it is in the middle of the groove or at
minimal displacement towards the trac-
tor. Otherwise, tie bars can be damaged.
Prior to transportation, lift the machine to
the up position and check its lateral
swinging, which shall not exceed 20 mm
in each direction. If necessary, adjust the
swinging by rotating the screw (2).
Full tie bar locking
For complete locking of the machines,
e.g. a cultivator or attached unit, adjust tie
bars in the working state similar to their
partial locking, except for the last opera-
tion during which align the aperture of the
internal tube (4) with that of external tube
(6) and insert the cotter (5).
Ensure full locking in transport state (the
machine being lifted) by tightening screw
(2) into tube (4) to the maximum.

101
Inner tie bars (2)*
They are also used to limit the lateral
swinging of the machines in working and
transport states.
NOTE: The telescopic tie bars are installed
from the outside only
Partial locking (for tillage)
The adjustments at working position of the
machine shall be made as follows:
screw the adjusting bolts (1) into the
holder to the full;
raise the machine a little so that its
driven elements do not touch the
ground;
adjust the length of the right angle brace
to the given tilling depth (when operating
the plough);
adjust the length of restricting chains
ensuring the machine displacement hor-
izontally to 125 mm in each direction
from the mid position or in accordance
with the operating manual for the ma-
chine by rotating the tie bars (2).
When putting the machine into transport
position, screw in the bolts (1) for its partial
locking. The machine swinging not ex-
ceeding 20 mm in both directions is al-
lowed.
Full locking (for cultivation, sowing,
etc.) shall be set as follows:
screw in fully the adjusting bolts (1);
shorten the tie bars (2) as much as pos-
sible.
IMPORTANT! When changing the
length of the right angle brace, do not
forget to re-adjust the tie bars.
_______________________________
* Not applied for tractors equipped with hydraulic
lift.

102
External chain couplings (2)
Partial locking
Ensure the horizontal displacement of the
machine under working condition by con-
necting restricting chains to the bottom
apertures of the holder (1) and adjusting
the chain length using tie bars (2) to ob-
tain the implement swinging of at least
125 mm in each direction or in accord-
ance with the operating manual for the
machine.
When operating the ploughs, adjust the
length of the right angle brace to the tilling
depth.
ATTENTION! When lifting the machine
to the transport position, keep obligatori-
ly the swinging of the machine to at
least 125 mm to prevent the chain from
breakdown.
When putting the machine to the transport
position, strain the chains by using the tie
bars (2). Swinging of not more than 20 mm
in each direction is allowed.
Full locking
To lock the machine fully in the working
position, attach the restricting chains (20
to the second from bottom aperture of
holder (1) and reduce the chain (2) length
to the maximum extent.
In the transport position the locking is en-
sured automatically.


103
Additional hanger axles of the
lower rods of the hinging mecha-
nism
When cultivating high-stem crops, install
the lower rods (3) onto the additional
hanger axles. When doing this, attach the
restricting chains (2) to the third from bot-
tom aperture of the holder (1) for partial
locking of the implement and to the forth
one for full locking.
In the transport position the locking is en-
sured automatically.
Traction hitch mechanism -1** (cross-
bar) (4)
The traction hitch mechanism is used for
attaching the machines operating at the
speeds of up to 15 km/h. Tractors are
shipped from the factory with the cross-bar
installed as shown in Fig. I. To re-adjust
from the transport position (I) to the work-
ing state (II), proceed as follows:
1. Unsplint and pull out the lug (3) and
remove the cross-bar (4).
2. Unsplint and pull out the pin (2) and re-
move the rear ends of the lower rods (5).
3. Fix cross-bar (4) onto the front ends of
lower rods (1), fix it with the lug (3), re-
stricting chains, pins (2) and splint pins
(see Fig. II).
In case of external or internal fitting of the re-
stricting chains, ensure the full locking of the
traction hitch mechanism. In case of fitting of
a traction hitch mechanism with telescopic tie
bars, attach them to the second from bottom
aperture of the holder and ensure the full
locking.
ATTENTION! It is forbidden to apply the
forks of the traction hitch mechanism to
operate the trailers at the speeds ex-
ceeding 15 km/h.
IMPORTANT! Make sure that the trac-
tion hitch mechanism is locked against
lateral swinging by adjusting the internal
or external tie bars.

_________________________________
* Not applied for tractors equipped with a hydraulic
lift.


104
Front weights (1) and (5)
To preserve the normal steerability of the
tractor under considerable unloading of
the front axle when operating heavy
mounted machines and implements, in-
stall additional weights (1) (10 pieces. of
20 kg each) or weights (5) (10 pieces. of
45 kg each). The weights (1) are installed
onto a special holder (2) which is fastened
to the front beam of the tractor and is
tightened with string (4) and nut (3).
Adjustable limiter of implement lifting
(2)*
To limit the travel of drawing of the plung-
er of the rear cylinder of the hitching
mechanism (implement lifting height),
use the adjustable rest (2). To do this:
loosen butterfly nut (4);
move the adjustable rest (2) along the
cylinder plunger (3) to the required po-
sition and tighten the butterfly nut (4)
by hand. As the implement is lifted to
the required height, the rest (2) will
shift the stem of the hydromechanical
valve (1) and lock the cylinder cavities.
ATTENTION! To prevent the cab dam-
age by the components of the lifted im-
plement, adjust lengths of left and right
angle braces in accordance with rec-
ommendations.
___________________________________
* Only applied for tractors with independent power cyl-
inder of HMS (with power governor).

105

Traction hitch mechanism -*

(trailer gear with automatic hitching)
Attention!
1. Never try to use the trailer gear for
working with semi-trailers or single-axle
trailers.
2. When towing the trailers, always apply
safety chains.
3. Never use rear hinging mechanism when
trailer gear is installed on the tractor.
The trailer gear is fastened to the tractor
with two pins.
The tractor is shipped from the factory with
the trailer gear supported by the upper pin
(transport position) only. To set the trailer
gear to the working condition, proceed as
follows:
lift slightly the gear and remove pin (1);
refit the upper rod (2) to the upper open-
ing of the shackle;
remove the lower pin while holding the
gear in the upper position;
lower the gear, align the holes in the
holder with those in the shackle and
insert the lower pin.
The trailer gear can be installed in two
positions:
lower, for operating the tractor with
the trailers not requiring the use of
PTO rear shank;
upper, for operating the tractor with the
trailers requiring the drive of active ele-
ments from the PTO rear shank (in this
case turn the trailer gear by 180).
When hitching the tractor and the trailer,
the gripper (4) serves as a guide for the
trailer hitch eye. To attach the trailer,
move the tractor back. As a result, the
trailer hitch presses and sinks the pin (5)
and enters the hook jaw. The hitching
takes place automatically. To unhook the
trailer, pull the handle (3) and take hitch
eye from the hook.

__________________________________
* Not applied for tractor equipped with hydraulic lift.

106
Mechanism for fixing the hanging in the transport mode
*

*
Only used for tractors with independent power cylinder of HMS (with power governor).

The fixing mechanism (2) is in-
tended for fixing the mounted attachment
in the transport position to prevent the
mounted implements from lowering.
Applying this mechanism ensures the
mechanical locking of the rotary lever (3)
fitted on the rotary shaft (5), and, respec-
tively, lifting levers of the mounted at-
tachment (4) fitted on the same shaft.
To fix the hanging, lift it to the uppermost
position and then turn the handle (1) to the
left as far as it will go.
To disengage the fixing mechanism, put
the handle of the power governor to the
lift position to release the fixation gear
from the load and then turn the handle (1)
to the right as far as it will go.

107

Controlling the hydraulic system and
mounted attachment without power
governor
On the tractors without power governor,
the mounted attachment is controlled by
means of the rightmost handle of the dis-
tributor.
When operating the mounted machines,
use handle positions lift and floating on-
ly.
It is forbidden to put the handle to posi-
tion lowering when operating mount-
ed tillage machines!
Only use the lowering position when
controlling the external cylinders in-
stalled on the machine and designed for
adjusting the position of working units
(such as a reel, header, opening
ploughs, etc.) of harvesting, sowing and
other machines. If the distributor handle
does not automatically return to the
neutral on completion of the cylinder
movement, do it manually. And vice
versa, in case of earlier return of the
handle, hold it by the hand until the op-
eration is completed.
Controlling the hydraulic system and
mounted attachments with a power (posi-
tion) governor
Power control
Using the power control ensures the best
improvement of the productivity when per-
forming the power intensive agricultural
operations, such as tillage, deep opening
and cultivation when operating the tractor
with mounted agricultural machines.
When tilling with the -35 and -
3-35 ploughs, lift the plough support wheel
to the uppermost position.
When ploughing at small depth (less than
20-23 cm) under conditions, where the soil
density along the run length varies consid-
erably (sand clay), lower the support
wheel to limit the maximum depth on the
plots with low soil density.
When performing the continuous cultiva-
tion and deep opening in case of unitiza-
tion of the tractor with agricultural ma-
chines with two support wheels within
takeover width measurement plane, put
the support wheels to the required height
to exclude lateral warps of the agricultural
machine, uneven loads on the outermost
(right and left) driven elements.

108

When preparing the unit for operation with
power control application, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Install a central rod of the hitch to the up-
per hole of the shackle (position I).
2. Connect the mounted machine with the
tractor hitch.
3. Enable the power control. To do this, lift
slightly the mounted machine above the
ground and put the switch (1) to the slot
of the power arm (2) by turning the
switch to the left (down tractor motion).
To facilitate the switching on, move the
switch forward (in the direction of the
tractor motion) to align it with the recess
on arm (2) prior to putting to slot.
4. On wide-takeover machines, adjust the
support wheels and driven elements to
height. When unitizing with the
ploughs, lift the support wheel to the
top position.
Operation rule and techniques
At the beginning of the run, lower the
mounted machine by turning the handle
(2) forward. The farther the handle is put,
the deeper the soil tillage depth is.
As the arm (2) is pulled towards the opera-
tor, the depth is decreased. After adjust-
ment to the required depth, move the lim-
iter (1) along the console slot to the stop
against the handle and fix.
To raise the implement at the end of the
run, pull the handle (2) to the lift position
(towards yourself to the stop). As the lifting
is completed, the handle shall return spon-
taneously to the neutral position N.

At the beginning of each run, lower the
implement by pushing the handle (2) for-
ward to the stop against limiter (1).

109
Operation of the tractor equipped
with a power governor
When the depth obtained during the tillage
with the power control handle put to the
maximum depth is insufficient, reposition
the central rod (1) of the hitch to the mid-
dle hole of shackle (2).
When operating using the power control
for both tillage and cultivation, adjust the
correction rate handwheel (1). Rotating
the handwheel clockwise reduces the cor-
rection rate and rotating the same coun-
ter-clockwise increases the rate.
The handwheel should be adjusted on
completion of the plough (cultivator) ad-
justment; when doing this, achieve the
smooth automatic depth control during the
operation by rotating the handwheel.
Do not rotate the handwheel clockwise to
the stop since it will result in too slow lift-
ing of the agricultural machine and cause
higher skidding of the tractors driving
wheels.
Adjust the correction rate handwheel and se-
lect the holes in the shackle when installing
the central rod for particular soil conditions
and each type of agricultural machines. No
re-adjustments in the operation are required.


110
Position control
When applying the position control, the
power governor of the hydraulic system
ensures the automatic keeping of the
specified position of the agricultural ma-
chine relatively to the tractor frame.
It is recommended to use the position con-
trol during the soil cultivation by using
mounted ploughs and cultivators for con-
tinuous and multi-row tilling, as well as
during the deep opening under the condi-
tions of even field relief.
When operating the wide-cut machines
unitized with the tractor in the position
control mode, it is necessary to use the
support wheels for excluding the lateral
warps of the agricultural machine, improv-
ing the linearity of the unit motion and cre-
ating the better conditions for imitating the
relief in the lateral direction (relatively to
the tractor motion).
To prepare the implement for operation in
the position control mode, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Connect the machine to be mounted
with the hitch of the tractor.
2. Lift the mounted machine to upper
(transport) position.
3. Switch to the position control mode. To
do this, move the switch (3) to the slot of
the position lever (1) turning it to the right
(in the direction of the tractor motion) to
position I.
4. Turn the correction rate handwheel (2)
counter-clockwise to the stop, setting the
maximum lifting rate for automatic cor-
rections of the position.

111
Operation rule and techniques
Set the mounted machine to the required
position. To lower it, push the handle (2)
forward. The farther the handle is pushed
forward, the lower the machine is. Having
set the machine to the required height,
move limiter (1) to the stop against the han-
dle and fix it.
To lift the machine to transport position at
the end of the run, pull the handle (2) to-
wards yourself to the stop. After lifting, the
handle shall return spontaneously to neu-
tral position.
Height control
The height control can be used when unitiz-
ing the tractor with mounted machines fitted
with the support wheels. It is based on the
principle that the given tillage depth is en-
sured by setting a certain height of the sup-
port wheel of the agricultural machines unit-
ized with the tractor. When working in the
height control mode, set the switch (1) to the
middle position (N). To lift the machine, pull
the handle (2) towards yourself to the stop
and hold it until lifting is completed. When it
will be done, the handle shall return sponta-
neously to the neutral position N. To lower
the machine, push the handle (2) forward to
the control zone prior to machine descent.
It is forbidden to set the handle (2) to the
forced lowering position (forward to the
stop) when operating the mounted ma-
chines. Only use the forced lowering
when attaching the machine to the tractor
hitch. For forced lowering, push the han-
dle (2) to foremost position. After releas-
ing the handle, it must return to control
zone and hitch lowering must stop.


112
Operation of the tractor equipped
with the HMS with a hydraulic lift
Compared to the above-described ADCS
system with an autonomous power gov-
ernor and power cylinder, the HMS with a
hydraulic lift is controlled by two levers lo-
cated in the cab on the right control panel:
power control handle (1); and
position control handle (2).
Position control
1. Push the power control handle (1) to
the foremost position in the direction of
the tractor motion (digit 9 on the
board).
2. Set the required height of the machine
above the ground using the position
control handle (2).
The digit 1 on the board corresponds to
transport position of the RMA and digit 9
to the minimum implement height above
the ground.
If the maximum lifting height is to be lim-
ited (e.g. due to possible failure of the
rear PTO parts), set the maximum lifting
height by means of the handle (2) and
move the adjustable rest (3) towards it.


113
Power control
Use this control mode when operating
the mounted machines (ploughs and cul-
tivators). Move the power control handle
(1) to foremost position in the direction of
the tractor motion (digit 9 on the board).
Move the lower rod joints to the required
position using the position control handle
(2) and attach the implement to the rear
hitch.
Having entered the furrow, push the
handle (2) to foremost position and ad-
just the required tillage depth using the
handle (1).
When leaving and leaving subsequently
the furrow (when tilling), use the handle
(2) only without touching the power con-
trol handle (1).
Combined control
If you cannot reach steady soil tilling depth
due to non-uniform soil density, limit the
maximum depth by the position control
handle (2) (combined control mode), hav-
ing remembered the respective digit on
the board.

114
Peculiarities of operation of the tractor
with machines requiring the drive
from the rear PTO
a) prior to attaching the machine to the
tractor, make sure of correct adjust-
ment of the rear PTO control;
b) install and fix reliably the required (8-
or 21-spline) PTO shank and engage
the drive with the respective rotational
speed; here set 540 rpm for 8-spline
shank and 1000 rpm for 21-spline
one.
To replace the PTO shank, proceed as
follows:
1. Unscrew two bolts and remove the cap
(1).
2. Unscrew four nuts (3) and remove
the housing (2).
3. Unscrew six bolts (4), remove the
plate (6) and take the shank (5) away.
4. Install another shank into the spline
opening and mount the plate (6).
5. Assemble the other parts in the re-
verse order.

c) lubricate the shaft and driveline tele-
scopic connection tube with the cup
grease. Install driveline joint onto the
PTO shank and reliably fasten it in the
fixation groove. Make sure that the
lugs (2) of the forks (1) of the joint
joints (1) of the intermediate (telescop-
ic) shaft lie in the same plane. Non-
observance of this requirement caus-
es driveline and PTO overloads;
d) install agricultural machine cardan
shaft housing;


115
e) having installed the driveline, make sure
that the components of the driveline tel-
escopic connection do not abut during
extreme machine positions relative to
the tractor; the minimum overlap of the
driveline telescopic connection shall be
110-120 mm, because lower overlap
value could cause the transmission dis-
connection.
The length of the safety clutch spring
(1) of the agricultural machine must be
adjusted in such a way that the jaw
clutches 2 and 3 would rotate one rela-
tively another during overloads. Excess
tightening of the spring causes the fail-
ure of the clutch to operate and over-
loads of the driveline and PTO.
Activate the independent PTO drive
when the engine is stopped or running at
the minimum speed. The synchronous
PTO drive should be activated with the
engine running by engaging smoothly
the clutch.
When operating the tractor without the
PTO, set obligatorily the PTO control
lever to the PTO OFF position, the two-
speed PTO drive clutch to position 1
(540 rpm) and the lever for toggling be-
tween the independent and synchronous
PTO drives to the middle (neutral) po-
sition.

116
The tractor motion with the synchronous
PTO drive engaged is allowed at the
speed of not more than 8 km/h;
f) Disengage the PTO when turning the
unit (for trailed machines), as well as
when lifting the machine to the
transport position (for mounted and
semi-mounted machines);
g) Having unhooked the machine from
the tractor do not leave the driveline
joint on the PTO shank;
h) When installing the driving pulley on
the rear PTO cover, as well as reduc-
ing gear for driving a special machine
(cotton-growing, excavating machines,
etc.), make sure that they are centred
relatively the shank (seated into bor-
ing 162 mm on the rear cover) and
their fixing nuts are reliably tightened.
When working with rotary machines for
tillage:
a) Watch the running order and normal
operation of safety devices;
b) Do not engage PTO on when the driv-
en element is on the ground;
c) Lower the machine with rotating oper-
ating parts smoothly during the tractor
motion;
d) Do not engage PTO, if the refraction
angle at one of the driveline joints ex-
ceeds 35;
e) When operating on hard soils, till lat-
eral strips to enter the field and only
after that carry out the tillage in longi-
tudinal direction.
Operating the trailers and trailed ma-
chines
The single-axle machines like semi-
trailers are hooked up to the tractor by
means of the -2 and the trailed
ones via -K*' (trailer gear with
automatic hitch). Transporting the ma-
chines by using -1 (cross-bar) is
allowed at the speed of below 15 km/h
without entering general-purpose roads
and when performing the agricultural
works.
ATTENTION!
It is strictly forbidden to unitize the ma-
chines like trailers and semi-trailers via
-1 (cross-bar).
Connect the connecting heads of the
trailer pneumatic system with the tractor
pneumatic system depressurized.
When working with single-axle trailed
machined, install additional weights for
loading additionally the front axle of the
tractor.
Two-axle trailers are hooked up to the
tractor by means of the - or -
(their hitching with the -1 fork
is not allowed). Having hooked up the
tractor with the trailer, make sure that
the latch has fully left the body, and
connect the trailer to the tractor with
the safety chain (cord).
When trailer gear is installed on the tractor,
it is forbidden to attach semi-trailers (sin-
gle-axle trailers) as well as two-axle trailers
with non-standard hitch to it.

________________________________
Via -2 or - for tractors
equipped with hydraulic lift.

117
It is strictly forbidden to use the rear
hinging when the trailer gear is in-
stalled on the tractor!
The trailers shall be used at the speeds
defined by the road conditions. It is al-
lowed to operate the trailers 2-4-
887 with the body capacity of 20 and
45 m
3
at the speeds of up to 15 km/h,
since their stability is lower. Avoid sharp
turns of these trailers and broadcaster
1-4 to prevent damage of fenders of
their rear wheel.
The trailer eye (2-4-785, etc) shall
be fixed against slipping to avoid its
jamming.
During the operation, the fork -1
shall be fastened to the cross-bar of
the hitch with two pins. It is forbidden
to use the fork fixed with one pin.
Prior to operation, make sure that the
pins and the pivot bolt of the hitch fork
are reliably splinted. All the trailer signal-
ling units (stop and turn indicator lights,
number plate lighting) are to be con-
nected via the plug socket mounted on
the tractor.
Trailer brakes with pneumatic or hydrau-
lic actuator are controlled through the
tractor pneumatic system.
Using the optional equipment of the
tractor
As optional equipment, a rear driving pul-
ley, side PTO, additional weights for
loading the front axle, speed reducer, au-
tomatic hitching CA-1, spacer plate for
installing the twinned rear wheels and
other equipment can be mounted on the
tractor.
A rear pulley is installed on the rear
PTO reducing gear cover and driven
by the PTO slotted shank. To prevent
the PTO shank deformation, ensure
obligatorily the installation of the hous-
ing onto four studs with centring the
flange in the PTO cover. Use the PTO
control lever for engaging and disen-
gaging the pulley.
The side PTO is installed instead of left
cover of the gearbox with leading the con-
trols into the cab. It may be used for addi-
tional drive of mechanisms and operating
elements of the machines of front and
side hooking.
The additional weights with the total
weight of 220 or 510 kg are mounted on-
to a special holder, which is fastened to
the front beam of the tractor.
To provide the possibility of using the
tractor with the machines requiring lower
speeds, a speed reducer is installed.
The speed reducer additionally decreas-
es tractor speeds at I and II gears during
forward and reverse motion (the speed
reducer is optional).
To install a speed reducer on the trac-
tor, follow the recommendations stated in
the Technical Description and Operation
Manual for the Speed Reducer enclosed
to each speed reducer shipped against
the customers order.
IMPORTANT! Having installed a
speed reducer on the tractor, fill in
power transmission with oil to the
check plug level and add more 10 li-
tres.

118
Tyres
IMPORTANT!
1. Never exceed air pressure values recommended by the manufacturer for the tyres.
2. Do not perform welding the disk or other repair works with the tyre inflated. To
unfit and repair the tyres, contact the workshop staffed with trained personnel.
Tyres used on the 900 series tractors

900/900.3/950/950.3 920/952 920.2/920.3/952.2/952.3
front rear front rear front rear
Standard
9.00-20
9.00R20
18.4R34
(mod. -11)
13.6-20 16.9R38 360/70R24 18.4R34
Optional: 7.50-20
18.4R30 or
18.4/78-30
15.5R38 18,4R34
(-11)
16.9R38
9.5-42
11.2R42

11.2-20

15.5R38
18.4R34
18.4R30 or
18.4/78-30
(18.4L-30)
9.5-42
11.2R42

13,6-20
11.2R24

16.9R30
15.5R38
9.5-42
11.2R42

IMPORTANT! For tractors equipped with a FDA (920/920.2/920.3/952/952.2/952.3), the
properly selected combination of front and rear tyres should be used. Using proper front
and rear tyre combination will ensure maximum performance of the tractor, increase the
tyre service life and reduce the wear of the power transmission components. Simultane-
ous use of worn-out and new tyres, or tyres with different diameters or rolling radii can
lead to violation of the requirements concerning the kinematic non-conformance and ex-
cessive tyre wear. The table below gives recommended combinations of front and rear
tyres.
Allowable combinations of front and rear tyres for the Belarus
920/920.2/920.3, Belarus 952/952.2/952.3 tractors
Front tyres 920/952 920.2/920.3/952.2/952.3
Rear tyres
11.2-20 13,6-20 360/70R24 11.2R24 13,6-20
9.5-42 + - + + -
11.2R42 + - + + -
15.5R38 + - + + -
18.4R34 (-11) + - + + -
16.9R38 - +
-
- -
18.4R30 or 18.4/78-30 (18.4L-30) + - - - -
16.9R30 - - - - +
To ensure the normal operation of the tractor, set the air pressure in the tyres according to the
table given below. The pressure must be set in cold tyres. When carrying out the works requiring
traction forces, set the pressure as for the speed of 30 km/h. When performing the transport works
on the roads with hard surfaces, increase the pressure by 30 MPa. When operating the front lift,
set the maximum pressure specified for the front tyres.


119

Norm of the tyre loads for selecting the operating mode at different inner pres-
sures

T
y
r
e

s
i
z
e

S
p
e
e
d

s
y
m
b
o
l

Tyre load, kg at the inner pressure, MPa and at the speed designated by the
symbol
0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28
7.50-20 A6 580 625 670 715 760 800 835 875
9.00R20 A6 580 640 715 780 840 900 960 1020 1070 1120
11.2-20 A6 765 850 930 1000 1080 1145
13.6-20 A6 1020 1100 1200 1300 1400
11.2R24 A8 785 895 995 1090 1180
360/70R24 A8 1090 1180 1285 1400 1500
16.9R30 A8 1535 1745 1945 2125 2300
18,4R30 A6 1750 1975 2200 2425 2650 2800
18,4/78-30
(18.4L-30)
A8 2005 2225 2430
18.4R34 A8 2020 2220 2410 2610 2800
15.5R38 A8 1420 1620 1810 1945 2120
16.9R38 A8 1700 1920 2140 2355 2575
9.5-42 A6 710 810 910 990 1065 1145 1220
11.2R42 A6 895 1020 1140 1240 1335 1435 1525 1620 1700

For tyres with speed symbol A6, the loads are given for the speed of 30 km/h.
For tyres with speed symbol A8, the loads are given for the speed of 40 km/h.

120
Allowable load variation on guide and drive wheel tyres, depending on speed

Speed, km/h Load variation, %,
on the guide wheel tyres
with the speed symbol
6 (30 km/h) 8 (40 km/h)
10 +50 +67
15 +43 +50
20 +35 +39
25 +15 +28
30 0 +11
35 -10 +4
40 -20 0
45 - -7
For tyres with ply-rating 6 and more, inner pressure shall be increased by 25%.
When using tyres with ply-rating 6 and more on front lifts, load increase of up to
100 % per tyre is allowed only in loading mode.

Speed, km/h Load variation, %,
on the drive wheel tyres
with the speed symbol
6 (30 km/h) 8 (40 km/h)
10 +40 +50
15 +30 +34
20 +20 +23
25 +7 +11
30 0 +7
35 -10 +3
40 -20 0
45 - -4
50 - -9
The inner pressure shall be increased by 25%.
Load variation is allowed shortly, for not more than 10 % of the shift time.
Note. Depending on speed, load variation is applied in cases, when the tyre is not
subjected to long-term operation under high torques. When performing the field
works and under other conditions of long-term operation at high torques, the values
corresponding to 30 km/h speed shall be applied.
When performing the transport works on hard surface roads, increase the pressure
by 30 MPa (0.3 kgf/cm
2
)

121
In case of twinning the wheels, their total capacity shall not exceed that of a single tyre
more than 1.7 times.
In case of twinning the wheels, set the air pressure in the tyres of the outer wheels to be
1.21.5 times lower than in those of the inner wheels.
Allowable loads on front and rear axles

Tractor model:
BELARUS
Allowable load, kN (without tyre carrying capacity)
On the front axle On the rear axle
900/900.2/900.3/950/950.2/950.3 17.5 50.0
920/920.2/920.3/952/952.2/952.3 24.0/30.0 50.0

Note:
1. The loads on the axles shall not exceed the total carrying capacity of the single tyres
of the front and rear wheels.
2. When setting the track above 1800 mm, the loads on axles shall be reduced on the
basis of 5% per each 100 mm of increase of the track.

Set the air pressure in the tyres in accordance with the tables above.

122
Liquid ballast
Filling the tyres with liquid ballast is only used in case of insufficient grip of the wheel
with the soil under unfavourable conditions (overwatered soil, etc.).
NOTE: It is not recommended to fill the front tyres with ballast, since it impairs the trac-
tor steerability.
In cold season it is recommended to use the mixture of calcium chloride with water on
the basis of:
Ambient temperature, C Amount of calcium chloride, g/l of wa-
ter
up to -15
up to -25
up to -35
200
300
435
This ensures the low freezing point and higher density of the solution and provides safe
and economical ballast. If used properly, it does not cause any damages to tyres, tubes
or rims.
When filling the tyre with water solution of calcium chloride, the tyre valve shall be at
the highest point of the wheel.
The table below gives the amounts of solution to be poured into the rear tyres:
Tyre size Amount of solution filled, l/tyre
16.9R38
15.5R38
18.4R30 or 18.4/78-30 (18.4L-30);
18.4R34
16.9R30
280
206
320
360
250

IMPORTANT! The tyres may be filled to 75% of their volume. In case of exces-
sive filling, air volume will be insufficient for impact absorption, which can result in
tyre damage.
WARNING: when mixing the solution, calcium chloride flakes have to be added
into water and stirred to reach complete dilution of CaCl2. Never add water into
calcium chloride. When preparing the solution, put on safety goggles. If the solu-
tion gets into eyes, cleanse then with clean water within 5 min. Apply for medical
assistance as soon as possible.

123
Installing twinned rear wheels
To increase cross-country ability, twinned
rear wheels with the standard size of 9.5-
42 and 15.5R38 can be installed on the
tractor with the use of additional spacer
plates. To mount an additional wheel,
remove the main one, press out short
bolts (2) from the hub (1) and press in the
long bolts included into the spacer plate
set. Place the main wheel on the bolts (2)
and fix it with the nuts (3). Then install the
spacer plate (4) on the same bolts and fix
it with nuts (5). Then mount the additional
wheel on the spacer plate bolts (6) and
fix it with nuts (7). The nut tightening
torque for fastening the rear wheels is
300350 Nm (3035 kgfm).
ATTENTION! It is forbidden to use
twinned wheels to increase traction
force on the hook.


124

Pneumatic system of trailer brake control
Single-line pneumatic actuator

1 compressor; 2 pressure regulator; 3 air intake valve; 4 tank; 5 pressure indi-
cator; 6 emergency pressure pilot lamp; 7 pressure transducer; 8 emergency
pressure sensor; 9 condensate removal valve; 10 connecting head; 11 control
line; 12 brake valve.

The tractor is equipped with the pneu-
matic system controlling the brakes of
the trailers and other agricultural ma-
chines equipped with pneumatic brake
actuator.
The pneumatic system is also used for
inflating the tyres and other purposes,
when compressed air power is required.
The pneumatic system is also used for
inflating the tyres and other purposes,
when compressed air power is required.
Air is taken to the system from the en-
gine intake manifold. Air is compressed
in the compressor (1) and supplied to
tank (4) via pressure regulator (2) main-
taining the required pressure in the tank.
Compressed air is supplied from the
tank via pipeline to the brake valve (12).
From the brake valve air is passed via
control line (11) to the connecting head
(10) and then to the pneumatic system
of the trailer. The air intake valve (3),

which used for inflating the tyres and
other purposes, is installed in the pres-
sure regulator. To monitor air pressure
in the system, there is a pressure trans-
ducer (7) and the emergency pressure
drop sensor (8) and on the dashboard
pressure indicator (5) and red pilot lamp
(6). To remove condensate from the
tank, the valve (9) is provided.
The brakes of the trailers and agricultur-
al machines are controlled in two
modes: direct and automatic.
The direct control of the brakes is exer-
cised at the cost of the pressure drop in
the connecting line when braking the
tractor to zero.
The automatic brake control is exercised
by at the cost of the pressure drop to ze-
ro in the trailer connecting line in case of
its disconnection (detachment) from the
tractor. Here the valve in the connecting
head of the tractor is automatically shut

125
off that prevents compressed air outflow
from the tractor system.

126

Two-line pneumatic drive (Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
*

The tractors may be equipped with two-
line pneumatic brake actuator for the
trailers equipped with pneumatic brake
actuator.

Pneumatic drive is also used for inflating
the tyres and other purposes, when the
compressed air power is required.

1 compressor; 2 pressure regulator; 3 air intake valve; 4 tank; 5 pressure indi-
cator; 6 emergency pressure pilot lamp; 7 pressure transducer; 8 emergency
pressure drop sensor; 9 condensate removal valve; 10 supply line; 11, 11a con-
necting heads; 12 control line; 13 brake valve.

Air is taken into the system from the en-
gine intake manifold. Air is compressed
in compressor (1) and supplied to tank
(4) via pressure regulator (2) maintain-
ing the required pressure in the tank.
Compressed air is supplied from the
tank via pipeline to the brake valve (12).
From the brake valve air is passed via
supply line (10) with the connecting
head (11) (with red cover), which is con-
stantly under pressure.
The brake valve with connecting head
(11a) (yellow cover), where there is no
pressure. Controlling the brakes of the
trailers and agricultural machines is ex-
ercised in two modes: direct and auto-
matic.

The direct control is exercised by the
pressure build-up in the control line (12) to
6.5-8.0 kgf/cm
2
when braking the tractor.
In this case, the supply line (10) remains
pressurized and compressed air feeding to
the trailer pneumatic system goes on.
Automatic brake control is exercised at the
cost of pressure drop to zero in the trailer
supply line during in case of its disconnec-
tion (detachment) from the tractor. Here
the valve in the connecting head (red cov-
er) is automatically shut down preventing
compressed air outflow from the tractor
system.
________________________________
* For other models optional.
Aggregation BELARUS series 900

127
AGGREGATION

The section TRACTOR AGGREGATION contains the necessary information on the pecu-
liarities of the intended use of the BELARUS tractor of your model including the recommen-
dations on the aggregation, selection of machines, conditions of safe use of the tractor and
determining the steerability criterion, rules of correct completing of machine-tractor aggre-
gates (hereinafter referred to as the MTA or tractor-based aggregate) as well as some other
necessary documentation, making it possible to assess the possibility of using the tractor
with machines within MTAs.
The recommendations for aggregation of the specific technical means differing at to their
nomenclature and performance characteristics, including description of their design, infor-
mation on their adjustment, procedure of completing the MTA and technique of performance
of the works are provided in the operating documentation for agricultural machines.

1. Intended use of the tractor

Purpose and specialization:
Wheeled universal agricultural-purpose tilling tractor providing the operation of machines
as a power source.
Kinds of the main agricultural works to be performed:
Cultivation and harvesting of row crops, sowing of cereal crops, harvesting of straw and
grasses, transportation works, fertilizing and spraying of fields and gardens, overall tillage,
harrowing and ploughing.
Method of use:
Aggregation of machines with the help of three-point mounted attachments and hitching
mechanisms within the MTA.
Conditions of aggregation of machines:
The tractor provides for the possibility of operation of the machines, the performance
characteristics of which are compatible in the part of the aggregation capability with the
overall dimensions and allowable vertical static loads on the traction hitch mechanisms and
running gear of the tractor as to connecting dimensions, possibility of motion at the neces-
sary speed, power intake and realization of a tractive force under specific operation condi-
tions, overall dimensions and allowable vertical static loads on the traction hitch mecha-
nisms.
Operation constraint:
The possibilities of use of the tractor under specific conditions are determined by the al-
lowable range of the rated tractive forces at the hook and power of the engine and limited by
the maximum allowable loads on the tractor, hitching capabilities of the running gear and
allowable skidding, working motion speed, allowable power intake and mass of the ma-
chines to be aggregated.
Operation guidelines:
The tractor shall be operated and the safety requirements when aggregating and servic-
ing the same shall be met in full compliance with the Operating Manual for the tractor, nor-
mative documents for labour protection and road regulations. The manufacturer only guar-
antees the possibility of reliable and safe operation of the tractor provided the customer ob-
serves the rules and conditions of the operation, maintenance, transportation and storage
specified in this Manual, as well as intactness of the seals. Subject to observance of all the
guidelines of the tractor manufacturer, including the speed mode, it is allowed to use the

128
tractor for performing non-agricultural kinds of works as a power source by aggregating the
machines in the MTA using standard working equipment intended for aggregating.
Qualification of the servicing personnel:
The operation of the tractor by driving and aggregating the same shall be allowed to the
persons (hereinafter referred to as tractor drivers, operators) having passed special training
and instruction on the matters of the labour protection, having the documents in the form
provided by the legislation for the right of driving a tractor and having obtained the permit for
operation of a specific tractor.
The owners as well as officials and other persons responsible for the technical condition
and operation of the tractor are barred from allowing the tractor to participate in the road
traffic and be operated with violation of the requirements of the road regulation and this
Manual for the tractor. The owner of the tractor (or person responsible for its operation) shall
read carefully this Manual and fulfil all the safety requirements and operation rules stated
therein.
Should the owner of the tractor (or person responsible for its operation) does not work on
the tractor him/herself, he/she shall make sure obligatorily that all the persons pertaining to
the tractor have got the instructions for safety precautions and correct aggregation of the
tractor with machines as well as read carefully the Operating Manual for the tractor and un-
derstood comprehensively the same.
The tractor driver working on the tractor bears the personal responsibility for observance
of the road regulations and safety precautions as well as for correctness of using the tractor
in accordance with the Operating Manual for the tractor. Prior to performing the works, the
tractor driver shall read also the technical documentation for the machine to be operated
with the tractor.

2. Types and classification of agricultural machine-tractor aggregates based on the
BELARUS tractors

The agricultural aggregates operated on the basis of the BELARUS tractors are classified
according to the following operational signs:
Kind of the process to be carried-out: ploughing, sowing, planting, soil-cultivating,
harvesting and others.
Method of performing the works: mobile (performing the work in the process of mo-
tion; stationary-mobile (performing the work in the stationary or moving state); stationary
(performing the work under stationary conditions, when the tractor does not move).
Type of driving the tools of the machine: tractional, tractional-and-driven and driv-
en. The tractor-based tractional aggregates utilize the whole useful power through a traction
hitch mechanism or mounted attachment.
The useful power of the tractional-and-driven MTA is utilized simultaneously by trac-
tion via traction hitch mechanism of the tractor and through mechanical and/or hydraulic
power intake via PTO shaft and free hydraulic outlets of the tractor. The driven MTAs per-
form the work under stationary conditions (the tractor does not move) through mechanical
and/or hydraulic power intake via PTO shaft and free hydraulic outlets of the tractor. A
transport MTA is a particular example of the tractional aggregate.

129

The number of machines within the MTA: single- and multi-machine aggregates. A
machine performing several working functions, the process modules of which are not in-
tended for using as separate technical mean, is considered to be a single machine.
Arrangement of the tools relatively to the longitudinal plane of the tractor:
symmetrical and asymmetrical.
Arrangement relatively to the rear wheels and longitudinal plane of the tractor:
rear, left- and right-side (in the interaxle clearance between the front and rear wheels), front
and combined.
Quantity of the jobs to be performed: similar tractor-based aggregates performing
a single job; combined or complex ones performing two and more jobs simultaneously by
means of several machines; combined ones performing several jobs be means of a single
machine; universal ones equipped with replaceable tools capable of performing different op-
erations in different time.

According to the method of aggregating with the tractor, the agricultural machines are divid-
ed into the following types:

1. MOUNTED: to be fastened to the joints of the upper and lower rods of the traction
hitch mechanism at three points. The weight of the machine in the transport position is per-
ceived completely by the tractor. The constructional elements of the machine in the
transport position have no contact with the bearing area. When re-arranging the machine
from the working position to the transport one, the point of connecting the machine with the
tractor is moved forcedly to a new height.

2. SEMI-MOUNTED: to be fastened at three points to the joints of the upper and lower
rods of the traction hitch mechanism, but at only two points to the joints of the lower roads
of the traction hitch mechanism. The weight of the machine in the transport position is per-
ceived partially by the tractor and, to a greater extent, by its own transport wheels (usually
one or two). When re-arranging the machine from the working position to the transport one,
the point of connecting the machine with the tractor is moved forcedly to a new height.

The two-point articulated joint is implemented by fastening the link pins of the machine
mounting axle with the joints of the lower rods of the traction hitch mechanism (the upper
rod is not used). The option of use of a cross-bar from the equipment of the tractor or ma-
chine is also possible.

3. SEMI-TRAILED: to be fastened commonly to the hitching mechanism at one point by
means of a hitching loop. The option of the two-point articulated joint with the mounted at-
tachment (without using the upper rod) is also possible. The weight of the machine in the
transport position is perceived partially by the tractor and, to a greater extent, by its own
transport wheels (usually at least two). When re-arranging the machine from the working
position to the transport one, the point of connecting the machine with the tractor is not re-
positioned.
The semi-trailed machines include also various general- and special-purpose transport
facilities, such as general-purpose semitrailers, tank semitrailers, dump semitrailers and
special semi-trailed transport facilities for mechanization of jobs in the agriculture. Transpor-
tation facilities aggregated by means of saddle-type coupling arrangement are particular ex-
amples of semi-trailed machines.

130

4. TRAILED: to be coupled usually by means of a hitching loop to the hitching mecha-
nism. The option of the two-point articulated joint with the mounted attachment (without us-
ing the upper rod) is also possible. The weight of the machine in the transport position is
perceived completely by the machines running gear, only the load from the weight of the
machines coupling arrangement is born by the traction hitch mechanism (or mounted at-
tachment) of the tractor. When re-arranging the machine from the working position to the
transport one, the point of connecting the machine with the tractor is not repositioned.
The trailed machines include also various general- and special-purpose transport facili-
ties, such as general-purpose trailers, tank trailers, dump trailers and special semi-trailed
transport facilities for mechanization of jobs in the agriculture. Transportation facilities ag-
gregated by means of saddle-type coupling arrangement are particular examples of semi-
trailed machines.
When aggregating the mounted, trailed, semi-mounted and semi-trailed machines, it is al-
lowed to fasten their individual components (automatic control system boards, markers, limit
rods, connecting accessories, brackets, etc.) subject to observation of all the guidelines of
the Operating Manual.

5. ATTACHED: to be fastened by fixing the assembly units (usually connecting frame)
from the complete set of the machine to the mounting holes of the tractor. The joints of the
mounted attachment roads fixed at the top position against spontaneous lowering can serve
as connecting accessories; in this case, the required position of the machine relatively to the
bearing area may be achieved by extending the braces or attaching the special braces from
the complete set of the machine. The weight of the attached technical facility is perceived
completely by the tractor.
The equipment of this type includes the attached front and grab loaders. It is allowed to
use the holes of the semiframe and rear-axle tube for fastening the auxiliary components
(tension buckles, brackets, markers and hitches) included in the agricultural machines ag-
gregated by means of three-point mounted attachments and traction hitch mechanisms of
the tractor without special permit.
Attention!
1. Aggregation of the attached machines (loaders, bulldozers) is not related to the in-
tended use of the BELARUS tractor.
2. No permit for joint operation of the BELARUS tractors with the mounted, trailed, semi-
mounted and semi-trailed machines is required provided such operation comply fully
with this Operating Manual for the tractor and does not fall outside the allowable
framework of its use. In this case the Minsk Tractor Works shall not bear any respon-
sibility for the failures, breakages and other troubles in the operation of the tractor
arisen due to incorrect selection and/or improper use of the machines with the tractor.
The agreement of the aggregation of the mounted, trailed, semi-mounted and semi-
trailed agricultural machines is a recommended procedure.

3. Recommendations for selecting the agricultural machines for aggregating

The consumer shall select and purchase the agricultural machines to the tractor on
his/her/its own based on his/her/its needs and with the account of the characteristics of the
machine and tractor as well as local conditions (requirements of the agricultural technolo-
gies, soil conditions, personal experience, recommendations of the respective regional advi-
sory centres and organizations for the agricultural production). It shall be kept in mind that
the agricultural machines of the same purposes, but from different manufacturers can differ

131
in the aggregation peculiarities and have different performance characteristics and adjust-
ments.
Usually, the operational documentation for the machines manufactured by reputable
manufacturers considers the matters of correct intended use of the machines including the
recommendations for selecting and aggregating the tractor as well as safety procedure in
sufficient details. In any case, the manufacturer (seller) of the machine shall provide you on
your request with the information on the basic minimum characteristics of the tractor which
shall ensure the possibility of aggregation of the machine.
The formation of a tractor-based aggregate consists in determining the number and char-
acteristics of the machines to be coupled with your tractor, the hitch (if necessary) and addi-
tional equipment to be used, adjustments and settings to be performed and the gear to be
engaged. However, it is necessary first of all to purchase the machines. The procedure of
formation of the tractor-based aggregates and peculiarities of the work are given in the op-
eration manuals for the technical means to be aggregated. In every case, it is necessary to
check the compatibility as to coupling members, load-carrying capacity of the mounted im-
plements and tyres as well as allowable load on the traction hitch mechanism and axles of
the tractor.
The BELARUS tractor can be aggregated with the machines having the rated re-
sistance of the tools of 1.4 kN.
The grasp width of the aggregate and operating depth depend mainly on the specific re-
sistance of the soils, which determine the range of operating speeds with the account of agricultural
requirements. The heavier is the soil, the higher is the specific resistance.
Based on the tractive force range of 12.8...18 kN provided by the BELARUS tractor
on the stubble field, the approximate calculation of the grasp width of the commonly used
power-intensive agricultural machines with these tractors (see Table 1). The specific re-
sistance is given for the operating speed of 5 km/h. Variation of the speed by 1 km/h varies
the specific resistance by the value of up to 1%.
The interrow cultivation of row crops is provided using the narrow tyres from addition-
al equipment in the row-spacing of 450 to 900 mm. However, the interrow cultivation of maize,
cotton and similar cultures using the tyres from the standard equipment is also possible.
Based on its tractive capacity, the tractor can be aggregated with a 46-row complex
of machines for cultivation of potato in stitches, a 12-row complex for cultivation of sugar
beet, 812-row complex for cultivation of maize, sunflower, soya and other similar crops.

Table 1
Technical mean
Specific resistance, kN
(kgf)
Approximate grasp width,
m
Ploughs
soils: heavy
medium
light
Disk harrows
Hoeing ploughs
share scufflers
Cultivators
Sowing machines
Harvesters
Combine harvesters:
ensilage harvester
potato harvester

18...25 (1800...2500)
12...14 (1200...1400)
6...8 (600...800)
1.6...2.1 (160...210)

6.0...10.0 (600...1000)
1.6...3.0 (160...300)
1.2...1.8 (120...180)
1.2...1.5 (120...150)

2.6...3.3 (260...330)
10...12 (1000...1200)

0.7
1.0
up to 1.7
up to 6.0

up to 1.4...2.0
4...8
up to 7.2
up to 9

1.4
1.4


132
Attention!
It is very important that the manufacturer (seller) of the machine would provide the infor-
mation on the characteristics of the tractor, which would ensure the possibility of operation
of the machine in sufficient details. If such information is unavailable, we recommend to re-
frain from purchase (operate) such a machine to avoid possibly heavier troubles in the pro-
cess of its aggregation, which could cause the breakdowns of the tractor

Fig. 1. Main kinds of the machine-tractor aggregates based on the BELARUS tractor

133

The possibility of aggregation and selection of the machines for the tractor can be de-
termined independently by experimental or calculating method or on the basis of tests per-
formed previously by the respective organizations, for example, zonal machine-testing sta-
tions, as well as recommendations of the machine manufacturer.

Calculation method of aggregation. When using the calculation method, the calcula-
tions are performed according to the appropriate formulae on the basis of the initial data and
technical reference literature, the respective characteristics of selection of the tractor and
machine are compared and on the basis of this comparison the conclusion on the possibility
of their aggregation is made. This method can be recommended for approximate calcula-
tions in cases where experimental data are unavailable or where it is necessary to know
immediately the approximate composition of the machine-tractor aggregate. Since the calcu-
lations use the medium values and all the peculiarities of the aggregation may not be taken
into account, the tractor-based aggregate formed in such a way can be inoperable in some
cases and its additional adjustment in the process of field work can be required. This meth-
od can be recommended for approximate calculations in cases where experimental data are
unavailable or where it is necessary to know immediately the approximate composition of
the machine-tractor aggregate.
When using reliable data and taking into account all the power inputs and local condi-
tions, the possibility of aggregation of the machine with the tractor can be checked sufficient-
ly accurately. Such operational calculations are recommended prior to purchasing a new
machine.

Experimental method of aggregation. When using the experimental method, the ma-
chines are selected and aggregates are further completed by performing the practical check
on the basis of the available operational documentation, normative and reference data as
well as with the account of the gained experience of forming the aggregates at the specific
farm or enterprise.
The initial data for selecting the machines to be aggregated with the tractors include the
kind and characteristic of the soil to be ploughed or crops to be cultivated, dimensions and
relief of the fields, agrotechnical requirements for the work to be performed (operating
speed, agrotechnical clearance, track, tyre width, working travel direction, operation weight,
aggregation method, vertical load on the coupling arrangement), draught resistance and
power requirements of the working machines, haulage capacity and power of the tractor.
When selecting the machines, pay special attention to the variable characteristics of the
conditions of operation of the agricultural machinery under field conditions. For example, the
tractor with the drawbar category of 1.4 shall work with the three-furrow plough with the
grasp width of 1.5 m under usual conditions, but on the areas with light soils and without
slopes it ensures the operation of the four-furrow plough with the grasp width of 1.6 m.
When forming the machine-tractor aggregate, it is extremely significant to select correctly
the gear, on which the tractor shall work. Of course, it would be more beneficial to work at
high speed and with large grasp width and operating depth of the tools of the aggregated
machines. Unfortunately, it is impossible to increase the speed of motion of the aggregate
and its grasp width and operating depth. The higher is the speed, the lesser is the tractors
tractive force, therefore, it is necessary to reduce the grasp width and operating depth and
vice versa. It is necessary to keep also in mind that the speed and operating depth are often
limited by the agrotechnical requirements.
The determination and assessment of the possibility of aggregation of the BELARUS
tractor with agricultural machines shall be performed in several stages.


134

Stage I
Data preparation and acquisition
a. Read carefully the Operating Manual for the tractor. Determine the main technical
characteristics of the tractor: drawbar category, rated tractive force, engine power, allowable
mechanical and hydraulic takeoff power, coupling dimensions/type (of the traction hitch
mechanism or mounted attachment; PTO shanks, hydraulic outlets, electric socket and
pneumatic head), positional relationship of the PTO shank end face relatively to the centre
of the axis of the mounted attachment hanger or link pin of the traction hitch mechanism;
standard equipment, speed and track range, availability of the necessary working equipment
and maximum allowable weight of the tractor, allowable loads on the axles and wheel tyres
and total weight of the trailer towed.
b. Read carefully the Operating Manual for the machine. Determine the main technical
characteristics of the machine: draught resistance, mechanical (power intake shaft), electric
and hydraulic power takeoff, coupling dimensions/type (of the hitch bar or tongue loop; cou-
pling triangle; power intake shaft shanks, hydraulic outlets, electric plug and pneumatic
heads), positional relationship of the power intake shaft shank end face relatively to the cen-
tre of the axis of the coupling triangle or hitch bar or tongue loop; possibility of modification
of the standard equipment, power intake shaft type and rotation direction, operating speed
range, full service weight with the adjustment rotor, presence of the brakes and cardan shaft
(type, length, presence and type of the protective clutch). If necessary, consult with the sell-
er (manufacturer) of the machine and request the missing data about the machine.

Stage II
Checking the assemblability
Assessment of the construction compatibility of the mating members of the tractor (trac-
tion hitch mechanisms, three point mounted attachments; hydraulic and electrical connec-
tions; pneumatic heads; PTO shanks) with the respective members of the machine including
the compliance of the track and standard size of the wheels with the requirements of the
technique of the works performed, location of the PTO, power intake shaft and cardan shaft
of the machine as well as possibility of the installation of the system for automated monitor-
ing of the process and installation of the monitoring board from the complete set of the ma-
chine in the cab.
Check the availability of the necessary equipment for aggregation in the standard equip-
ment of the tractor: required type of traction hitch mechanism, pneumatic head, electric
socket, required type of the PTO shank, wheel tyres of the required standard size for twin-
ning, front or rear mounted attachment, reverse control station, spacers for twinning the
wheels, availability of the hitching hoses and quick-connection cut-off clutches. The missing
equipment of the tractor shall be acquired additionally. After checking the availability of the
necessary working equipment and installation of the necessary additional equipment of the
tractor, perform the completing and preparation of the MTA with the account of the recom-
mendations of the operating documentation for the technical means to be aggregated.

135
When purchasing the new machines to be used together with the tractor, it is necessary
to specify the presence of the necessary working equipment providing for the possibility of
aggregating with the BELARUS tractor of your model.
For the machines located behind the tractor and driven from the PTO, it is necessary to
order the cardan shaft of the necessary length and type, with the respective coupling dimen-
sions. The machines driven from the PTO can be equipped with a reduction gear providing
for rotation of the cardan shaft both clockwise and counter-clockwise. When purchasing the
machine, it is necessary therefore to specify whether it is required to equip the machine with
a reduction gear to be driven through the cardan shaft with the direction of rotation of the
power intake shaft counter-clockwise, if looked from the side of drive of the machine towards
the end face of the cardan shaft yoke.

Stage III
Checking the correspondence of the vertical static load on the traction hitch mech-
anism or carrying capacity of the mounted attachment to the load created by the ma-
chine with the account of the weight of the adjusting load.
Make sure in the possibility of lifting and lowering of the attached machine with the total
operating weight by the mounted attachment. Keep in mind that the load created by the ma-
chine shall not exceed the recommended values of the carrying capacity of the mounted at-
tachment and allowable vertical load on the traction hitch mechanism.

Stage IV
Checking the vertical static loads on the axles of the tractor including the steerabil-
ity criteria and necessity of additional ballasting.
Determine the total weight of the tractor with the machine, load on the axles and maxi-
mum allowable load on the tyres, weight of the necessary ballast and adjusting load by the
calculation or experimental method. The weight of the tractor within the MTA distributed be-
tween the tractors axles shall not exceed the permitted values. In any case. the load on the
front and rear axles shall not exceed the total load-carrying capacity of the tyres according
to the total load-carrying capacity of the rear or front wheels.

Stage V
Checking the possibility of motion of the tractor aggregated with the machine in-
cluding checking the turn angles and maximum height of lifting of the mounted at-
tachment until it rests against the tractor members, sufficiency of the length and free
space of the cardan shaft when performing turns and transferring the machine to the
transport position.

Stage VI
Assessment of the correspondence of the power capabilities of the tractor and
power required by the machine (draught resistance and power consumption includ-
ing that through the PTO). The assessment may be performed by the calculation tee
given the initial data or based on the test report.

Stage VII
Checking the possibility of performing the work by the machine aggregated with
the tractor.
a. Trial aggregation for performing the jobs in accordance with the purpose of the ma-
chine and with obligatory observance of the safety requirements.

136

b. Checking the fitting of the tractor within the row-spacing of the crops to be cultivated
with determining:
the correspondence of track and tyre profile width;
agrotechnical clearance;
protective zones to the tyres.

Stage VIII
Checking the total cross-country ability, static stability on slopes and efficiency of
brakes under local conditions:
a. possibility of overcoming the ups and downs by the tractor with the machine loaded
with process material;
b. possibility of motion along the slope.
Assess the clearance value and steerability of the tractor aggregated. During the motion, the
front wheels of the tractor shall not be taken off the road surface. The front axle of the tractor
shall perceive at least 20% of the load (steerability criterion s 0.2) from its own operating
weight in any case of its use.

Stage IX
Carrying out the control shifts for the purpose of determining the operating charac-
teristics:
a. time and labour intensity of forming the MTA;
b. average operating speed;
c. productivity per 1 hour of basic (shift, operating time);
d. volume of the work performed for the reference time;
e. hourly (specific) fuel consumption.

Checking the correctness of forming the machine-tractor aggregate

The operation of the tractor with the aggregated machines being either overloaded or un-
derloaded shall not be allowed. In the first case, there will be increased wear of the parts of
the tractor, excessive fuel consumption and decrease of the productivity of the aggregate
while in the second case there will decrease of the economic characteristics and, particular-
ly, productivity and increase of the fuel consumption.
Therefore, the tractor driver shall first of all make sure that the MTA has been formed cor-
rectly and its recommended speed in the most favourable.
In the tractor operation there are two main speed modes: operating motion speed and
near-transport speed (in idling when performing the turns and motion to another place) with
the tools disengaged. The main of these modes is the operating speed, the variation of
which affects the quality of performing the job in accordance with the agrotechnical require-
ments. The operating manuals for individual machines contain the allowable operating
speed ranges. Any variation of the working motion speed of the tractor with the aggregated
machine including the operating manoeuvring during the operating motion is only allowable
within the limits to be determined by the agrotechnical requirements. The initial operating
speed is set usually within these limits together with the machine grasp width. The speed
mode of the tractor with the machine in the near-transport mode is generally limited by the
safety requirements. Due to relatively short duration of the turns and necessity of following
the guidelines for limitation the transport speed when moving from one field to another, the
respective tractor speed in the mode is often close to the operating one.

137
If the machine to be aggregated has been selected, it is only necessary to determine the
operating speed and respective gear.
The operating speed of the tractors during the operation under field conditions is limited
first of all by the quality of the work to be performed. Besides, for traction machines it is lim-
ited by the tractive and hitching capabilities of the tractor and for traction and driven aggre-
gates by the allowable power of the PTO and hydraulic takeoff as well as by the through-
put capacities of the machine tools.
Checking the correctness of formation of the aggregate according to the rotational
speed of the engine crankshaft. In practice, the operating motion speed of the tractor is
selected based on the tachospeedometer readings. While knowing the range of agroteche-
nically allowable speeds, the tractor gear (motion speed), in which the tractor shall enter this
range is determined.
The normal load on the tractor should be considered such a load, at which the readings
of the crankshaft rotational speed on the tachospeedometer would be lower (by not more
than 6%) than the rated value specified in the manufacturers documentation. Drop of the
rotational speed by the value exceeding 6% indicates the engine overloading. The increase
of the rotational speed above the rated one indicates the engine underloading.
The main condition of the optimal aggregation of the BELARUS tractor is proper use of
the engine power which is characterized by the load factor expressing the degree of use of
the tractors rated power for performing the jobs by the aggregated agricultural machines.
For each group of agricultural operations exist objectively the approximate values of the de-
gree of use of the engines rated power.
The correctly selected operating mode of the tractor is understood as such aggregation of
the tractor with observing all the operating rules and limitations, which ensure not only per-
formance of the work in accordance with the agrotechnical requirements for the working op-
eration to be performed, such as engine loading mode, speed mode of the aggregate, al-
lowable skidding mode as well as compliance with all the recommendations for safe use of
the tractor (speed selection, loading modes).
The engine loading degree can be varied by increasing or reducing the number of ma-
chines, varying the grasp width, operating depth as well as motion speed in the process of
the operating motion of the aggregate. If the efficient loading of the engine by varying the
number of machines and operating speed is impossible, the respective partial operating
mode should be chosen by reducing the fuel feed.
The engine loading degree is determined from the crankshaft rotational speed. It is nec-
essary to work at the crankshaft rotational speed exceeding slightly the rated value (indicat-
ed on the tachospeedometer). If the operating speed is below the required value, a lower
gear shall be put in.
Allowable skidding mode. One of the main special requirements consists in observance
of the allowable skidding limits: 16% for wheeled tractors with two driving axles and up to
18% for wheeled tractors with one driving axle. The MTA shall be completed and the speed
mode shall be selected within the limits of allowable skidding. Excessive skidding of the trac-
tor propulsion devices causes the destruction of structural particles of the soil with subse-
quent development of the wind and water erosion.

4. Using the rear mounted attachment and hydraulic system


138
The rear mounted attachment of the standard size -2 is manufactured according to
State Standard 10677 (corresponds to category 2 according to ISO 730/1). The main
parameters of the rear mounted attachment specified in the technical data are given for fit-
ting the tractor with the standard size of the basic tyres with the standard static radii speci-
fied by the tyre manufacturer.
The rear mounted attachment consists of three rods (one upper and two lower ones) the
front ends of which are coupled by means of joints with the tractor and the rear ends of
which are coupled with the free joints for connecting with the link pins of the aggregated ma-
chines. It is intended for coupling the rear-mounted machines to the tractor, transmission of
tractive force during the operation and adjustment of their position during the operation or
motion in the transport state.
The mounted attachment provides the aggregation of the following types of the machines
and implements:
- mounted ones using the three-point mounting (upper and lover rods);
- semi-mounted (lower rods);
- semi-trailed using the crossbar on the mounting axle (lower rods).
The external limit rods with adjustable length serve for preventing the attached machines
from swinging.
The following adjustments of the rear mounted attachment in the vertical and horizontal
planes by means of the upper rod, braces and limit rods are provided for ensuring the re-
quired position of the machine:
A. Altering the length of the upper rod
- equal penetration (equalizing the depth of travel of the tools located one after another in
the direction of the tractor motion); if the frame of the mounted plough is tilted forward as
seen in the direction of the tractor motion and the front plough body ploughs deeper than the
rear one does, elongate the upper rod and shorten the same, if the front body ploughs with
less deeply than the rear one does.
B. Altering the brace length.
- position of the machine in the horizontal plane;
- uniform operating depth provided by the tools of the mounted machine over the grasp
width;

Important: The length of the left brace of the mounted attachment is 475 mm and not to
be altered without special necessity, usually the length of the right brace is to be adjusted.
When using the crossbar on the mounting axle and operating one-way ploughs, the length
of the braces shall be equal.

D. Altering the length of both braces and upper rod for the transport position of the
machine.
- clearance: at least 300 mm;
- sufficient safe distance between the members of the tractor and those of the machine
excluding the contact of the machine members with the tractor (the clearance shall be at
least 100 mm).
. Altering the length of both braces
- when transporting the machine (with the top position of the mounted attachment), the
limit rods shall be shortened to the maximum extent within the existing adjustment for limit-
ing the swinging of the machine during the motion to avoid the damage of the tractor mem-
bers in possible emergencies;

139
- when operating the mounted and semi-mounted soil cultivating machines with passive
tools intended for overall tillage (share and chisel ploughs, stubble-breaking ploughs, deep
tillers and other machines), it is necessary to ensure the free motion (swinging) of the lower
rod in the horizontal plane to the distance of 125 mm to each side from the longitudinal
plane of the tractor unblocking the limit rods; no limitation of the grasp width by means of the
rods is allowed;
- when operating agricultural machines (except for ploughs, deep tillers and other similar
machines for overall tillage of the soil with passive tools), ensure a partial blocking to limit
the swinging of the lower rods in the horizontal plane to not more than 20 mm.

Attention!

Failure to follow the recommendations for adjusting the limit rods and braces can
cause the rupture of the rods and support brackets or other breakages.

. Adjusting the brace
During the operation, the braces are connected usually with the lower rods through the
holes in the brace forks.
To improve the transversal contour following (cultivators, sowing machines, etc.) and re-
ducing the loads on the mounted attachment during the operation with the wide-coverage
machines, it is necessary to ensure the free movement of one lower rod in the vertical plane
relatively to another rod. To do this, it is necessary to adjust the braces in such a way that a
free movement of one lower rod in the vertical plane relatively to another rod would be
achieved. Such adjustment is ensured by connecting the braces through the slots.
The rear mounting attachment is controlled by moving the respective hydraulic distributor
control levers from the cab as well as by the external pushbutton panel which provide the
positioning of the lower rods of the rear mounted attachment to the necessary height. The
method of adjustment of the position of the rear mounted attachment is selected by the trac-
tor driver in the manual mode by turning the handle for selecting the adjustment method on
the control board of the rear mounted attachment.

Attention!
The necessary peculiarities and method of adjustment of position of the machines
aggregated by means of mounted attachments in accordance with the peculiarities of
performing the job and agrotechnical requirements are given in the operation docu-
mentation for the machines. If such data are unavailable, obtain obligatorily the nec-
essary information from the manufacturer or seller of the machine.

The universal hydraulic system for controlling and adjusting the mounted attachments of
the tractor provides additionally the following functional capabilities for the rear mounted at-
tachment:
- correction of the speed of lifting and lowering the lower rods;
- restriction of the height of lifting the lower rods;
- selection of the necessary method of adjustment of position of the lower rods;

140

- correction of the operating depth;
- possibility of operation with the machines provided with height-related method of ad-
justment of the height of travel of the tools (the depth is adjusted by the carrier wheel of the
machine).

The hydraulic system provides the following methods of adjustment of the position of the
mounted and semi-mounted machines and their tools:
a) having no carrier wheels:
Power: the depth is adjusted in accordance with the draught resistance of the machine;
Position: the machine is held in the specified position relatively to the tractor body;
Combined: the power and position methods in any relationship;
b) provided with carrier wheels:
Combined: the power and position methods in any relationship.

The hydraulic system for controlling the mounted attachments ensures the possibility of
additional oil takeoff for providing the operation of the aggregated machines.

The tractor is provided with free hydraulic outlets for servicing the aggregated technical
means by means of he applied high-pressure hoses.
The oil consumption is 35...45 l/min (depending on the technical state of the hydraulic
pump). The oil takeoff by the hydraulic cylinders of the aggregated machine shall not exceed
16 l. The level in the hydraulic oil tank should be checked with the plugs of the working cyl-
inders retracted.
The shutting off and rupture members included in the spare parts and accessories kit of the
tractor (optionally) are provided for preventing the losses of oil when aggregating the tech-
nical means or unforeseen disconnection. The hydrostatic power intake is possible through
one of the outlets for supplying the special-purpose hydraulic motors. To avoid the overheat-
ing of the hydraulic system, the work pressure shall not exceed 11 MPa (110 kgf/cm
2
) that
corresponds to the power of 11 kW, not more. A separate pipeline (optional) is provided for
draining oil from the hydraulic motor with bypassing the distributor.
The tractor is equipped with fittings having the conditional flow passage Dc = 12 mm and
connection thread 201.5. In case of necessity of connection of the aggregated machines
with different thread, the required adaptors with the conventional flow passage of at least Dc
= 12 mm should be manufactured.

ATTENTION! The oil in the working cylinders of the aggregated machine shall be clean
and correspond to the brand used in the tractor. Failure to fulfil these requirements can
cause failure of the hydraulic units of the tractor.

The adaptation and modification of the structural elements of the hydraulic system
of the tractor except for those permitted by this Operating Manual is only allowed af-
ter consultation with the manufacturer.

5. Using the traction hitching mechanisms

The tractor can be equipped with traction hitch mechanisms of various types providing
the aggregation of trailed and semi-trailed machines, the coupling arrangements of which
meet the following requirements:

141
compatibility of the coupling dimensions;
the machines are provided with fixed drawbars;
the trailer hitches are equipped with a device facilitating the coupling of the trailer
with/uncoupling of it from the traction hitch device of the tractor;
the hitches of the semi-trailers are fitted with adjustable support.

The tractor is equipped with a rear lifting device in the form of vertical guiding plates. The
device is intended for fastening the traction hitching mechanisms -2 and -3 of the
design provided by the manufacturer.
It makes it possible to reposition the connection link of the traction hitch device to the
height and facilitated the dismantling.
The traction hitch mechanism -1 (the crossbar is on the mounting axle of the mount-
ed attachment -2) is only intended for aggregating with semi-mounted and semi-trailed
machines for performing the jobs at the speed of 15 km/h. The crossbar has a number of
holes for connecting. The normally aggregated machine is coupled through the middle hole
of the crossbar.
In case of necessity of matching the track of the tractor with the aggregated machine
(mainly harvesting) with insignificant draught resistance, an asymmetric connection is al-
lowed. The crossbar shall be acquired to the consumers order.

6. PTO and drive of the machines

The design and location of the rear power takeout (PTO) of the tractor complies with the
international standards. Therefore, in case of correct location of the machines power intake
shaft (PIS) relatively to its coupling link, the cardan shafts of the standard design can be
used.
The tractor is provided with the PTO shank 3 and PTO shank 4 (included in the spare
parts and accessories kit) for driving machines from the complete set of tractors of the K-
700 type or from the complete set of tractors belonging to the drawbar category 3 in the
mode of 1000.0 rpm. There is an economical PTO mode making it possible to ensure the
shank rotational speed of 1000 rpm in the partial operating mode at the rotational speed of
the engine of 1435.0 rpm.

The parameters of the PTO shanks are given in Table 6; the characteristic of the PTO
drive is given in Tables 2 and 3.

Attention!
1. For providing the protection of the PTO drive, it is expedient to equip the machine
with a protective coupling.
2. To avoid the overloads of the PTO drive when aggregating with the inertial machines
(fodder harvesters, etc.), it is necessary to use the cardan shaft with the overrunning clutch
on the PIS side.
3. The working torque on the cardan shaft shall not exceed the allowable torque on the
PTO.

The rear PTO of the tractor is provided with the shank of the type 1/1/2.

142

Fig. 2

Table 3
PTO Shank type
Rotational speed, rpm
Transmitted power, kW
(h.p.)
of the PTO of the engine
Rear separate
PTO
PTO 1
PTO 1
PTO 2
540
540
1000
2081
2081
2081 58.8 (80)

Rear synchronous
1
1
PTO 2
3.4 revolutions/1 m of travel
7. Installation of the cardan shaft

Installation of the cardan shaft
with the protective cover fitted
with a protective apron of the
PTO ensures the safety of the
coupling (a).

The end yokes shall be in the
same plane (b)

Table 4 (c)
PTO
Angle of tilting of the
cardan joints (de-
grees, not more than)
Universal Of equal
angle
speeds
Engaged
22.0
25.0
(50 for
short

Characteristics of the PTO drive Table 2
Characteristic
Designa-
tion
PTO 1 PTO 1 PTO 2
Spline length, mm L 76 78 64
Outer diameter, mm DH 35 38 35
Number of splines n 6 8 21

143
term)
Disen-
gaged
55.0 55.0

Overlapping the telescopic el-
ements of the cardan shaft shall
be at least 110200 mm to
avoid the disconnection and
jamming of the coupling (d).


144

8. Determining the weight of the tractor, machine and ballast, loads on the traction
hitch mechanism and mounted attachment, tyres and axles of the tractor and steera-
bility criterion

The tractor and its structural members including also tyres are designed for trouble-free
operation in a certain range of vertical loads and speeds specified in the Operation Manual
for the tractor. In case of failure to follow the recommendations concerning the loading and
speed modes of the tractor and tyres, the manufacturer does not guarantee its trouble-free
operation and warns about inadmissibility of such operation. Each pneumatic tyre is de-
signed for operation within a certain range of vertical loads. The width of this range is de-
termined by the size and design features of the tyres.

The most accurate and reliable method of determining the weight and loads con-
sists in weighing on the balance for motor transport means.

Attention!
The load on the mounted attachment, traction hitch mechanism, axles, tyres and body of the
tractor from the weight of the aggregated machines shall not exceed the maximum allowable
values specified by the manufacturer. Here the load on the front axle of the tractor in every
case of its use shall be always at least 20% of the own operating weight of the tractor with-
out ballast weights and water solutions in the tyres.

The practical determination of the weight of the tractor and machines and vertical loads
on the axles of the tractor is performed usually on any suitable balance having an appropri-
ate capacity and intended for heavy-load motor transport means. Weighing on the balance
makes it possible to determine also the real load on the coupling arrangements of the
trailed, semi-trailed and semi-mounted machines.
The value of vertical loads on the coupling arrangements of the trailed, semi-trailed and
semi-mounted machines can be determined by means of a special dynamometer. It is not
recommended to use a dynamometer for determining the load on the front and rear
axle due to large weight of the tractor.

Important: To determine the load on a certain axle of the tractor by means of a balance,
the tractor shall be placed so that the wheels of the axle to be measured would be on the
balance platform and the wheels of another axle outside the weighting zone at the same
level with the platform. We recommend measuring the load on a separate axle of the tractor
within a MTA using the following technique:
Standard equipment A: Tractor with a rear-mounted machine or mountable ballast
weights; the front mounted attachment is not used.
the front axle (with the rear mounted attachment lowered) is weighed;
the rear axle (with the rear mounted attachment lifted) is weighed.
Standard equipment B: Tractor with a front-mounted machine or mounted ballast weights;
the rear mounted attachment is not used.
the front axle (with the front mounted attachment lifted) is weighed;
the rear axle (with the front mounted attachment lowered) is weighed.
Standard equipment C: Tractor with the front and rear machines and mounted ballast
weights.
the front axle (with the rear and front mounted attachments lifted) is weighed;
the rear axle (with the rear and front mounted attachments lifted) is weighed.


145

The value of the load on the coupling arrangement of the machine can be determined us-
ing the following two methods:
1. On a balance.
The machine is placed on the balance in such a way that there would be only coupling ar-
rangement of the machine on the balance with the support of the hitching loop (as regards
the trailed and semi-trailed machines) or mounting axle (as regards the semi-mounted ma-
chines) resting upon the platform through a stand with the weight of less than 50 kg and
height of 300500 mm, while the remaining (major) portion of the machine would be out-
side the weighing zone. The load on the coupling arrangement of the machine can be only
determined on a platform balance provided the length of the coupling arrangement is suffi-
cient to place the machine outside the weighing zone.
2. By means of a dynamometer.
The load on the coupling arrangement of the machine can be determined by weighing the
coupling arrangement on a beam crane through a dynamometer.

Allowable loads on the axles of the tractor:

Axle Range of the loads, min....max, kN
Front Tf=8...35
Rear Tr=16...50

but not more than the total load-carrying capacity of single tyres of rear or front wheels.

In case of twinning the wheels with the tyres of the same or different standard sizes, their
total load-carrying capacity shall be reduced by 20%.

In case of setting the wheel track exceeding 1800 mm, the loads on the axles shall be re-
duced by 5% per each 100 mm of increase of the track.

In every case, the total load on the tractor wheels shall not exceed f+r 70 kN. (7000 kgf)

The soil compaction depends considerably on the number of passages of the MTA on the
track. Therefore, it becomes expedient to reduce the number of passages at the cost of
combining the operations by means of combined aggregates.

Twinning the wheels makes it possible to reduce considerably the specific pressure on the
soil and preserve the soil structure, especially, on moistened fields.

Twinning the wheels on dense soils makes it possible to improve the tractive and hitching
capabilities of the power source, especially in combination with correct ballasting or loading
of the tractor.

The steerability criterion Ks is determined from the formula:
Ks= (mfg) / g 0.2,
where g=9.8 m/s; mf is a value of a portion of the operating weight of the tractor within the
MTA perceived by the front axle of the tractor, kg; MT is the standard operating weight of the
tractor, kg.

146

9. SELECTING THE MOTION SPEED

The speed of motion of the tractors on public roads can be limited by the technical possi-
bilities of the tractor and aggregated machine in accordance with the sign provided on the
technical mean, characteristics of the machines (method of aggregation, overall dimensions,
operating weight and absence of the braking system) as well as motion conditions.
Table 5
Work to be performed by
the tractor
Aggregation peculiarities
Motion speed,
km/h, not more
than
Remarks
1. Towing the trailers
and semitrailers
The tractor is only ballast-
ed with standard basic or
additional front and wheel
weight manufactured by
the Minsk Tractor Works
Republican Unitary Enter-
prise

Selection of the trac-
tion hitch mechanisms
for the aggregation is
determined by the
coupling dimensions
and allowable static
vertical load on the
hitch mechanism of
the tractor
a) on public roads 30.0
b) under field conditions
and on roads without
category
20.0
2. Transfer of the agri-
cultural machines to the
place of operation and
movement within ma-
chine-tractor aggregates
from one field to another

a) by means of the trac-
-1, -2 and
-3
The machine is equipped
with the service brake sys-
tem
30.0
The machine weight is
not more than 6000 kg
20.0
over 6000 kg
The machine is not
equipped with the service
brake system
20.0
15.0
over 6000 kg
b) by means of the trac-
-1, -1-01

15.0

c) by means of the -2
20.0
The weight of the trac-
tor within the MTA is
15.0
The weight of the trac-
tor within the MTA is
over 5500 kg
d) twinned rear wheels
of the tractor

20.0

e) twinned front wheels
of the tractor
15.0

f) Solution in the tyres of
the tractors wheels

- front 10.0

147
- rear 15.0
3. Motion on slopes and
sharp turns; overcoming
obstacles

10.0

4. Performing the agri-
cultural-purpose jobs

1.9415.6
When selecting the
working motion speed,
it is necessary to fol-
low the agrotechnical
requirements for per-
forming the job by the
machine with the ac-
count of the working
conditions, allowable
tractor speed range
and recommendations
of the manufacturer of
the tractor and the
machine.

10. Safety of aggregation of the tractor

To ensure the trouble-free operation of the tractor and aggregated machines as well as to
exclude accidents and emergencies, we recommend you to read carefully this Operating
Manual for the tractor and follow strictly the recommendations contained herein at any time.
Observe strictly all the safety recommendations and accident prevention regulations.
Failure to observe the accident prevention regulations can cause the threat for the life
and material damage due to breakdown of the tractor or aggregated machine and loss of all
the rights for the compensation for damages including that according to the warranties. Do
not risk your health or life due to failure to observe the accident prevention regulations. The
worker shall not be allowed to operate the tractor including aggregating the machines with it
or perform its maintenance unless he/she has red and understood ALL the guidelines con-
cerning the operation of the tractor and accident prevention regulations.

Attention!
The operating documentation (concerning both the tractor and the aggregated machine)
shall be stored obligatorily in the cab so that it could be used in case of arising of any ques-
tions during the work. If the Operating Manual for the machine or tractor is lost, acquire a
new one without delay.

Below are stated the accident prevention guidelines, which shall be observed rigorously
when aggregating the tractor with various machines, but are often unconsciously ignored by
you during the everyday use of the tractor and machines.

148

10.1. MOTION ON PUBLIC ROADS AND TRANSPORTATION WORKS

Actually for the half of the time of its operation, the tractor is used for transporting pur-
pose with driving to public roads. Therefore, the transport MTAs are subject to exclusive
safety standards. The vehicles such as tractor trailers or semitrailers shall be equipped with
service and parking brakes and safety chains (ropes).
The load-carrying capacity of the vehicles (trailers, semitrailers, fertilizer distributors and
spraying machines) depends on the relief of the locality, slope and condition of the roads.
With the account of the allowable longitudinal slope of 12 degrees, the total weight of the
semitrailer (trailer) equipped with brakes shall not exceed 9000 kg and that on relatively flat
area (with the slope of less than 4%) with dry hard road pavement not more than 12000
kg.
The tractors track value shall correspond to the conditions of the works to be performed,
technical characteristics of the tractor and ensure the safe use of the tractor within machine-
tractor aggregates. When driving the tractor on the slopes and sharp turns increase the trac-
tors track for increasing the stability.
The service brake actuator is made as a single-wire scheme which is controlled from the
workplace of the tractor operator. The parking brake actuator shall be located on the ma-
chine.
Aggregation of the general-purpose vehicles (trailers and semitrailers) shall be made
through the traction hitch mechanisms -2 or -. For the safety reasons, the coupling
with the traction hitch mechanisms -1 and -1 is strictly forbidden.
On rear left part of the machines such as trailers or semitrailers there shall be a sign of
limitation of the maximum speed of the MTA. The hole with the diameter of 24 mm in the
both cheeks of the lifting device serve as a place of attaching the safety chains (ropes) on
the tractor (the fasteners are included in the standard equipment of the technical mean to be
aggregated).
The tractor aggregation with the train (tractor + semi-trailer + trailer) is only allowed on dry
roads with hard pavement and slopes not exceeding 4%. When driving to the public roads,
the overall dimensions of the MTA shall not exceed: width 2.6 m and height 3.2 m.
In case of deviations from the provided norms, the consultation with the state authorities
responsible for the traffic safety is required.
IMPORTANT! When performing the transportation works on the roads with hard pave-
ments, increase the pressure in the tyres to the maximum value allowed by the manufac-
turer.
To connect the signaling equipment of the facilities to be aggregated, the tractor is pro-
vided with a receptacle with the socket for supplying the instruments of the aggregated
machine.
When driving the tractor on the public roads follow the following requirements:
1) The forward motion shall be only performed with the flashlight beacon switched on;
2) The reverse motion on the public roads is not allowed, because the light signalling de-
vices are only oriented to the forward motion;

149

3) Using the working lights is not allowed because it causes the dazzling of other traffic
participants;
4) The motion of the tractor aggregated with agricultural machines with the vessels filled
(process material fertilizers, seeds, etc.) on public roads is prohibited.

10.2. On the intended use of the tractor and machines within the MTA
The tractor and machines either separately or within the MTA should be only used in
accordance with their purpose as specified in the operating documentation for them, under
the conditions and in the modes specified by the manufacturer. Using the technical means
including of the tractor for any other purposes is considered to be unintended use. The
manufacturer shall bear no responsibility for damages caused due to such use of the aggre-
gate. In this case, the total responsibility shall be born by the user.
The concept of intended use includes also meeting the conditions of the operation,
maintenance and care specified by the manufacturer. The use, maintenance and care of the
tractor and machines shall be carried out by the personnel appointed for this purpose and
informed duly bout the potential hazard.
Observe the existing accident prevention prescriptions, such as commonly known
safety regulations, medical recommendations for labour protection and road regulations.
Any unauthorized modification of the construction of the aggregate releases the man-
ufacturer from the responsibility for the damages caused by such modification. It is equally
applied to the cases where faulty units have been improperly dismantled or repaired, the
tractors or machines without full standard equipment or equipped otherwise than it is provid-
ed by the technical specifications have been used as well as where the original manufactur-
ers parts and assemblies have been replaces by other special or unoriginal ones not pro-
vided for by the manufacturer or where the seals are broken.

10.3. General guidelines for observing the aggregation safety precautions
Prior to beginning the work, check every time the tractor within the MTA for the mo-
tion and operation safety.
Follow all the existing prescriptions concerning the safety precautions and accident
prevention as specified in the instructions for labour protection.
The plates attached to the machines aggregated contain the warnings and important
guidelines for safe operation.
Observe the traffic regulations.
Prior to beginning the work, become familiar with all the parts and assemblies of the
aggregated machine, control elements and functions to be performed. It would be too late to
do this during the work!
The clothes of the persons working on the tractor shall be tight-fitting. Wearing free
clothes is not allowed!
To prevent a fire, keep the tractor and machines clean!
Prior to starting the tractor and beginning of its operation, make sure that nobody is
present near the tractor and machines. Take care of good vision from all the sides. Pay spe-
cial attention to children.
The machines shall be coupled with the tractor in strict compliance with the operation
manuals. When doing this, use only recommended methods and equipment for aggregating.
Be especially careful when connecting the machines to and disconnecting them from
the tractor. When connecting or disconnecting the technical means, make sure that the used
supporting facilities are positioned properly (assess the stability!).
Mount the ballast weights and counterweights only in the fastening points provided for

150
this purpose in accordance with the recommendations.
Observe the allowable values of the vertical static loads on the axles, tyres, total op-
erating weight and dimensions in the transport position!
Check the condition of the transport equipment of the machines (lighting set, warning
and safety devises). Mount this equipment on the machine!
The disconnecting ropes for the rapid-action coupling shall hang freely and shall not
become disconnected simultaneously in the bottom position.
During the motion, it is forbidden to leave the cab of the tractor!
The machines coupled with the tractor as well as ballast weights affect the transport
characteristics, steerability and braking capability. Keep it in mind when driving and braking
the tractor, especially within the MTA. Observe the distance! Take into account the possibil-
ity of skid, overhang and inertial mass of the aggregated machines in the turn!
The tractor with the machines shall be only driven provided all the safety facilities of
the machines are installed and brought to the appropriate working position!
It is strictly prohibited to be in the working zones of the machines! It is prohibited to be
in the zones of turning or revolution of the machines, their tools and other elements!
The hydraulically folding frames of the machines shall be only actuated when there
are no people in the turn or lifting zone!
The remotely controlled elements of the machines (for example, having hydraulic
control) can cause injuries (squeezing and cuts)! During the movement of the aggregate at
high speed, the driven tools cause danger due to possibility of their extension under the ac-
tion of their inertial mass! Wait until the tools are completely stopped!
Prior to leaving the cab of the tractor, lower all the machine elements to the ground,
stop the engine and remove the ignition key!
It is strictly prohibited to stand in the zone between the tractor and the machine, un-
less the transportation mean is secured against accidental rolling down by means of a park-
ing brake and/or chock and the engine is stopped!
The folding frame and bucket of the loader shall be secured in the transport position!
Prior to starting the transportation on public roads, the swinging lever of the additional
equipment of the machines, for example, packing wheel shall be turned inwards and fixed!
The markers shall be also fixed in the transport position!
The loading platform on the machine aggregated shall be only used for filling the ma-
chine with planting material and fertilizers! It is strictly prohibited to stand on the platform
during the work!

When driving the tractor on slopes and sharp turns, the track should be increased for im-
proving the stability.

10.4. Mounted and semi-mounted machines

151

Prior to aggregating the machines by means of the three-point mounted attachment
as well as prior to disconnecting the machines from the three-point mounted attachment, the
control of the above attachment should be set to the position excluding the unintended lifting
or lowering of the aggregate!
When connecting the machine to the joints of the three-point mounted attachment,
ensure the matching of sizes of the respective connecting members (category or type: trac-
tor + aggregate)!
The stay in the zone of the three-point mounted attachment is dangerous due to
probability of serious injuries such as squeezing and cuts! When exercising the remote con-
trol during the mounting of the machine on the three-point mounted attachment, it is strictly
prohibited to stand in the zone between the tractor and the aggregate!
Ensure the reliable side fixation of the lower rods of the three-point mounted attach-
ment of the tractor by means of rod, if the aggregate is in the transport position! When driv-
ing the tractor on public roads with the machine in the transport position or lifted aggregate,
secure the three-point mounted attachment in the top position to prevent the aggregate from
spontaneous lowering and ensure the sufficient clearance between the machine members
and road (at least 300 mm)!

10.5. Trailed and semi-trailed machines
Take measures excluding the involuntary rollback and movement of the machines fit-
ted with the transport wheels!
When connecting the trailed or semi-trailed machine to the tractor, ensure the match-
ing of the sizes of the respective coupling members of the tractor and the machines!
Observe the maximum allowable vertical static load on the traction hitch mechanisms
of the tractor!
When using the single-point hitch of the agricultural machines by means of the hitch-
ing loop (hitch bar or tongue), ensure the necessary mobility at the connection point and ex-
clude the possibility of jamming!
The single-point coupling arrangement (hitch bar or tongue) of the machine shall
have a support and safety connecting chain or rope.
The coupling arrangement of trailed and semi-trailed machines shall be stiff to ex-
clude the collision of such machines with the tractor.

10.6 For the machines driven from the PTO
Only use the cardan shafts, which are recommended by the manufacturer of the ma-
chine! Inspect regularly the technical condition of the cardan shaft.
The cardan shaft shall have an appropriate protective cover! The cover of the cardan
shaft shall be secured against turning by means of a chain!
Prior to connecting or disconnecting the cardan shaft, disengage the power takeoff,
stop the engine and remove the ignition key!
Control at all times the correctness and safety of installation of the cardan shaft!
Prior to engaging the power takeoff, make sure that the selected rotational speed of
the tractors power takeoff does not contradict the allowable rotational speed of the aggre-
gate!
When using the synchronous power takeoff, make sure that the rotational speed de-
pends on the motion speed and the rotation direction changes of opposite when reversing!
Prior to engaging the power takeoff, make sure that no people are present in the
dangerous zone of the aggregate!
Never engage the power takeoff when the engine is stopped!
When working with the power takeoff, make sure that there are no people in the zone

152
of rotation of the power takeoff and cardan shaft!
Disengage at all times the power takeoff when beginning driving on a step slope as
well as in cases where its operation is unnecessary!
After disengaging the power takeoff, the hazard due to the inertial mass remains for
some time. Do not approach the connected machine during this time! Performing any works
is only allowed after complete stop! Stop obligatorily the engine and remove the ignition key!
Cleaning, lubricating or adjusting the aggregate driven from the PTO or cardan shaft
shall be only performed provided that the power takeoff is disengaged, the engine is
stopped and the ignition key is removed!
The disconnected cardan shaft shall be secured on the respective bracket!
After removing the cardan shaft, fit the protective cover to the end of the power take-
off!
Inspect visually the cardan shaft, power takeoff and power intake shaft. Eliminate
immediately the faults revealed!

10.7. Rules concerning the pressurized instruments and mechanisms of the machines
and tractor
Caution! Do not forget about the presence of high pressure in the hydraulic and
pneumatic systems of the tractor and machines aggregated!
When connecting the hydraulic cylinders and hydraulic motor from the complete set
of the machine, check the correctness of connection of the hydraulic hoses!
Prior to beginning connecting the hydraulic hoses to the hydraulic system of the trac-
tor, make sure that the hydraulic circuits of the tractor and aggregate are depressurized!
When performing the hydraulic connection between the tractor and the machine, it is
necessary to mark beforehand the components to be connected in order to avoid errors in
the control of the units of the hydraulic system of the aggregated machine! Erroneous con-
nection of the reverse function (for example, lifting or lowering) can cause an accident!
When connecting the hydraulic hoses of the machine to the tractors hydraulic system,
make sure that the system is depressurized; observe the correctness of the connections be-
tween the hydraulic system of the tractor and the hydraulic system of the aggregate in accord-
ance with marking the hoses and connecting diagram. The connecting diagram shall be given
in the Operation Manual for the machine.
Check regularly the condition of the hydraulic hoses. Should any damages or ageing
signs be revealed, the hoses shall be replaced without delay! The new hoses intended for
substituting the old ones shall comply completely with the manufacturers requirements!
To avoid injury when determining the leakage places, use appropriate aids! A liquid
(hydraulic oil) flowing out under pressure can penetrate under skin and cause heavy injuries!
In case of injury, call immediately for medical aid! Hazard of blood poisoning!
Prior to beginning the work with the use of the hydraulic system of the tractor, lower
the machine, depressurize the hydraulic system, stop the engine and remove the ignition
key!
Any works with the hydraulic and pneumatic connections of the hydraulic accumula-
tors and receivers of the machines shall be performed with the pressure released!
Improper installation and operation of the hydraulic accumulators with violation of the
labour protection requirements can become a cause of heavy accidents.

153

10.8. Tyres, braking system
Caution! Do not forget that the pneumatic systems of the tractor and aggregated ma-
chines contain high pressure.
Each time prior to departure check the intactness and operability of the brakes!
The brake system shall be regularly and thoroughly controlled! The braking system
shall be only adjusted and repaired by a qualified specialist or reliable service department!
Use the recommended brake fluid only! Pour the brake fluid in accordance with the operat-
ing documentation!
When operating the machines with transport wheels, it is necessary to ensure the
stable position of the machine (wheel chocks!) to prevent the involuntary rollback!
Fitting the tyres requires appropriate habits! It shall be performed by means of special
fitting tools!
The repair works on the tyres and wheels shall be only performed by a qualified spe-
cialist with the use of appropriate fitting tools!
Monitor regularly the pressure in the tyres! It shall correspond to the specified norms!

10.9. Maintenance and repair of the machine-tractor aggregates
The repair, maintenance, cleaning as well as elimination of functional faults shall be
performed on obligatory condition that the hydraulic system, driving mechanisms and engine
are stopped and the ignition key is removed!
Check regularly the degree of tightening of bolts and nuts! If necessary, retighten
them! Pay attention to the fasteners of the tractor body, wheels, coupling arrangements in-
cluding the traction hitch mechanisms and three-point mounted attachments.
Do not perform welding, brazing or mechanical works on the hydraulic accumulators.
When performing the maintenance works on the lifted machine, ensure the stable po-
sition of the machine by means of the respective supporting structures!
When replacing the tools of the machines having sharp cutting edges, it is necessary
to use appropriate tools and gloves!
The oil, grease and filters shall be disposed of appropriately!
Prior to commencement of the maintenance works and repair of the electric equip-
ment, disconnect obligatorily all the electrical instruments and devices!
When performing the electric welding on the tractor and machine, set the battery dis-
connect switch to the OFF position and disconnect the cable and bundles from the storage
batteries and alternator.
Storing the gas implies high risk of explosion!
The spare parts for the tractor and machines shall comply completely with the manu-
facturers specifications! To ensure your safety, use original spare parts!

10.10. Additional guidelines for safety of aggregation
The tractor is a high-technology product and belongs to the category of motor vehi-
cles covered by the road regulations and other normative documents regulating the opera-
tion of railless transport.
When reading the Operating Manual for the tractor, pay special attention to the rec-
ommendations for selecting the motion speed and maintaining the allowable loads on the
traction hitch mechanism, mounted attachment, ales and tyres of the tractor. The possibility
of safe motion of the tractor with satisfactory steerability and stability is evaluated by the
steerability criterion, which is characterized by the ratio of the value of the load on the
front axle of the tractor to its standard weight. The steerability criterion is determined by cal-
culation.
The aggregation of the technical means with the tractor is prohibited, if the value of

154
the vertical static loads on the axles, tyres, traction hitch mechanism and mounted attach-
ment of the tractor obtained from the results of weighing, calculations and ballasting ex-
ceeds the allowable values specified in the Operating Manual for the tractor.
To ensure the steerability, stability and stable traction, hitching and braking capabili-
ties, especially, on the areas of fields with slopes and on soft soils, we recommend providing
the load on the front wheels of the tractor within the MTA 2540% of the standard operating
weight of the tractor.
To ensure your safety and prevention of operational failures and breakdowns of the
tractor, it is necessary to perform the following actions:
- Determine the value of operating weights of the tractor, machine and process materi-
al.
- Determine the loads on the axles and tyres of the wheels of the tractor.
- Test the tractor within the MTA for compliance with the requirements for the minimum
allowable load on the front wheels of the tractor with the machines in the transport position,
allowable loads on the traction hitch mechanism, axles and tyres of the wheels, required
load-carrying capacity of the mounted attachment for lifting the machine and total maximum
load on the tractor axles.
- Ascertain the possibility of aggregation of a specific aggregate or machine from the
results of weighing.
- Select the minimum necessary weight of the ballast.
- Determine the degree of loading the machine with the process materials ensuring the
safe operation of the tractor.
- Determine the necessity of twinning the wheels and filling the tyres with water solu-
tion.
- Assign the required pressure in the tyres depending on the maximum load and speed
under specific working conditions. The value of separate loads on the front and rear axles of
the tractor within the MTA shall not exceed the total allowed load-carrying capacity of the
front and rear tyres of the tractor, respectively, at the given speed and internal pressure as
specified in the Table of load-carrying capacity of the tyres.

Adjustments BELARUS series 900

155
ADJUSTMENTS

HPS with a cylinder in steering trape-
zium
The optimal front wheel track necessary
for majority of agricultural works (1550
mm for front wheels and 1600 mm for
rear wheels) has been set at the factory.
Front wheel track can be adjusted for dif-
ferent row-spacing or installation of front-
lift by shifting retractable knuckles. Front
wheel track width 7.5-20 and 9.0-20 var-
ies from 1440 mm to 1740 mm with the
step of 100 mm, and with wheel transpo-
sition from 1500 to 1800 mm.

The operations for changing the front
wheel track
1. Brake the tractor with the parking
brake. Put the stops in front and be-
hind the rear wheels.
2. Put the jack under one side of the
front axle side. Lift the wheel until it
takes off the ground.
3. Loosen the nuts of the coupling bolts
(1), remove the pin (2) for fixing the
retractable knuckle (3), loosen the
tightening of the nuts (4) at the ends
of steering rod tube (5).
4. Detach the cylinder (8) from the
holder (7).
5. Move the retractable knuckle (3) in-
side or outside the front axle body. At
the same time, rotating the tube (5)
to vary the steering rod length by the
value corresponding to the track to
be set.
6. Insert the fixation pin (2) of the re-
tractable knuckle and tighten the bolt
nuts (1).
7. Insert and fix pin (6) of the cylinder
into the respective hole of the holder
(7) (see the table).
8. Repeat the operations on the oppo-
site side of the front axle.
9. Adjust the front wheel toe-in.
10. Tighten the nuts (4) of the steering
rod tube.

Wheel
mounting
scheme
Hole number
I II III IV
Size
105 155 205 255
Retractable knuckle position

1440 1540 1640 1740
1500 1600 1700 1800


156
Adjusting the front wheel track of the
tractors with the FDA (Belarus
920/920.2/920.3/952/952.2/952.3)

I. FDA with bevel gear speed reduc-
ers; HPS with the cylinder in the steer-
ing trapezium

The track width of the tractor with the
FDA can be adjusted (for the tyres of the
basic scope of delivery of 13.6-20) within
the range from 1430 mm to 1650 mm
and with the wheel transposition from
1770 to 1990 by extending the housings
of the wheel reduction gears (with bevel
gearings).

To adjust the track, proceed as follow:

1. Brake the tractor with the parking
hind the rear wheels.
2. Put the jack under one left side of the
front driving axle. Lift the wheel until it
takes off the ground.
3. Loosen the 4 bolts fixing the adjusting
screw cover and remove the cover (2).
4. Turn out the two nuts (1) and remove
the two wedges from the left side of
the FDA.
5. Loosen the tightening of the nuts (3)
at the ends of steering rod tube (4).
6. Remove the split pin and then the fix-
ing pin (5) from the left side of the
FDA. If the distance exceeds 70
mm, refit the fixing finger (5) (position
II).


157
7. Detach the hydraulic cylinder (2)
from the holder (1).
8. Move the wheel reducing gear hous-
ing by rotating the left adjusting
screw using a wrench to obtain the
required distance A. At the same
time, alter the steering rod length to
the value corresponding to the track
to be set by the rotating tube (4).
9. Install and fix the pin of the cylinder
(2) into the hole of the holder (1) ac-
cording to the Table above.
10. Insert and tighten the wedges and
adjusting screw cover.
11. Repeat the operations on the right
side. Set the size R=L.
12. Adjust front wheel toe-in (see rec-
ommendation below).
13. Tighten the nuts of the steering rod
tube.
14. When transposing the wheels, tight-
en the disk fixing nuts to the flanges
with the torque of 210...260 Nm.
Then make sure that wheel rotation
would coincide with the arrow on the
tyre sidewall.

Wheel
mounting
scheme
Size of
the
wheel/
tyre
D
i
s
k

o
f
f
-
s
e
t
,

m
m

Hole meter
I II III
Size
270 325 380
W9x20/
11,2-20

+80
1410 1520 1630
W12x20/
13,6-20

+70
1430 1540 1650
W9x20/
11,2-20

-90
1750 1860 1970
W12x20/
13,6-20
-80

1770 1880 1990

158
II. FDA with planetary reducing gears;
HPS with the cylinder in the steering
trapezium

Front wheel tractor track is adjusted within
the range 1420 to 1970 mm by transposi-
tion of the wheels and mutual positioning of
the wheel disks and rims.

To adjust the track, proceed as follow:
Brake the tractor with the parking
hind the rear wheels;
Lift the tractor front (or front wheels in
turn) by means of a jack while keeping
the clearance between the wheels and
the ground;
Remove the front wheels;
Turn out the nuts fixing the rim to the
disk.
Depending on the required track, set re-
spective rim and disk arrangement as
shown on the diagram.
When doing this, pay attention that wheel
rotation would coincide with the direction
of the arrow on the tyre sidewall.
When transposing the wheels, tighten
the nuts fixing the disks to the flanges
with the torque of 210260 N m and
those fixing the disks to the rims with the
torque of 180240 N m.

, , , standard fitting of the disk
with transposing the rim;
*, *, *, * transposing the disk and
rim.
The wheel position with transposing the
disk (letters with asterisks) should be
used in exclusive cases.


159
III. FDA with bevel reducing gears.
Steering booster without the cylinder
in the steering trapezium (if installed)
The front wheel track is adjusted step-
lessly by means of a screw mechanism
located on the front axle cantilevers with-
in the three intervals: 1350-1500 mm,
1500-1600 mm, 1600-1800 mm.
To obtain the required track width, set the
appropriate positional relationship of the
wheel rim relatively to the disk as shown in
the figure below.
For the wheels with permanent disk off-
set, the track is adjusted steplessly within
the range of 1400...1600 mm and
17501950 mm.
To alter the track, lift the tractor front (or
front wheels in turns) while keeping the
clearance between the wheels and the
ground; brake rear wheels, after which:
a) turn out the bolts (4) and remove the
cover (2);
b) release the cantilever wedges (3) hav-
ing unscrewed the nuts so that the
free movement of the bevel pair hous-
es would be ensured.
The movement of the reducing gear
housings in the front axle cantilevers
with the wheels and obtaining of the
required track within the specified in-
tervals is provided by rotating the ad-
justing screw (1) with a wrench. The
rotation of the adjusting screw shall be
accompanied by steering rod length
variation.

4


160
Adjusting the front wheel toe-in (trac-
tors with the HPS)

Having changed front wheel track width,
adjust the toe-in by altering steering rod
length.

1. Inflate the tyres to the required pres-
sure.
2. Drive the tractor forward on the flat
ground to the distance of at least 3 m
and stop it. Apply the parking brake.
3. Measure the distance B between two
opposite points on the rim edge, be-
hind FDA at the wheel axis height.
4. Drive the tractor forward so that the
front wheels would turn by 180 and
measure the distance A in front of
FDA between the same points as
when measuring the distance . The
toe-in is set correctly when the value
A is less than B by 0...8 mm. If toe-
in does not correspond to these val-
ues, proceed as follows:
5. Release the nuts (1) of the steering
rod adjustment tube (2).
6. Rotating the tube, set the required
toe-in value.
7. Tighten the nuts (1).

FDA with bevel reducing gears

Front axle

FDA with planetary cylindrical reducing
gears

1 2 3

161
Adjusting the rear wheel track
1. Jack-lift the tractor rear part to sepa-
rate the wheels from the ground.
2. Unscrew the wheel fastening nuts
(1) and remove the wheels.
3. Loosen the four bolts (2) of the rear
wheel hubs by 35 turns.
4. Move the hub in one or other direc-
tion to obtain the track width (use the
table given below to determine the
track width by measuring the dis-
tance A from the half-axle end to
the hub face.
5. Tighten the four hub fixing bolts with
the torque of 280-300 N m (2830
kgf m).
6. Mount the wheel and tighten the nuts
with the torque of 210-260 N m.
7. Repeat these operations on the op-
posite wheel.
NOTE: Track width of up to 1600 mm
can be obtained without changing the
wheel disk position. To obtain the
track width up to 2100 mm, transpose
the rear wheels assembled with the
hubs as shown in the figure.
Track width, mm Distance , mm
1500 50
1600 0
1800 164
1900 114
2000 64
2100 14
When transposing the rear wheels, pay
attention that wheel rotation would coin-
cide with the direction of the arrow on the
tyre sidewall.

162
Adjusting the power takeoff
shaft
External readjustment of PTO brake
bands
During operation adjust PTO brake
bands, if:
1. PTO slips.
2. When being repositioned, the PTO
control lever rests against the front
or rear part of the control panel slot.
3. When passing through the neutral
position, there is neither click nor
higher resistance.
4. The force to be applied to the control
lever (1) exceeds 150 N (15 kgf).
Procedure of the external readjust-
ment:
1. Put the arm (9) to the neutral position
(the holes in the arm (9) and in the
rear axle housing coincide), fix this
position by means of a rod 8 mm or
a bolt M 10x60.
2. Remove the PTO enclosure together
with the plate.
3. Turn out the bolt (17), take the lock
bar (16) off the butt of the supple-
mentary shaft (15) and turn the axle
with the brake band clockwise using
a wrench 8=13 mm to take out the
gap between the brake band and the
drum (this will be clear by the im-
possible turning of the PTO shank
by hand), then turn the axle counter-
clockwise by 10-15.
4. Mount the bar (16) and lock it with the
bolt (17).
5. Remove the rod or bolt from the lever
(9).

If the adjustment is made properly, the
lever (1) in position ON will be at the
distance of at least 35 mm from the con-
trol panel slot edge and will be neatly
pass through neutral position (dead cen-
tre).
IMPORTANT! After several external read-
justments, the eccentric shaft (15) can
take the leftmost position (the flat is on
the left vertically), which indicates the
missing reserve of external adjustment. In
this case, set the eccentric shaft to initial
position by rotating it counter-clockwise
(the flat is on the right vertically). Then
make adjustments as described accord-
ing to the section Adjusting the control
when repairing the PTO.

163
Adjusting the control when repairing
the PTO
Put the eccentric shaft (15) to the right-
most position (flat is on the right vertical-
ly) and lock it with a bar (16) and bolt
(17).
1. Put the arm (9) to the Neutral posi-
tion (holes in the arm (9) and rear ax-
le housing coincide), fix this position
using a rod 8 mm or a bolt M 10x60.
2. Remove the cotter pin and lock bar
(10), having released the screws (11)
to make adjustment.
3. Tighten the adjusting screws (11) with
the torque of 10 Nm (1 kgfm) and
then release them by 2-2.5 turns.
4. After adjustment, refit the lock bar (10)
and cotter pins.
5. By adjusting the length of the rods
(2) and (6) by means of the forks (4)
and locknuts (3, 5), set the lever (1)
to the middle position relatively to
the control panel slot.
6. Turn the adjusting bolt (8) into the lever
(9) to the dimension =26...28 mm
and fix it in this position by means of
a locknut (7).
7. Remove a supplementary rod (or bolt
M10x60) from the hole of the rear axle
housing and the lever.
8. Check the correctness of performing the ad-
justment. When being moved, the lever (1)
shall be clearly fixed in the extreme positions
and in the PTO ON position the distance
from the edge of the lever to that of the con-
trol panel slot shall be 35+10 mm and the
rods (2) and (6) shall not touch the nearby
parts of the tractor during the motion.


164
Adj usti ng control rod of FDA dri ve
transfer box
To adjust the rod, proceed as follows:
Put the lever (7) to position PTO forc-
edly ON (upper fixed position, catch
ball (5) is in the lower indent A of the
rod (4)).
Turn out the locknut (3) by 2-3 turns,
remove the cotter pin and then the pin
(1).
Turn the arm (11) clockwise until the
full engagement of the transfer box
(10), i.e. gear clutch is coupled with ex-
ternal and internal casings of the free
travel coupling.
Adjust the length of the rod (4) by rotat-
ing the fork (2) in such a way that the
pin would enter freely the holes of the
fork and arm (11) turned clockwise to
the stop.
Tighten the locknut, refit the pin and fix
it with the cotter pin.


165
Adjusting the control of the power (position) governor

1. To adjust the control rod of the gov-
ernor, proceed as follows:
Adjust the length of the rod (1) by means
of the nuts (2) in such a way that a clear-
ance of 18 to 24 mm would be formed
between the rubber roller (5) and edge of
the sector (4) when moving the lever (3)
to the rearmost position with respect to
the tractor motion.


166

2. To adjust the position rod, proceed as
follows:
a) Set the switch (1) to the middle posi-
tion;
b) Lift the mounted attachment to the up-
permost position;
c) Adjust the length of the rod (4) so that
the projection of the switch (1) would enter
freely the slot of the position lever (2),
then shorten the rod (4) by one turn of the
adjusting nuts (7);

3. To adjust the power sensor, proceed
as follows:
a) Set the switch (1) to the middle posi-
tion;
b) Remove the central rod (10) of the
mounted attachment and set the pin (11)
of the central rod to the upper hole of the
shackle (9);
c) Using an additional lever (8), turn the
shackle around the pin (13) in the direc-
tion of the arrow "" until the springs (15)
are fully compressed. After removal of the
load from the lever, the shackle shall re-
turn to the initial position; here the sensor
travel measured by displacement of the
power rod (5) shall be at least 11 mm;
d) Having made sure that the sensor is in
good order, remove the cotter pin from the
castellated nut (12), turn it until the sensor
springs begin to be compressed, then
tighten it additionally by 1/2-1/3 turns until

167
the slot in the nut is aligned with the cutter
pin hole and fix it by means of the cotter
pin.
4. The power rod shall be adjusted after
adjustment of the power sensor:
) Set the switch (1) to the middle position
(see Fig. 28);
b) Using an additional lever, apply a force
ensuring the turn of the shackle to the ex-
treme position (in the direction of the ar-
row "");
c) While holding the lever in the released
position (in the direction of the arrow ""),
check the possibility of entering of the pro-
jection of the switch (1) to the slot of the
power lever (3). If it is impossible, adjust
the length of the rod (5) so that the projec-
tion of the switch (1) would enter freely the
slot of the power lever (3);
d) Shorten the rod (5) by 1 turn of the ad-
justing nuts (6).
With the agricultural implement mounted
on the tractor no use of a special addition-
al lever for adjusting the power rod is re-
quired. In this case, it is sufficient to lift
slightly the implement above the surface
of the ground, on which the tractor stays,
then the weight of the implement would
create a necessary stretching force ap-
plied to the power sensor through the cen-
tral rod. It should be noted that the central
rod shall be set to the upper hole of the
shackle of the mounted attachment. The
implement should be lifted just until it is
taken off the ground.


168
Clutch adjustments

1. General
A dry single-plate spring-loaded clutch is
mounted on the engine flywheel (1) (see
Fig. ).
The driving part of the clutch consists of
the flywheel (1) and pressure plate (3).
The driven part of the clutch includes the
driven plate (2) with the torsional vibra-
tion damper (8) mounted on the power
shaft (6). The necessary force for press-
ing the friction surfaces of the driving
and driven parts is provided by the nine
main springs (21) and six additional
springs (20), if the clutch is equipped
with a driven plate 2 with ceramic-metal
segments (Fig. b), no additional springs
(20) are mounted in this case.

ATTENTION: To avoid the premature
failure of the driven plate and parts of
the transmission, follow the guidelines of
this Manual: in case of installation of a
driven plate with asbestos-free linings
(Fig.), the clutch plates are fitted with
nine main springs 21 and six additional
springs 20; in case of installation of a
driven plate with ceramic-metal seg-
ments, the clutch plates are fitted with
nine main springs 21 only.

The elastic components are placed be-
tween the floating bushing (7) connected
with the PTO drive shaft (4) and the
backing plate (10).
The clutch is engaged and disengaged
by means of the shifter (16) with the re-
lease bearing (14) moving over the
bracket (15). The shifter fork (17) with
the roller (18) is connected with the
clutch pedal by means of a rod.
The release bearing (14) is lubricated
through a pressure lubricator screwed in-
to the shifter journal.
a)
b)

1 flywheel; 2 driven plate; 3 pres-
sure plate; 4 PTO drive shaft; 5 hub; 6
power shaft; 7 floating bushing; 8
torsional vibration damper; 9 clutch lev-
er; 10 backing plate; 11 fork; 12 nut;
13 locking spring; 14 bearing; 15
shifter bracket; 16 shifter; 17 disen-
gagement fork; 18 control roller;
19 sleeve; 20 pressure spring;
21 pressure spring; 22 insulating
washer.
Clutch


169

2. Procedure of removing the clutch
from the engine:
1. Turn three auxiliary bolts (1240)
into the pressure plate (3) through the
auxiliary holes of the backing plate (6).
2. Turn out the nuts fastening the
backing plate to the flywheel and re-
move the clutch plate assemblies (back-
ing plate (6) with the pressure one (3)).
3. Remove the driven plate (2).

3. Procedure of replacing the clutch
to the engine:
1. Place the driven plate (2) with the
long end of the hub directed towards the
flywheel (1).
2. Set the clutch plate assemblies
(backing plate (6) with the pressure one
(3)) onto the flywheel pins with the
bushings (10) and fix them by means of
the nuts (with the torque of 7090
Nm).
3. Set the auxiliary mandrel and turn
out the auxiliary bolts.
4. Adjust the position of the clutch
levers (5).

4. Adjusting the position of the
clutch levers
1. Adjust the position of the clutch
levers to the dimension of 130.5 from
the bearing areas of the levers (5) to the
end face of the hub (4) of the backing
plate (6) by turning the adjusting nuts
(8) on or off. The difference of the di-
mensions for individual levers shall not
exceed 0.3 mm.
2. After adjusting the levers, set the
lock plates (7) and fix them with bolts.
3. Remove the mandrel.

Auxiliary mandrel

Maintenance BELARUS series 900

170
MAINTENANCE

KINDS OF MAINTENANCE OF THE TRACTORS

Kind of maintenance

Frequency or term of maintenance
organization in tractor operation
hours
Maintenance during the tractor pre-operation:
Maintenance during the tractor preparation for run-
ning-in
Maintenance during the running-in
Maintenance after completion of the running-in
Scheduled maintenance:
Shift-time maintenance (STM)
maintenance No. 1 (M-1)
Special maintenance
General maintenance
Seasonal maintenance (M-HPS- and M-AW)

Maintenance under special application conditions

Maintenance during storing

Prior to running-in preparation

Maintenance during running-in
After 30 hours of operation

8-10
125
500
1000
2000
When necessary
When transferring to autumn-winter op-
eration (M-AW) and spring-summer op-
eration (M-HPS)
When preparing to operation under spe-
cial conditions
During durable storing

MAINTENANCE WHEN PREPARING THE TRACTOR FOR OPERATION

Maintenance during the tractor
preparation for running-in
Clean the tractor from dust and dirt,
remove preservative grease (if any);
Check the oil level and add oil, if nec-
essary, into the engine crankcase, air
cleaner tray, one or more tanks of the
hydraulic mounted system and hydro-
static power steering, power train cas-
ing, FDA and intermediate support
casings;
Grease the steering knuckle bearings,
pinion of the right angle brace, bush-
ings of the rear attachment mecha-
nism and joints of the HPS hydraulic
cylinder;
Check the storage battery and, if nec-
essary, clean the terminals from ox-
ides and grease them with technical
petroleum jelly, clean the vents and
check the charge;
Check and adjust, if necessary, the
tension of the fan belt, the tractor con-
trol units, air pressure in the tyre and
the toe-in of the front wheel;
Check and tighten, if necessary, the
male threaded joints;
Fill up the radiator with cooling fluid;
Listen to the engine and check the
readings of the monitoring instruments
for conformance to established regula-
tions.


171
Maintenance during the running-in:
Check the level of and add, if neces-
sary, oil into the crankcase and cool-
ing fluid into the radiator;
Drain condensate from the bottle of
the pneumatic system;
Monitor the soiling of the air cleaner
against the pilot lamp;
Check the working capacity of the en-
gine, controls, lighting and signalling
systems, the windscreen wiper and
the brakes.

Maintenance on completion of the
running-in (after 30 hours of opera-
tion of the tractor):
Inspect and wash the tractor;
Listen to the major parts of the tractor
during operation;
Check and adjust, if necessary, the
tension of the fan belt, free travel of
the clutch and brake pedals as well as
the pneumatic system;
Check the storage batteries and, if
necessary, clean the batteries, termi-
nals, wire lugs and vents in the plugs;
Change oil in the engine crankcase,
air cleaner tray, casings of power
train, FDA and intermediate support;
Grease the clutch shifter bearing;
Service the dry-type air cleaner (Bela-
rus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3);
Replace the basis filtering element of
the oil filter (Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3);
Clean the centrifugal oil filter (except
for Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3);
Replace a filtering element of the hy-
draulic system;
Flush a screen filter for pre-cleaning
of engine oil;
Check and tighten, if necessary, the
external joints of the tractor compo-
nents, including the bolts of the cylin-
der block head and the bolts fastening
cardan shaft intermediate support
holder to the transmission casing (for
tractors with FDA), the bolts of power
train casings, rear wheel hubs, rotary
shaft holder and the nuts of the front
and rear wheels;
Check and adjust the clearances be-
tween the valves and the rocker actu-
ators;
Check the cooling fluid level and, if
necessary, add it to the radiator;
Drain the deposit from the fuel coarse
filter and condensate the from pneu-
matic system bottle;
Check and restore, if necessary, the
air tightness of the air cleaner and en-
gine inlet pipelines;
Check working capacity of the engine,
controls and the windscreen wiper.


172
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE

No. Subject of maintenance Check Cleaning
Lubrica-
tion
Re-
place-
ment
Adjust-
ment
Drain Flushing Remarks
Shift-time maintenance (STM) after each 10 hours of operation
1 Oil in the engine +
2 Cooling fluid +
3 Oil in the hydraulic system tank +
4 Condensate in the pneumatic sys-
tem bottle

+

4a Oil level in the HPS tank +
4b
1)
Fastening the air-conditioner hos-
es
+

4c
1)
Air-conditioner condenser + +
4d
1)
Drain tubes of the air-conditioner + +
4e
2)
Condensate in the CAC radiator
tanks (Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/
952.3)

+

Maintenance No.1 (M-1) after 125 hours of operation
5 Oil in air cleaner tray +
5a Dry type air cleaner + +
5b
1)
Tension of the of the air-
conditioner compressor drive belt
+

+

6 Oil in the casing of (each) upper
bevel pair
+

7 Deposit of fuel coarse filter and
fuel tanks

+
8 Fan belt + +
9 Hub and wheel fastening + +
10 Air pressure in the tyres + +
11 Cab ventilation system filter +
12 Clutch shifter bearing +
13 Storage batteries + +
14 Oil level in the FDA cardan drive in-
termediate support
+

15
3)
Turbocharger (Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950/950.3/952/952.2/
952.3)
+

16 Steering trapezium hydraulic cyl-
inder joints

+

17 Pin axle bearings of FDA wheel re-
ducing gears
(920.2/920.3/952.2/952.3)

+

18
3)
Play in steering rod joints + +
19
3)
Clutch pedal free travel + +
19
3)
Engine oil filter (basis filtering ele-
ment)

+


173
Continuation of the Table
No. Subject of maintenance Check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement Adjustment Drain Flushing Remarks
Maintenance No.2 (M-2) after 500 hours of operation
20
Rotor of the centrifugal
oil filter of the engine
+

21
4)
Oil in the engine +
22 Clearances in engine
valves
+

+
23 Backlash of steering wheel + +
24
Brakes (service and
parking)
+

+
25
Check the tightening of
the bolts of the clamps
of the CAC ducts (Bela-
rus-900.3/920.3/950.3/
952.3)
+

26 Pneumatic system +
27 PTO control nit + +
28
3)
Front wheels (toe-in) + +
30
Front axle steering knuck-
les (Belarus-
900/900.3/950/950.3)
+
31 Engine air cleaner +
32
5)
Hydraulic system filter +
32
5)
Filter of the HPS oil tank +
33 Alternator +
34
Deposit of fuel fine fil-
ter
+
35 Transmission oil +
35
Oil in the casings of wet-
type brakes (if provided)
+
36
Oil in the FDA casings
and intermediate support
+
37
Bearings of the FDA
pivot bolts with planetary
reducing gears
+ +
37
6)
Drying filter +
Maintenance No. 3 (M-3) after each 1000 hours of operation
38
Bolts fastening the cyl-
inder bock head
+ +
39 Fuel coarse filter +
40
Filtering element of fuel
fine filter
+
41 Alternator +


174
End of the Table

No. Subject of maintenance Check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement Adjustment Drain Flushing Remarks
Maintenance after each 2000 hours of operation
42
Front wheel bearings (Belarus-
900/900.3/950/950.3)
+ +
43 Steering rod joints + +
44
Angle brace of the mounted at-
tachment mechanism
+
45
Shaft bushing of the mounted
attachment mechanism
+
46
External bolt joint of the
tractor
+
47 Oil in the hydraulic system tank +
47 Oil in the HPS tank +
48 Transmission oil +
48
Oil in the casings of the wet-
type brakes (if provided)
+
49
Oil in the FDA casings
and intermediate support
+
50
Flange bearings of FDA
planetary reducing gears
+ +
51 Engine oil primary filter + +
52 Engine breather +
53 Engine injectors + +
54
Fuel pump. Injection lead
angle
+

+

55
Fuel pump. Adjustment at the
test bench
+

+

56 Diesel engine cooling system + +
57 Starter +
General maintenance
58 Valve of centrifugal oil filter +

1) If the air-conditioner is provided.
2) In winter, the action shall be performed after each 10 hours of operation and in summer after each
125 hours of operation.
3) The action should be performed after each 250 hours of operation.
4) For turbocharged diesel engines, change oil after each 250 hours of operation. In case of use the sum-
mer diesel fuel with the sulphur content of 1%, the intervals of change of oil in the engine crankcase
should be halved.
5) The first change shall be performed after 500 hours, the subsequent ones after each 1000 hours of
operation as well as when performing the seasonal maintenance.
6) After each 800 hours of operation or once a year.


175
Shift-time maintenance (STM) af-
ter each 10 hours of operation or
daily
Action 1. Oil level in the diesel engine
crankcase
Stop the engine, wait for 15 minutes and
check the oil level. The oil level shall be
between the upper and lower marks of
the probe (3). If necessary, take the cover
(2) of oil filler neck (1) away and fill oil up
to upper mark of the probe (3).
IMPORTANT! Do not operate the diesel
engine with oil below the lower mark of
the oil meter.
IMPORTANT! Do not fill up oil above
upper probe mark. Excessive oil will
burn, giving the fail impression of high oil
consumption for burning.

Action 2. Cooling fluid level in the
engine radiator
Remove the radiator cap away and check
the cooling fluid level, which shall be be-
low the upper edge of the filler neck (1)
by 50-60 mm. If necessary, add the cool-
ing fluid to the level.
IMPORTANT! Do not allow the level to
drop below 100 mm from the filler neck
upper edge.
WARNING! The engine cooling sys-
tem operates under pressure, which is
maintained by the valve in the radiator
cap. It is dangerous to take the cap
away from the hot engine. Let the en-
gine cool down, put some thick cloth
on the cap and turn it slowly to reduce
the pressure before removing the plug
fully. Beware of burns caused by hot
liquid!


176
Action 3. Checking the oil level in the
hydraulic system tank

NOTE: Prior to checking the oil level,
place the tractor on a flat horizontal ar-
ea. Shut down the engine and engage
the parking brake.

Check the oil level against the oil gage
(1) on the left side of the hydraulic sys-
tem tank. The level shall be between the
marks and (Full). If necessary, fill
up oil to the mark , having taken the
rubber plug (2) away.

NOTE: When using the machines re-
quiring large amount of oil taking, add
oil to the level corresponding to the
upper mark . When doing this, the
hydraulic cylinders shall be with plung-
ers indrawn.

Action 4. Draining the condensate
from the pneumatic system bottle
To remove the condensate from the
pneumatic system bottle, pull the ring (1)
of the drain valve horizontally and down.

hydrostatic power steering (HPS) tank
(Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
Prior to checking the oil level, place the
tractor on a flat horizontal area. Shut
down the engine.
NOTE: To get access to the HPS tank,
lift the engine facing upwards to the stop
and fix it reliably in lifted position.
Check oil level in HPS oil tank against oil-
measuring rod (1). The oil level shall be
between the upper and lower marks of
the rod. If necessary, take the cap (2) of
the filler neck away and add oil to the up-
per mark on the oil-measuring rod.


177
Action 4b
*
. Checking the fastening of
the air-conditioner hoses

The air-conditioner shall be fixed
reliably by means of the binding screw
clamp. The contact of the hoses with the
tractors moving parts is not allowed.

Action 4. Checking/cleaning of the
air-conditioner condenser

Check the cleanness of the con-
denser core. If it is clogged, clean the
condenser using compressed air. When
the bonnet is open, direct the air flow at
the right angle to the condenser plane
top-down. Any crushed ribbing shall be
rectified by means of a special comb or
plastic (wooden) plate. In case of heavy
dirtying of the condenser, flush it with hot
water under the pressure of not more
than 0.15-0.2 MPa and blow it off with
compressed air.

Action 4d. Checking the drain
tubes/cleaning them from condensate

The blue-coloured drain tubes are
located to the right and left from the ra-
diator tube under the ceiling panel.
Check the drain tubes and clean them to
avoid their clogging. The sign of a clean
drain tube consists in water dripping dur-
ing the operation of the air-conditioner in
hot weather

Action 4d
**
. Removal of condensate
from the engine radiator tanks (CAC)
(Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/
952.3)
To remove condensate from the
engine CAC radiator tanks, proceed as
follows:
- Turn out the two plugs 1 in the bottom
portion of the charge air cooler (2) and
let the condensate to drain;
- Turn in the plugs (1).

*
In the air-conditioner is provided.
**
In winter, the action shall be performed after
each 10 hours of operation, in summer after
each 125 hours of operation.

178
Maintenance No. 1 (M-1) after
each 125 hours of operation

Perform the previous actions plus as fol-
lows:

Action 5. Oil level and condition in the
engine air cleaner tray (except for Bel-
arus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)

Loosen the two nuts (1) and remove the
tray (2) of the air cleaner (3). Check the
oil level in the tray, which shall be at the
level of the ring collar A.
Add oil, if necessary. If water is contami-
nated with dirt or in oil, replace it.
ATTENTION! Do not overfill the tray with
oil above the ring collar A, since it can re-
sult in oil ingress into the engine combustion
chambers and development of false im-
pression about increased oil consumption
for burning.

Action 5. Servicing the air cleaner
(Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)

The clogging of the air cleaner filtering
elements is monitored by using a soiling
indicator. In case of increased clogging,
a signalling lamp lights up on the pilot
lamp block of the dashboard.
After running-in the tractor (30 hours of
operation) and after each 125 hours of
operation, service the air cleaner. To do
this, perform the following procedures:
Remove the right side grid from the
front part and facing to get access to the
air cleaner;
Pull the latch (1) (yellow), turn cover (2)
counter-clockwise by 12.5 and remove
it;
Remove the major filtering element (3)
(MFE);

179
Check the presence of clogging the fil-
tering element (RFE) without removing it
from the casing.

ATTENTION! It is not recommended to
take the RFE from the casing.

The RFE clogging indicates the damage
of MFE (breaking of paper blind, discon-
nection of the bottom). In this case flush
RFE and replace MFE.
Blow the major filtering element with
compressed air first from inside and then
from outside to completely remove the
dust. To prevent the paper blind from
rupture, the air pressure shall be max
0.2-0.3 MPa (2-3 kgf/cm
2
).
The air jet should be directed at an angle
to the filtering element surface. When
servicing, protect the filtering element
against mechanical damages and oiling.
When the filtering element is oiled or
clogged so that the blowing with com-
pressed air is ineffective, it should be re-
placed.
To reassemble the air cleaner, proceed in
the reverse order.
Refit the right facing grid.

ATTENTION! Having reassembled the air
cleaner, check air tightness of all joints of
the inlet line; to do this, start the engine
and shut down air intake at a medium
speed of the crank shaft. When it will be
done, the engine shall stop quickly. Oth-
erwise, detect and eliminate looseness.

NOTE:.


180
Action 5. Checking/adjustment of the
tension of the air-conditioner com-
pressor driving belt

The tension of the air-conditioner
compressor driving belt (1) is considered
to be normal, if deflection of its section
engine crankshaft pulley compressor
pulley measured in the middle is within
46 mm under application of the force
of (39 + 2,0) N in perpendicular to the
middle of the section.
The tension of the belt (1) shall be
adjusted by rotating the compressor (2)
on the rotation shaft () and clamp of the
threaded connection () in the slot of the
sector (). After adjustment, the belt de-
flection caused by the force of (39 + 2.0)
N applied in perpendicular to the middle
of the section, shall be from 4 to 6 mm.

Action 6. Oil level in the casings of
the upper bevel pairs of the FDA with
the bevel reducing gears (Belarus-
920/952)
Check that the oil level coincides with the
lower edge of the oil-filling opening (1). If
necessary, add oil.

Action 7. Draining the deposit from the
fuel tanks and fuel coarse filter
Open the drain plugs (1) of the fuel tanks
(2) and the drain plug (3) of the filter and
drain the deposit until clean fuel appears.
Drain the deposit into a special tank and
dispose it properly.
Close the drain valves after appearance of
clean fuel without water and dirt.


181
Action 8. Checking the tension of the
belt for driving the engine cooling
system fan
Check the belt for the presence of the
traces of wear or damage. If necessary,
replace it.
To check the tension of the belt of the
engine alternator with an elongated
shield, apply the force of 40 N at the
middle of the belt section alternator pul-
ley water pump pulley (1). The deflec-
tion shall be within 6-10 mm. If neces-
sary, adjust the belt tension by rotating
the alternator body, having loosened the
lath fixing bolt and the alternator fixing
nuts, and then tighten them.

NOTE: When fitting a normal alternator
shield, check the belt tension on the sec-
tion alternator pulley crankshaft pulley.
The belt deflection shall be within the
range 1520 mm under the force of
about 40 N applied to the middle of the
section.

Action 9. Rear wheel hubs
Check the tightening torques and tight-
en them, if necessary, with the following
torques:
the bolts (1) of the rear wheel hubs:
360500 Nm;
the nuts for fastening the rear wheels
to the hubs: 300350 Nm;
the nuts for fastening the front wheels
to the flanges: 200250 Nm;
the nuts for fastening the disks of the
front wheels to the rim supports:
180240 Nm.

Action 10. Air pressure in the tyres
Check the tread condition and air pres-
sure in the tyres. If necessary, adjust the
pressure according to the recommenda-
tions given in the section Operating In-
structions.

182
Action 11. Cleaning the filter of the cab
heating and ventilation system
Lift the cab roof (1).
Unscrew the two fastening bolts and
remove the filter cover (2) together
with two filtering elements (3).
Slightly shake up the elements to re-
move free dust particles from the filter.
Be careful not to damage the filter.
Clean the filters with compressed air
under the pressure of not more than 2
kgf/cm
2
pressure. Keep the hose injec-
tor at the distance of minimum 300 mm
from the filter so that not to damage
basis filtering element. Direct the air
flow through the filter against the nor-
mal air flow shown by the arrows on
the filter.
Fit the filter by performing the actions
in the reverse order.
NOTE: Under humid conditions, e.g.
early morning, do not switch the fan on
before servicing the filter, since mois-
ture particles got into the filter are diffi-
cult to remove.
NOTE: When operating the tractor un-
der high dustiness conditions, clean the
filer at shorter intervals.
Action 12. Greasing the clutch shifter
bearing
Remove the plug (1) from the left side of
the clutch casing.
Insert the injector of the lever-plunger
pressure gun into the opening and make
4-6 injections of the grease Litol-24
through the oil feeder screwed into the
shifter body to lubricate the release
bearing.
NOTE: Do not inject excess grease,
since it will be accumulated inside the
clutch casing and can get on the friction
surfaces of the driven disk friction fac-
ings.

183
Action 13. Storage batteries
WARNING: Batteries contain sulphuric
acid, which causes severe burns when
getting onto open parts of the body. Be-
ware of the acid getting onto the skin, into
eyes and onto clothes. When the acid
gets onto external body parts, wash them
with plenty of pure water. In case of in-
gestion, drink plenty of water or milk. In
case of contact with the mucous mem-
brane of an eye, wash it with plenty of
water for 15 minutes and then call for
medical assistance. Do not allow spark of
flame getting into electrolyte zone; this
can result in explosion. Charge the bat-
teries in a ventilated room. When servic-
ing the batteries, put on protective gog-
gles and gloves.
Keep the batteries dry and clean.
Make sure that the batteries are fixed reli-
ably. Prior removing the plug, clean the ad-
jacent surfaces.
Check the electrolyte level. It shall be
above the protective mesh by 12-15 mm
(or between the level marks on the battery
transparent body).
Prior to adding distilled water, check the
electrolyte density in each cell jar. If nec-
essary, add distilled water.
Check that terminals (2) and plugs (1) are
clean. If necessary grease the terminals
with technical petroleum jelly and clean the
vents in plugs (1).


184

intermediate support of the FDA car-
dan drive
Check the oil level in the intermediate
support. If necessary, add oil to the level
of the lower edge of the filler opening
closed with plug (1).

Action 15
*
. Turbocharger (Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950/950.3/952/952.2/952.3)
Check the tightening of the fastening
bolts of the turbocharger (1), exhaust
manifold (2) and exhaust pipe holder (3).
If necessary, tighten the bolts with the
torque of 35-40 N-m (3.5-4.0 kgf-m).

*
Perform M action after 250 hours of operation.

Action 16. Lubricating the hydraulic
cylinder joints of the steering trapezi-
um
Using a gun, grease the joints via oil
feeders (1) (two off) with the grease Litol-
24 or recommended substitutes until it
appears outside.

FDA with bevel reducing gears

FDA with planetary reducing gears

185
Action 17. Lubricating the bearings of
the pivot axle of the FDA wheel reduc-
ing gears
(Belarus-920.2/920.3/952.2/952.3)
Lubricate the oil feeders of the upper
and lower axles of wheel reducing gear
pivot (4 lubrication points) with the
grease Litol-24 using a gun by making
46 injections.

Action 18
*
. Checking the backlashes
in the steering rod joints (Belarus-
920/920.2/920.3/952/952.2/952.3)

*
Perform the M action after 250 hours of
operation.
When the engine is running, turn the
steering wheel to both sides to check
free wheeling and backslash in the joints
(1) of the steering rod (4). In case of
play in the joints, proceed as follows:
remove the safety wire (3);
tighten the treaded plug (2) to eliminate
clearance in the rotary joint;
lock the plug with wire (3)

NOTE: If tightening the threaded plugs
does not eliminate the play in the joints,
disassemble the joint and replace the
worn-out parts.


186
Action 19
*
. Adjusting the free travel of
the clutch pedal

IMPORTANT! Too long pedal travel will
not allow to the clutch to be fully disen-
gaged and will make the gear switching
difficult. Absence of free pedal travel will
cause slipping of clutch disks, quick
wear of friction facings and overheating
of the clutch parts.

*
Perform M action after 250 hours of operation.
To adjust free clutch pedal travel:
Unsplint and remove the pin (2) and
take it away, having disconnected the
rod (5) from the lever (1).
Loosen the locknut (4).
Unscrew the bolt (8) so that the pedal
rod (6) would move upwards to the
stop against the cab floor.
Turn the lever (1) counter-clockwise to
the stop, i.e. when the release bearing
touches pressing arms.
Unscrewing the fork (3), align the
openings in the fork with those in the
lever (1), and then screw the fork into
the rod (5) by 5-5.5 turns (i.e. make
the rod shorter). Connect the fork (3)
with the lever (1) by using the pin (2).
Assemble the leverage of the clutch
pedal in reverse order.

IMPORTANT! Make sure that the clutch
pedal returns reliably to the stop against
the floor at the distance of free pedal
travel. Otherwise, adjust the servo-unit
springs (7) by means of the bolt (8) or re-
position the holder (9) by turning it rela-
tively to the fastening bolt axis.


187

Action 19. Replacing the basis filtering el-
ement of engine oil filter
(Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
After each 250 hours of operation, replace the
paper filtering element (simultaneously with re-
placement of oil in the engine crankcase). To
do this, proceed as follows:
unscrew the prefabricated filter from the con-
necting branch (1) using a special wrench or
other means and turn out the nut (3);
remove the bottom (4) with the spacer (2)
and ring (10);
remove the valve (5), washer (6) and spring
(7);
press on the clamp (8), move it inside the cap
(9) by 3-4 mm and turn it to align the clamp
lugs with the cap outlet grooves;
remove the clamp, paper filtering element,
bypass valve (12) and spring (11) from the
cap;
wash the cap cavity and all the filter parts
with diesel fuel;
replace the filtering element, spacers (2) and
(10) and anti-drain valve (5) and re-
assemble the filter in the reverse order.
The torque for tightening the nut (3) 3040
Nm (34 kgf-m).
When mounting the prefabricated filter on the
connecting branch, grease the rubber gasket
(2) with motor oil and screw in the filter.
After touching the body by the gasket, turn the
filter additionally by of a turn. Install the filter
on the body with applying the force from the
hand only.

It is allowed to mount the non-
separable filter cartridges with anti-
drain and bypass valves instead of
the prefabricated filter with remova-
ble paper filtering element They
have the following overall dimen-
sions:
- diameter: 95105 mm;
- height: 140160 mm;
- pilot thread: 3/4 - 16UNF.


188

Maintenance No. 2 (M-2) after
Perform the actions of the previous
maintenance plus the followings:

Action 20. Centrifugal oil filter of the
engine (except for Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
Turn out the nut (1) and remove the
cap (2).
Insert a screwdriver (5) or a rod be-
tween the filter body and the rotor bot-
tom to lock the rotor (3) against rota-
tion and remove the rotor barrel (3) by
turning the rotor nut with spanner (4).
Remove the cover (6), impeller (7)
and filtering grid (8) of the rotor. If
necessary, clean and flush the grid.
Remove the deposits from the inner
walls of the rotor barrel using a non-
metallic scraper.
Clean all the parts in a washing solu-
tion and blow with compressed air.
Reassemble the filter by performing
the same operations in the reverse or-
der. Prior to assembling the barrel with
the rotor casing, grease the seal ring
with motor oil.
Align the balancing marks of the bar-
rel with those on the rotor casing.
Tighten the barrel-fastening nut with a
slight force until the barrel is fully set
on the rotor.
The rotor shall rotate freely, without
jamming.
Fit the cap (2) and tighten nut (1)
with 35-.50 Nm torque.
NOTE: After stopping the engine, the
noise of the turning rotor shall be head
for 30-60 s. This indicates that the filter
operates properly.
ATTENTION! For supercharged diesel
engines, clean the centrifugal oil filter
after each 250 hours of operation.

189
Action 21
*
. Changing the oil in the en-
gine
Warm up the diesel engine to normal
operating temperature (at least 70C).
Place the tractor on a flat area, stop
the engine and apply the parking
brake.
Remove the cap (2) of the oil filler neck
and unscrew the drain plug (4).
ATTENTION: be careful to avoid contact
with hot oil.
Drain oil into waste storage tank.
Place the drain plug (4) back and fill in
fresh motor oil through oil filler neck (1)
(-8, -82, -82 in winter and
-10, -102, -102 in summer
to the upper mark of the oil-measuring
probe (3).
Refit the filler neck cap (2).
Start the engine and let it run for 1-2
minutes.
After 10 minutes from the moment of
stopping the engine, check oil level
with the probe.
If necessary, add oil.

*
For supercharged diesel engines, change oil after

190

Action 22. Checking the clearances be-
tween the valves and the rockers

NOTE: check the clearances on the cold
engine, having verified preliminary the
tightening of the cylinder head bolts.
To perform the adjustment, proceed as
follows:
Remove the cylinder head cover cap
and check the fastening of the rocker
axle rests. The nut tightening torque
shall be 60-90 Nm (6-9 kgfm);
Rotate the engine crank shaft until the
moment of closing of the valves of the
1
st
cylinder (intake valve starts open-
ing, exhaust valve finishes closing)
and adjust clearances in the 4
th
, 6
th
,
7
th
and 8
th
valves (counting from the
fan);
To adjust the clearance, loosen the
locknut (1) of screw (2), insert the
feeler (5) between the face of valve
rod (3) and the rocker head (4) and
set the required clearance against
the feeler by turning in or out the
screw (2).
The clearances between the rocker
head and the valve rod face on the cold
engine for intake and exhaust valves are
given in the table below:

Turn the crankshaft through 360, set
the valve closing at the 4
th
cylinder and
adjust clearances in 1
st
, 2
nd
, 3
rd
and 5
th

valves as shown above;
Having made the adjustment, tighten
the locknuts (1) and refit the removed
parts.

Belarus-900/920/920.2 Belarus-900.3/950/952/952.2//920.3/
950.3/952.3
Intake valves Exhaust valves Intake valves Exhaust valves
0.20-0.35 0.20-0.35 0.20-0.35 0.35-0.50

191

Action 23. Steering wheel play
When engine is working, the steering
wheel play shall not exceed 25. If no
so, check and eliminate the plays in
the joints of the hydraulic cylinders
and steering rod.

Action 24. Adjusting the service and
parking brakes. Aligning the brake
valve and pneumatic system pres-
sure regulator
To adjust the brake control, proceed as
follows;
a) Unscrew the locknuts (3) of adjusting
bolts (2);
b) Screw the bolts (2) into the adjustment
forks or unscrew then so that the full
brake right pedal travel would be with-
in 105-115 mm at the force of 120-130
N and braking distance of max 6.0 m
at the speed of 20 km/h and force of
600 N on the pedals blocked with the
bar (1) would be ensured, as well as
non-simultaneous braking onset of
max 1 m (against the impress) would
be guaranteed. The travel of the left
brake pedal shall be less by 5-20
mm to provide the simultaneous
brake actuation in the blocked condi-
tion. Reduction of brake pedal travel
below given above values is not al-
lowed, since it leads to premature
brake lining wear and brake over-
heating;
c) Tighten the lock nuts (3). Ingress of
grease into the brake causes the disk
oiling and reduces the friction between
their working surfaces (brakes do not
hold). In this case, disassemble the
brake, eliminate the oil leakage, wash
the oiled disks with gasoline and let
them dry within 5-8 minutes. After as-
sembly, adjust the brake control.

192

To adjust the parking brake, place the
tractor on the flat area, stop the engine,
lock the front wheels from the front and
behind, and proceed as follows:
a) Push the parking brake control lever
(1) to the front position (from your-
self);
b) Loosen the tightening of adjusting bolt
locknut (1) (see the lower figure be-
low), as well as the locknut (7) and
remove the pin (5);
c) Turn the arm (4) and align the upper
edge of the slot B1 of the arm (2)
with the upper edge of the slot B2 of
the arm (3) of the right brake pedal
and then align the openings of the arm
(4) with those of the fork (6) by rotat-
ing the fork (6) and then insert the pin
(5);
d) Turn the bolt (1) in or out so that when
moving the control lever towards your-
self with the force of 200
+10
N, the latch
would be retained in the dent between
the third and the forth teeth of sector
A, and the tractor would be held on
18% slope. After adjustment, tighten
the loosened locknuts.
The final check and adjustment of the
parking brake should be performed on
the tractor assembled. The tractor shall
be held motionless on the slope of at
least 18% when applying the force of not
more than 400 N to the parking brake
control lever (1) (upper figure). If neces-
sary, correct the adjustment using the
adjusting bolt (1) (lower figure).

Note: For the tractors equipped (optional-
ly) with multi-disk brakes operating in the
oil bath, the steps of adjustment of the
service and parking brakes are identical to
those described above for tractors with
dry-type brakes.

193
Checking and adjusting the pneumat-
ic system brake valve and its actua-
tor.
The pneumatic actuator of the trailer
brakes is provided with a brake valve.
For normal operation of the brake valve
and brakes of trailers unitized with a
tractor, check the brake valve operation
and, if necessary, adjust it.
The adjustments shall be performed at
a free position of the tractor brake con-
trols after adjustment of the working and
parking brakes.
For a single-line pneumatic actuator:
1. Attach a pressure gauge with the
scale of at least 10 kgf/cm
2
to the
connection head of the tractor pneu-
matic drive.
2. Turn the compressor on and pressur-
ize the air bottle to the value of 7.7-
8.0 kgf/cm
2
against air pressure indi-
cator located on the tractor dash-
board. The pressure gauge attached
to the connection head shall display
at least 7.7 kgf/cm
2
. If it is below the
given value, proceed as follows:
Check the presence of the gap a
between the pin (5) and the upper
edge of the slots of the levers (7 and
8). The gap shall be 1-2 mm;
If there is no gap, unsplint and re-
move the pin (5) and adjust the rod
length by rotating the rod end (4).
3. Check and adjust, if necessary, the
preliminary compression of the spring
(3) to the size of 36-38 mm by rotat-
ing the nuts (2), after which lock the
nuts.
The preliminary compression of the
spring is adjusted so that when step-
ping on the service brake pedal or
applying the parking brake, first the
brake valve plunger would move to
the stop and then the spring would be
compressed.
4. If necessary, adjust the brake valve.
The pressure in the pneumatic line,
i.e., pressure on the gauge attached
to the connection head, is adjusted
by rotating the nut located under a
rubber boot (8).
To perform the adjustment, discon-
nect the rod (1) from the lug (9), re-
move the boot (8), unscrew the lug
by 2-3 turns and adjust the air pres-
sure to minimum 7.7 kgf/cm
2
(for
Hungary and Germany 5.3-6.0
kgf/cm
2
) by turning the nut. Screw
the lug into the nut to the stop and
lock it. Put on the boot and attach
the rod.
If the brake valve actuator and the
valve are adjusted properly, when
moving the blocked brake pedals to
the full travel or applying the parking
brake to fixation at the 2
nd
or 4
th

tooth, the pressure as indicated by
the pressure gauge attached to the
connection head shall decrease to
zero.
Disconnect the pressure gauge from
the connection head.

194
For two-line pneumatic actuator
(Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
Attach a pressure gauge with the scale
of at least 10 kgf/cm
2
to the connection
head with the yellow cap of the control
line.
Turn the compressor on and pressurize
the air bottle to the value of 7.7-8.0
kgf/cm
2
against air pressure indicator
located on the tractor dashboard. The
pressure gauge attached to the connec-
tion head shall display 0 kgf/cm
2
.
If the pressure exceeds the above val-
ue, proceed as follows:
Check the presence of the gap a
between the pin (5) and the upper
edge of the slots of the levers (7 and
8). The gap shall be 1-2 mm;
If there is no gap, unsplint and re-
move the pin (5) and adjust the rod
length by rotating the rod end (4).
Check and adjust, if necessary, the pre-
liminary compression of the spring (3) to
the size of 36-38 mm by rotating the
nuts (2), after which lock the nuts.
The preliminary compression of the
spring shall be adjusted so that when
stepping on the service brake pedal or
applying the parking brake, first the
brake valve plunger would move to the
stop and then the spring would be com-
pressed.
If necessary, adjust the brake valve.
To perform the adjustment, disconnect
the rod (1) from the lug (9), remove the
boot (8), unscrew the lug by 2-3 turns
and adjust the air pressure to 0 kgf/cm
2

by turning the nut. Screw the lug into the
nut to the stop and lock it. Put on the
boot and attach the rod.
If the brake valve actuator and the valve
are adjusted properly, when moving the
blocked brake pedals to the full travel or
applying the parking brake to fixation at
the 2
nd
or 4
th
tooth, the pressure as indi-
cated by the pressure gauge attached to
the connection head shall increase to
6,5-8,0 kgf/cm
2
.
Disconnect the pressure gauge from the
connection head.
If the specified adjustment does not en-
sure said pressure parameters, take the
brake valve away and send it for repair.

IMPORTANT! When the brake valve
actuator and the valve are adjusted
properly, the pressure as indicated by
the pressure gauge attached to the
connection head in the single-line drive
shall decrease to zero and in two-line
drive shall increase to 6.5-8.0 kgf/cm
2

when stepping on the blocked pedals
to the full travel as well as when apply-
ing the parking brake.


195
Checking and adjusting the pneumat-
ic system pressure regulator
After 1000 hours of operation of the
tractor (M-3), in case of malfunction of
the pressure regulator, as well as after
its disassembly for washing or replace-
ment of worn-out parts, perform the ad-
justing operation as follows:
Attach a pressure gauge with the
resolution of 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm
2
and
scale of at least 16 kgf/cm
2
to the bot-
tle for the period of verification and
adjustment.
Remove the cap (1).
Using a spanner, screw the cover (2)
into the casing to the stop.
Start the engine. Turn on the com-
pressor and fill the bottle with com-
pressed air so that the safety valve
(6) would operate at 8.5-10 kgf/cm
2
. If
the valve operates at a pressure ex-
ceeding the said limits, adjust it by
means of the screw (8), having pre-
liminary loosened and then tightened
the lock nut (7).
Adjust the force of the springs (3, 4)
by unscrewing gradually the cover (2)
in such a way that the air pressure in
the bottle at which the overload valve
(5) opens would be 7.7-8.0 kgf/cm
2

Fix this position of the cover (2) by
applying paint to the treaded part of
the casing and put on the cap (1).
Open slightly the condensate remov-
al valve in the bottle and reduce the
air pressure to 6.5-7.0 kgf/cm
2
. At
these values, the valve (5) shall be-
come closed and switch the com-
pressor to filling the bottle with com-
pressed air.
Disconnect the reference pressure
gauge from the bottle.


196

Action 25. Checking the tightness of
the bolts of clamps of the CAC ducts
(Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/ 952.3)

Check, and, tighten, if necessary, the
bolts of clamps of the CAC ducts. The
tightening torque of the bolts of clamps
of the CAC ducts shall be from 10 to 15
Nm.

Action 26. Checking the air-tightness
of the pneumatic system lines
Bring the pressure in the pneumatic
system to 6.0-6.5 kgf/cm
2
(as dis-
played by the indicator on the dash-
board) and stop the engine.
Using the pressure gauge, check that
the pressure drop for 30 minutes does
not exceed 2.0 kgf/cm
2
. Otherwise, de-
tect the air leakage point and eliminate
the leakage.

Action 27. Rear PTO control
When switching from the ON position
to the OFF one and vice versa, the
force on lever (1) shall be within 120
150 N (12 15 kgf). Switching shall be
distinct.

Action 28
*
. Front wheel toe-in
The front wheel toe-in shall be within
the range 0 to 8 mm. If necessary, per-
form the adjusting operations according
to the recommendations given in the
section Adjustments.

*
Perform Maintenance action after 250 hours of
operation.

197

Action 30. Steering knuckles of the
front axle (Belarus-
900/900.3/950/950.3)
Using a gun, make 10-12 injections of
lubricating grease through the pressure
lubricators (one per each knuckle).

Action 31. Checking the air-tightness
of the air cleaner and inlet duct joints
(except for Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
Remove the monocyclone (1) and
clean it internal surface.
Loosen the clamps (2), remove the
bolt (4), release the clamp (3) and
remove the air cleaner (5).
Disassemble the air cleaner, having
loosened the nuts (7) and removed the
tray (6).
Clean the internal tray cavity and fill in
fresh motor oil.
Extract three filtering elements,
wash them in diesel fuel and blow
with compressed air. Clean the cen-
tral pipe. Reassemble the air cleaner
and install it onto the engine.
Check the air-tightness of all joints and,
if necessary, tighten them up. The en-
gine operating at medium crankshaft
speed (1000 rpm) shall stop when shut-
ting down the air intake pipe.

198
Action 32. Replacing the oil filter of
the hydraulic system

NOTE: Make further replacements of the
oil filter of the hydraulic system after
Remove the bolts (2) and cover (1)
and extract the filtering element as-
sembly using the arrester (4).
Remove the nuts (3), arrester (4) and
filtering element (5).
Wash the casing (6) in washing solu-
tion.
Install a new filtering element and as-
semble the filter in the reverse order.
Mount the filter assembly into the
hydraulic system tank, close it with
the cover (1) and fasten it with the
bolts (2).

Action 32. Replacing the filtering el-
ement in oil tank of the hydrostatic
power steering (Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
To get access to the oil tank, turn the re-
tainers and remove the left side grid from
the front of tractor facing.
Unscrew the bolts (1), remove the cover
(2) and extract the filtering element as-
sembly.
Install a new filtering element in the oil
tank, refit the cover (2) and fasten it with
the bolts (1).
If necessary, remove the oil filler neck
cap (3) and add oil to the upper mark
with referring to the oil meter (4).
NOTE: Make further replacements of the
filter element in the oil tank of the steer-
ing system after each 1000 hours of op-
eration.

Action 33. Cleaning alternator
Clean the alternator from dust and dirt.
Check and tighten, if necessary, the alter-
nator fastening bolts (1). Check the condi-
tion and firmness of the alternator
clamped connections (2).

199
Action 34. Draining the deposit from
the fuel fine filter
Remove the drain plug (1) and drain de-
posit until clean fuel free of water and
dirt appears traces appear. Tighten the
plug. If necessary, bleed the fuel sys-
tem.

transmission

Check oil level by using oil-measuring
rod (1) on the left side of the gearbox.
The normal working oil level shall be be-
tween the upper and lower marks on the
probe.

NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with f
speed reducer, check the oil level
against the check plug (2) located on the
right side of the gearbox. The normal
working oil level shall be at the lower
edge of the threaded opening of the plug
(2).

If you have to correct oil level, remove
the plug (3) on the upper cover of the
gearbox and add oil to the level.


200
Action 35a. Checking the oil level in
the casings of the wet-type brakes
To check the oil level in the casings of
the wet-type brakes, proceed as fol-
lows:
Place the tractor on a flat level area;
Screw out the check/fill plugs (1) in the
right and left casings of the brakes;
The oil level in the casings of the
brakes shall be to the edges of the holes
of the check/fill plugs (1) on the front
walls of the casings;
If necessary, add oil through the holes
of the plugs (1);
Screw in the plugs (1).

Action 36. Oil level in the FDA casings
I. FDA with bevel reducing gears
(920/952)
Check the oil level in the:
1. wheel reducing gears (lower bevel
pairs);
2. main gear (front differential) casing;
3. cardan drive intermediate support;
4. upper bevel pair casings.

The oil level shall be to the lower edges
of threaded check openings (1).
If necessary, add oil to the level through
the check openings.


201

II. FDA with planetary reducing gears
(Belarus-920.2/920.3/952.2/952.3)
Check the oil level:
In the wheel reducing gears (left and
right). If necessary add oil to the level
of check filler opening closed with plug
(1).
In the FDA main gear. If necessary
add oil to the level of check filler open-
ing closed with plug (2).
Brands of oils to be used:
Transmission oils -15;
-15; -10; -17;
SAE 80W-90 or their analogues.

Action 37. Bearings of the pivots of
the FDA with planetary reducing
gears
Check and adjust, if necessary, the tight-
ness in the bearings.
The preliminary tightness in pivot bear-
ings shall be so that the knuckle turn
force applied to the collar (5) would be
within 6080 N (68 kgf). If neces-
sary, perform the adjustment as follows:
Turn out the four bolts (2) and turn in
the two disassembling bolts (1) into
the pilot holes;
Remove the required number of ad-
justing gaskets (4) from under the
pivot upper axis flange (3);
Unscrew the disassembling bolts and
tighten uniformly bolts (2) with the
torque of 120-140 Nm (12-14 kgf-m).

Action 37
*
. Replacement of the dry-
ing filter
ATTENTION: To replace the drying filter,
contact the specialized service station.
The replacement shall be only performed
using special equipment.

*
The action shall be performed after each 800
hours or once a year

202
Maintenance No.3 (M-3) after
Perform all actions of the previous M plus
the followings:

Action 38. Torque of tightening of the
engine head bolts
NOTE! This operation shall be only per-
formed on the warmed up engine.
Remove the rocker cover, cylinder head
cover and rocker axle assembly.
Using a torque spanner, check and tight-
en the cylinder head bolts in the order
shown in the figure on the right. Bolt
tightening torque shall be within
160...180 Nm (16...18 kgfm).

Action 39. Engine fuel coarse filter
Wash fuel coarse filter as follows:
Shut the fuel tank valve.
Unscrew the fastening bolts (1) of the
barrel (3) and remove the barrel.
Unscrew the deflector with the mesh
(2) and remove the diffuser.
Wash the deflector with the mesh, the
diffuser and filter barrel in diesel fuel.
Assemble the filter parts in the re-
verse order.
Fill the system with fuel.
Bleed the system and remove air from
fuel system as shown below (action
40).

203
Action 40. Replacing the filtering ele-
ment of the fuel fine filter
Remove the plug (1) and drain the
deposit.
Unscrew four nuts and remove the
cover (3).
Draw out the filtering element (2).
Wash the casing and the cover with
pure diesel fuel.
Check the cover gasket and replace
it, if necessary.
Install a new filtering element.
Fill the filter casing with fuel.
Replace the cover and tighten the
fastening nuts.

IMPORTANT! After cleaning or re-
placement of the filtering element (or
after fuel work-out from the tanks), air
should be removed from the system
prior to starting the engine.

To bleed air from the system:
Loosen the plug (1) of the fuel fine
filter.
Unscrew the boost pump handle (3).
Check whether the fuel tank valve is
open and there is fuel in the tanks.
Loosen the plug (2) on the fuel
pump.
Bleed the system quickly by means
of the boost pump until clean fuel
free of bubbles appears from under
the plugs. Tighten the fuel pump plug
(2). Continue bleeding the system
until fuel free of air bubbles appears
from under the fuel fine filter plug (1).
Screw the boost pump handle (3).

NOTE: If the engine starting is imped-
ed, loosen the fuel line union nut of
each injector and remove air from the
lines by rotating the diesel engine with
the starter. Rotate the engine for
1015 s and then tighten the union
nut.

204
Action 41. Alternator
Take the driving belt (1) from the al-
ternator pulley (2).
Check the easy rotation of the alternator
rotor and presence of plays in the bear-
ings.
If there are any plays or jamming of the
rotor, remove the alternator and send it
to the shop for repair.

Action 42. Adjusting the front wheel
bearings (Belarus-900/900.3/950/950.3)
Apply the parking brake and place
the wedges in front of and behind
the rear wheels.
Lift the front axle from the ground and
place a rest under the front axle.
Unscrew the bolts (1) and remove the
cover (2) and gasket (3).
Remove the cotter pin (4), nut (10), ring
(5) and external bearing (9).
Remove the wheel hub as an as-
sembly and squeeze the internal
bearing (8), race (6) and cup (7).
Wash all the parts in diesel fuel.
In case of wear or damage of the
bearing and cup, replace them with
new ones.
Reassemble all the dismantled parts
in the reverse order.
Fill in the gap between the bearings in-
side the hub with lubricating grease to
half space.
Tighten the nut (10) with the torque of
20 Nm (2 kgfm). Release the nut until
the cut is aligned with the axle opening
and lock the nut.
Fill the inner cavity of the cover (2) with
grease to half space.
Repeat the above steps for another
wheel.

205
Action 43. Steering rod joints (Belarus-
900/900.3/950/950.3)
When the engine is running, turn the
steering wheel in both direction to verify
the free travel and plays in the joints (1)
of steering rod (4).
If there are any plays in the joints, pro-
ceed as follows:
Remove the safety wire (3);
Tighten the threaded plugs (2);
Lock the plugs with wire (3).
NOTE: If the play in the joints cannot
be eliminated by tightening the
threaded plugs, disassemble the joint
and replace worn-out parts.

Action 44
*
. Lubricating RMA right angle
brace bearing
Grease the adjustment mechanism of
the right angle brace through the pres-
sure lubricator (one point of greasing)
using a gun. Make 46 injections with
the gun. The Litol-24 grease should be
used.

Action 45
*
. Lubricating the bushings
of the RMA rotary shaft
Apply the grease by means of a gun to
the two lubrication points through the
pressure lubricators in the mounted at-
tachment holder until grease appears
from the gaps. The Litol-24 grease
should be used.

Action 46. Outside bolted connections
Check and tighten, if necessary, the crit-
ical bolted connections:
front and rear wheel nuts and rear
wheel hub bolts;
front beam semi-frame side mem-
bers;
semi-frame side members clutch
casing;
THM plate fastening;
diesel engine clutch casing;
clutch casing gearbox casing;

*
For tractors equipped with hydraulic lift of RMA, actions
44 and 45 are excluded.
gearbox casing rear axle casing;
rear axle casing RMA and THM
holders;
front and rear supports of the cab;
holders and pins of the steering hy-
draulic cylinder;
rear axle casing semi-axle sleeves;
FDA casing sleeves wheel re-
ducing gears;
nuts of the cardan shaft collars;
nuts of the FDA casing wedges;
casing of the cardan drive intermediate
support clutch casing;
fastening of the holders of the lifting
THM and hydraulic lift.

206
Action 47. Changing oil in the hydraulic
system
Prior to changing oil, warm up oil in the hy-
draulic system.
Place the tractor on the flat ground, lower
and detach the mounted machine.
Brake the tractor and stop the engine.
Unscrew the filler cap (2) (see page F8) and
the drain plug (1) from hydraulic system
tank and drain oil into waste oil vessel.
ATTENTION! Be careful to avoid contact
with hot oil. Dispose of waste oil properly.
Replace the drain plug (1) and fill the sys-
tem with fresh oil. Refit the filler cap (see
Action 3).
NOTE: When using the machines requiring
large amount of oil taking, add oil to the level
corresponding to the upper mark . When
doing this, the hydraulic cylinders shall be
with plungers indrawn.

Action 47. Changing oil of the HPS (Bela-
rus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)

Follow the recommendations given for the
above action. To get access to the HPS tank,
lift the engine facing upwards to the stop and
fix it safely in the lifted position.
Remove the filler neck cap (2) and the drain
plug (3). Drain oil from the tank into waste oil
vessel. Dispose of oil properly.
Replace drain plug (3) and fill in fresh oil
BECHEM Staroil No. 32, or Hessol Hydrauli-
koil HLP 32.
The oil level shall be up to upper mark on oil-
measuring rod (1).
Replace cover (2). Lower the engine facing.


207
Action 48. Changing oil in the trans-
mission
Prior to changing oil, warm up the transmis-
sion.
Place the tractor on the flat area, lower the
mounted machine and stop the engine.
Engage the parking brake and lock the
wheels against movement by using wedg-
es.
Unscrew the check plug (2) and drain
plugs (1) from the casings of rear axle and
gearbox, and drain oil into a special waste
oil vessel. Dispose of oil properly.
ATTENTION: Be careful to avoid contact
with hot oil.
Fill in transmission with fresh oil. Replace
the check plug (2).
Unscrew the check filler caps (1) and drain
plugs (2) of the left and right wet-type
brake casings and drain oil as stated above.
Screw in the drain plugs.
Fill in the casings with fresh transmission oil
up to the lower edge of check filler open-
ings.
Screw the plugs (1).

Action 48a. Changing oil in the cas-
ings of the wet-type brakes
To drain oil from the casings of the wet-
type brakes, proceed as follows:
Place the tractor on a flat level area;
Unscrew the check/fill plugs (1) in the
right and left casings of the brakes;
Unscrew the drain plug (2) in the right
and left casings of the brakes and drain
oil into a special waste oil vessel;
Screw in the check plugs (2);
Pour oil into the both casings through
the holes of the check/fill plugs (1).

NOTE:
1. The oil changing opera-
tions in the casings of the
brakes shall be performed
simultaneously with the
change of oil in the trans-
mission. The brand of the
oil to be used for the
brakes shall be similar to
that in the transmission.
2. The total volume of oil
poured into both casings of
the brakes shall be 2.50.1
litres

208
Action 49. Changing oil in the FDA cas-
ings and intermediate support
I. FDA with bevel reducing gears
(Belarus 920/952)
Prior to changing oil, warm up oil in the
FDA casings.
Place the tractor on a flat horizontal
area. Engage the parking brake and
lock the rear wheel with wedges from
the front and behind.
Unscrew the check filler caps (1) and
drain plugs (2, 3, 4) from the casing of
wheel reducing gears, main gear and
intermediate support, respectively.
Drain oil into a special vessel.
ATTENTION! Be careful to avoid con-
tact with hot oil. Dispose waste oil
properly.
Screw in and tighten the check plugs.
Fill the casings with fresh transmission
oil -15, -15, -10, -
17 or their analogues to the level of
lower edges of the filler openings.
To drain oil from upper bevel pair
casing:
Using the gun (3) for liquid lubri-
cant, pump out some oil through
the filler opening (4);
Unscrew the bolts (2), remove the
cover (1) and drain the remaining
oil;
Replace the cover (1) and bolts
(2);
Fill in the spaces of upper bevel
pairs up to the lower edges of the
opening (4) using the gun for liquid
lubricant.
Replace and tighten all the check/fill
plugs.

209
II. FDA with planetary reducing gears
(Belarus-920.2/920.3/952.2/952.3)
Let the tractor run for some time and
warm up oil in FDA casings.
Place the tractor on the horizontal ar-
ea. Stop the engine. Apply the parking
brake and lock the wheels with wedg-
es from both sides.
Turn out the check/fill plugs (shown by
arrows) and the check plugs (1, 2, 3)
from the casings of wheel reducing
gears, main gear and intermediate
support and drain oil into a special
waste oil vessel. Dispose of oil proper-
ly.
Refit and tighten the check/fill plugs.
Fill the casings with fresh transmis-
sion oil (-15, -15, -10,
-17 or their analogues) up to the
lower edges of check filler openings.
Refit and tighten the check/fill plugs.

Action 50. Bearings of the FDA plane-
tary reducing gear flange
Check and adjust, if necessary, the bev-
el roller bearings (3, 5) without plays by
performing the following operations:
Unscrew the bolts and remove the
cover (2);
Tighten the nut (1) with the torque of
180-200 N-m (18-20 kgf-m) and then
unscrew it by 15-20;
Punch off the nut in two cuts of the
flange (4). Replace the cover (2);


210
Action 51. Washing the primary
oil filter of the engine
Loosen four clamps of connector
sleeves and remove the filter from oil
line located in front of the engine oil ra-
diator.
IMPORTANT! Note the filter orientation
in the oil line. Arbitrary installation of the
filter is not allowed.
Wash the filter in diesel fuel and blow
it with compressed air in the direction
of the arrow on the filter body.
Replace the filter, paying attention to
its correct orientation in the oil line.
Tighten the sleeve clamps.

Action 52. Washing the engine breath-
er
Unscrew the bolts (1) and remove the
breather casing (2).
Remove the breather from the casing,
wash it in diesel fuel and blow it with
compressed air. Pour some motor oil
into the breather filter and letting the
oil to flow down, fit it back.

211
Special maintenance
After each 2000 hours of opera-
tion
Action 53. Checking the diesel engine
injectors
IMPORTANT! The injectors shall be
cleaned and adjusted in a dealers special-
ized workshop.
WARNING: Diesel fuel is injected under
high pressure and can be a source of se-
rious injuries, if the injector atomization is
checked by hand. Use a piece of paper
or cardboard for this purpose. Put on pro-
tective goggles. Prior to connection or
disconnection of fuel lines, stop the en-
gine to take pressure down. Prior to start-
ing the engine, tighten all connections of
fuel lines. In case of fuel injection on the
hand skin, immediately apply for medical
aid, otherwise blood poisoning is possi-
ble.
NOTE: It is convenient to have a spare
set of injectors verified and adjusted for
quick installation into the engine.
Take the injectors out and replace them.
To do this, proceed as follows:
Prior to disconnection or loosening
of any fuel system parts, clean fully
the adjacent working surfaces.
Turn out the nuts (4) and disconnect
the high-pressure fuel piping (5) from
the injectors (3) and fuel pump.

Remove the fuel piping.
Turn out four bolts (1) of the drain
line and take the rundown fuel pip-
ing (2) away. Discard copper seal-
ing washers (two washers per each
banjo bolt).
Unscrew the bolts (6) fastening the in-
jectors and remove the injectors (3).
Send the injectors for servicing to
dealers workshop.
Install the verified, cleaned and ad-
justed injectors by performing the
above specified step in the reverse
order.
Remove air from the system.
IMPORTANT! During each injector in-
stallation, use new copper washers.

212

Action 54. Fuel pump injection
advance angle
Setup advance angle of fuel pump injec-
tion shall be within 17 to 19 before top
dead centre (TDC) (-245.5) and from
19 to 21 before TDC (-243).
Verifying and adjusting the fuel injection
advance angle is performed in a special-
ized dealer shop.
When installing the Motorpal (Czechia)
in-line fuel pump, the setup advance an-
gles of the injection shall be as follows:
15...17 before the TDC
(Belarus-900//920/920.2).
12...14 before the TDC
(Belarus-950/952/952.2).
When installing the YAZDA fuel pump for
diesel engines -245.5 S2 (Belarus-
950.3/952.3) and -245.43 S2 (Belarus-
900.3/920.3), setup advance angle of injec-
tion shall be within 3.54.5 before the
TDC.

check the cleanness of the radiator
core. If necessary, wash the radiator
and blow the core with compressed
air (blowing direction from the engine
side).

ATTENTION! Radiator clogging, insuf-
ficient fan belt tension and impurities
inside the cooling system can lead to
diesel engine overheating and failure.
IMPORTANT! Adjustment of the fuel
equipment by the tractor operator (own-
er) is the ground for rendering the manu-
facturers warranties void.

Action 55. Adjusting the fuel pump on
the bench
Adjusting the fuel pump shall be per-
formed made by the dealer in a special-
ized shop using special equipment.

Action 56. Flushing the engine cooling
system
To flush the system, use a solution of 50-
60 g of soda ash per 1 l of water. To flush
the system, proceed as follows:
Pour 2 l of kerosene into the radiator
and fill the system with the prepared
solution;
Start the engine and operate the tractor
for 8-10 hours; then drain the solution
and flush the cooling system with clear
water;

213
Action 57. Starter of the engine
Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the
cover (2).
Check the condition of the commutator (3),
brushes (5) and springs (4).
Make sure of free brush movement. The
brush pressure on the commutator surface
shall be within 0.75-1.00 kgf. Otherwise, re-
place the brush holder as an assembly.
In case of considerable wear or burning of
the commutator surface, send the starter to
the repair shop.

General maintenance
Action 58. Adjusting the drain valve of
the centrifugal oil filter of the engine
(except for Belarus-
900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
If during the engine operation within the
rated mode at normal temperature (80-
100C), the oil pressure has dropped be-
low 0.1 MPa, stop the engine and elimi-
nate the defect.
One of the ways to increase pressure is
readjustment of the centrifuge drain
valve. To do this, remove the thread
plug (not shown) and readjust oil pres-
sure by screwing the adjustment screw
(1) with a screw-driver into the body. If
this method does not eliminate the de-
fect, contact the dealer.

214
Seasonal maintenance

Combine the seasonal maintenance with the action under regularly scheduled mainte-
nance

Work content
When transferring to the autumn and winter
period (at constant mean daily temperature
below +5C)
When transferring to the spring and summer
period (at constant mean daily temperature
above +5C)
Replace the summer oil brands with winter
ones (see lubrication table):
in the engine crankcase;
in the casings of the hydraulic units;
in the transmission casing;
in the casings of the wet-type brakes (if
provided);
in the FDA casing;
in the FDA final drive reducing gear cas-
ings;
in the FDA drive intermediate support
Screw in the screw of seasonal voltage
adjustment on the alternator to the stop
(position 3 winter)
*

Replace grease in front wheel hubs
Fill engine cooling system with a fluid not
freezing at low temperature, having prelim-
inary flushed the cooling system
Clean setting opening of electric torch pre-
heater connecting branch bolt (except for
Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3)
Remove the cardan shafts away and check
the tightness of the flange seating axially on
the distribution box shafts, intermediate
support and main gear driving pinion (of the
tractors with the FDA). Eliminate axial plays
by tightening the nuts.

Replace the winter oil brands with the
summer ones in:
in the engine crankcase;
in the casings of the hydraulic units;
in the transmission casing;
in the casings of the wet-type brakes (if
provided);
in the FDA casing;
in the FDA final drive reducing gear cas-
ings;
in the FDA drive intermediate support
Set the seasonal adjustment screw on the
alternator to position summer

*
Only for alternator having manual seasonal adjustment of voltage.


215
Tractor maintenance under special
operation conditions
When operating the tractor under special
conditions (low temperatures, in the de-
sert, on sand, swampy and rocky soils),
customary regularity and volume of
maintenance are preserved.
Besides, below listed works are intro-
duced additionally or carried out more of-
ten.
When operating the tractor in the de-
sert, on sand soils, at higher tempera-
tures and air dustiness conditions.
Fill the engine with oil and fuel by closed
method. After each three shifts, change
oil in the air cleaner tray.
When performing M-1, check:
oil in the engine, presence of mechanical
impurities in oil is not allowed. Replace, if
necessary;
central air cleaner pipe (the pipe shall be
clean). Wash and service the air cleaner
after each 20 hours;
flush the water radiator core with water
jet or blow with air. The radiator shall
be clean; there shall be no oil traces on
its surface. When performing M-2,
wash fuel tank plug.
When operating the tractor at low
temperatures, perform the pre-start
heating of the engine to 20-30C. At the
end of the shift fully refuel the tanks) at
the temperatures of minus 30C use arc-
tic fuel) and drain condensate from the
bottle. Fill the cooling system with anti-
freeze.
When operating the tractor on rocky
soil, as well as under mountainous
conditions.
Every shift inspect visually the running gear
and other components of the tractor for
damages, as well as tightening of plug of
the engine crankcase, rear axle and FDA
as well as fastening of driving wheels.
Check the air-tightness of engine cooling
system radiator plug.
Under mountainous operating condi-
tions, adjust the fuel pump to reduce its
output capacity to avoid disturbance of
the engine working process within the
following limits:
at 1500-2000 m above sea level, re-
duce output capacity by 10%;
at 2000-2500 m by 15%;
at 2500-3000 m by 20 %;
operation at more than 3000 m is not
recommended..
Maintenance of the tractor when pre-
paring it for storage, storing and re-
turning to operation
The tractor is maintained under stated
conditions according to regulations stipu-
lated in Chapter Tractor Storage

216

LUBRICATION TABLE

Units and points of lubri-
cation
Standard name, brand and description of the lubricating materials and liquids Amount of
lubricating
points
Lubricant at operation temperature Refill at opera-
tion, l
Greasing at
storing (up to
6 months)
From -40C to
+5C
From +5C to +50C
Crankcase
Motor oil
Standard

-8 -10 12.0 12.0 1

Backup

-82, -82 M-102, -102
Air cleaner tray Pre-settled and filtered waste motor oil 1.7
3.0 (-245.5)
1.7
3.0 (-245.5)
1
Power train casing
Standard

wet-type brake casings
(if installed)
Transmission oil
-15*;
-15; -
10
-15 40

1.5 (left)
1.0 (right)
40

1.5 (left)
1.0 (right)
1

1
1

Backup

Transmission oil
-17
Transmission oil
-17

FDA final drive reducing
gear casings
---- ---- 1.8 (2.0)** 1.8 (2.0)** 2
FDA casing Ditto Ditto 1.6 (3.7)** 1.6 (3.0)** 1
Upper bevel pair casings
of FDA reducing gears
---- ---- 0.25 0.25 2
FDA drive intermediate
support
---- ----- 0.15 0.15 1
Driving pulley ------ ---- 0.50 0.50 1

_______________________________
* At the temperature of 15C to 20C, dilute 30% of the refilling volume with spindle oil State
Standard 1642-75 or machinery oil -12 State Standard 20799-75. At the tempera-
ture of up to 55C, dilute up to 15% of the refilling volume with winter diesel fuel.
** The refill capacities are given in parentheses for the FDA with planetary reducing gears (Belarus-
920.2/920.3/952.2/952.3)

217

Units and points of lubri-
cation
Standard name, brand and description of the lubricating materials and liquids Amount of
lubricating
points
Lubricant at operation temperature Refill at opera-
tion, l
Greasing at
storing (up to
6 months)
From -40C to
+5C
From +5C to +50C

Standard

Oil tank of hydraulic sys-
tem and HPS
Motor oil -82 Motor oil M-102, -
102

Backup

Machinery oil Bechem Staroil No. 32, -
30;
25.0 ---- 1
HPS oil tank
(900.3,920.3,950.3,952.3)
Hessol |HydraulikHLP32 6.0 ----- 1
Clutch shifter bearing Standard grease Litol-24
Backup grease Bechem
LCP-GM multi-purpose plastic
4-6 injections by
gun (0.02)
----- 1
Front wheel hub bearing
(900/950)
Ditto 0.40 ditto 2
Front axle steering knuck-
le (900/950)
---- 10-12 injections
by gun (0.05)
---- 2
Adjustable angle brace
pinion
---- 0.005 1
Rotary shaft sleeves of
rear mounted attachment
Ditto Until grease ap-
pears from the
gaps (0.01)
---- 2
Steering hydraulic cylin-
der joints
Ditto 0.0125 ---- 2
Axles of pivot of FDA with
planetary reducing gears
---- 0.03 ---- 4


218

Refill capacities, l
Engine cooling system 17
Engine lubrication system 12
Transmission casings 40
Casing of the FDA with bevel reducing gears 1.6
Casing of the FDA with planetary reducing gears 3.7
Casing of reducing gear with bevel transmission (each) 1.8
Casing of planetary reducing gear (each) 2.0
Oil tank of hydraulic and HPS (except for Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3) 25.0
Fuel tanks (2 tanks/1 tank) 130/140
Casing of FDA cardan drive intermediate support 0.15
Casing of FDA reducing gear (each) 0.25
HPS oil tank (Belarus-900.3/920.3/950.3/952.3) 6.00
Casing of wet-type multi-disk brake (left) 1.50
Casing of wet-type multi-disk brake (right) 1.00

Troubleshooting BELARUS series 900

219
TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLE, EXTERNAL MANIFESTATION REMEDY
ENGINE
The engine fails to start
Air in the fuel system. Pump the system with manual priming pump. If neces-
sary, eliminate air inflow.
Faulty fuel pump. Take fuel pump away and send it to the shop for repair.
The engine fails to develop the full power
There is no full fuel feed due to misalignment of fuel
pump control rods.
Adjust control rods.

Filtering element of fuel fine filter is clogged.

Replace filtering element.
Faulty injectors.

Locate the faulty injectors, wash and adjust them.
Wrong fuel injection advance angle.

Set the recommended injection advance angle.
Engine air cleaner is clogged. Perform the service of the air cleaner.
The engine runs unstably at idling
Ingress of air into the fuel system. Remove air from fuel system.
Idling springing the fuel pump is not adjusted. Adjust idling spring (for engines with fuel pump 4
or 4).
Faulty fuel pump. Remove the fuel pump from the engine and send it for
repair.
The engine fumes at all the operation modes
. Black fume is emitted from the exhaust pipe
Engine air cleaner is clogged.

Service the air cleaner.
Injector atomizer needle sticking. Injector atomizer needle
sticking.

Detect the faulty injector, wash or replace the atomizer, if
necessary adjust the injector.
Poor fuel quality. Replace fuel with the recommended one.
Faulty fuel pump. Remove the fuel pump from the engine and send it for
repair.
B. White fume is emitted from the exhaust pipe
Engine is not heated.

Warm up the engine; maintain the cooling liquid tempera-
ture within 75 - 95C during operation.
Clearances between the valves and the rockers are not
adjusted.
Adjust clearances.

Water in the fuel Replace the fuel.
Fuel injection advance angle setting is disturbed. Set the recommended fuel injection advance angle.
C. Blue fume leaves the exhaust pipe
Ingress of oil into the combustion chamber as a result of
wear of cup-piston group components
Replace the worn-out parts of the cup-piston group.
Excess of oil in the engine crankcase. Drain the excessive oil, having set the level against the
upper mark of oil-measuring rod.
The engine overheats
Cooling fluid boils in the radiator. Poor fuel atomization by
the injectors.
Clean the radiator from dirt and dust, if necessary, clean
cooling system from scale; adjust the fan belt tension.
Detect the faulty injectors, wash, clean and adjust them.


220
Oil pressure in heated engine is below the allowable level
Pressure sensor or indicator is faulty. Replace them by new ones.
Engine lubrication system pump is faulty. Eliminate the failure or replace the pump.
Oil level in the crankcase is below the allowable level. Add oil to the upper mark of the oil-measuring rod
Sticking of the drain valve of centrifugal oil filter. Wash up the valve and adjust the pressure.
Maximum wear of coupling crankshaft journal bear-
ings
Send the engine for repair
Turbocharger
Turbocharger rotor does not rotate (absence of typical high tone sound)
Ingress of foreign objects hampering the rotor rotation Remove the inlet and exhaust branch pipes. Remove the
foreign objects.
Jamming of the rotor in the bearing. Replace the turbocharger.
Higher oil emission from the compressor or turbine
side, loss of air-tightness of turbocharger seals.
Remove the turbocharger from the engine and send it
for repair.
POWER GEAR
CLUTCH
The clutch does not transfer the full torque
No free travel of the pedal. Adjust the free pedal travel.
Driven plate linings are worn out. Replace the linings of the driven plate as an assembly.
The clutch is not disengaged fully
The free pedal travel is increased. Adjust the free pedal travel.
Ingress of oil into the dry section of the clutch housing
Wear of the cup sealing the crankshaft. Replace the cup.
FINAL GEAR
Higher noise in bevel pair
Maladjustment of engagement of the final gear pin-
ion teeth coupling with differential bearings.
Adjust the gap in the engagement of the pinions
(0.200.55 mm) and preloading of the differential
bearings (the turning force to be applied to the driv-
en pinion shall be 3050 N)
AUTOMATIC DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Automatic differential locking (ADL) fails to operate
No voltage supply to the hydraulic distributor electro-
magnet.
Check electric circuit from the control panel to the
electromagnet in accordance with the diagram.
Sticking of electric hydraulic distributor slide due to
soiling.
Press the electromagnet button to move the slide.
The ADL clutch plates are oiled.

Wash the clutch plates in gasoline, eliminate oil leak-
age.
Friction linings of clutch disks are worn out. Replace the plates.
BRAKES
Ineffective brake operation (the brakes do not hold)
Maladjustment of the brake control. Adjust the brake control.
Brake disk linings are oiled or worn out (for dry
brakes)
Eliminate the oil leakage. If necessary, replace the
plates.

ATTENTION! A frequent cause of failure of the tractor brakes is the use of trailing and
semi-trailing brakeless machines blocked with the tractor brakes. It is not allowed to use
trailing and semi-trailing brakeless machines blocked with the tractor brakes if their
mass exceeds half mass of the tractor.


221

REAR PTO
Rear PTO does not transfer full torsion torque(slips)
Maladjustment of the control mechanism due to con-
siderable wear of the friction linings of the brake band
or owing to other reason.
Adjust the PTO control mechanism.
Unclear switching of the PTO control lever (occur-
rence of jamming, resting-against, clogging, etc. in
mechanism joints).
Eliminate the reasons hampering the free movement of
the control mechanism parts. The control lever must be
clearly fixed in positions PTO ON PTO OFF.
FRONT DRIVING AXLE
The front axle fails to engage automatically during the rear wheel slipping, when the tractor
moves forward
The parts of the free running coupling of the transfer
box are worn out.
Replace the free running coupling.

The jamming slots of the external casing of the free
running clutch are clogged with the products of oil
oxidation and part wear.
Remove the coupling and wash its parts.
The springs of the roller pressing mechanism are de-
formed.
Replace the springs.

The safety coupling in the intermediate support does
not transfer the required torque.
Adjust the coupling for transferring the torque of
50...70 kgf-m (500700 Nm) by tightening the col-
lar nut from the transfer box side.
The driving and driven plates of the safety coupling
are worn out.
Replace the plates.

The disk springs have lost resilience or got broken. Replace the springs.
Transfer box control rod has increased length. Adjust the rods length as described in Chapter E.
Adjustments.
Quick wear and pealing of front wheel tires
Non-compliance of air pressure in the tyres of the
front and rear wheels with the recommended
norms.
To prevent faults, maintain the air pressure in the
tyres of the front and rear wheels according to the
recommended norms.
Misalignment of the wheel toe-in.
The FDA is constantly engaged due to breakage or
jamming in transfer box control.
Perform the adjustment.
Check the forced engagement of the FDA. Eliminate
the fault. Adjust transfer box control mechanism.
HYDRAULIC VOLUMETRIC STEERING SYSTEM (SS)
Higher force on steering wheel
Insufficient oil pressure in SS hydraulic system. The
feed pump is faulty.
Have the pump repaired or replace it.

Insufficient quantity of oil in the tank. Add oil to the level
Increased friction between mechanical parts of the
steering column
Eliminate.
Absence of stop when rotating the steering wheel
Insufficient quantity of oil in the tank. Add oil and bleed the system.
Spontaneous rotation of the steering wheel (motoring) when operators impact is re-
moved from it
Failure of the metering pump spool to return to neu-
tral position.
a) blocking-up the spline shank of steering column
cardan in the metering pump drive shaft

Adjust the steering column.
b) increased friction between mechanical parts of the
steering column.
Eliminate.

222

Non-conformance of the direction of the guide wheel turn to that of the steering wheel rota-
tion
Wrong connection of the cylinder outlets of the meter-
ing pump to turning cylinder.
Change the connection
HYDRAULIC MOUNTED SYSTEM
. Without hydraulic lift
No lifting of the mounted attachment with an agricultural implement
No pressure in the hydraulic system:
Sticking of the bypass valve; Remove the valve parts, wash them and refit into
the body. The valve shall move freely.
Clogging of the safety valve; Disassembly the safety valve, wash its parts and
reassemble it. Adjust the valve operation pressure
within 1820 MPa.
Maladjustment of the governor control rod length. Adjust, as described in the section Adjustments.
No forced lowering of the mounted attachment
Maladjustment of the governor control rod. Adjust as described in the section Adjustments.
Too slow lifting of the mounted attachment with an agricultural implement
Air inflow into the hydraulic system. Detect the inflow place and eliminate the defect.
Heavy oil leakages in the pump. Check the pump capacity; replace the pump, if nec-
essary.
Oil foaming in the tank and splashing through the breather
Air inflow into the system via suction line. Tighten the fastening and replace the suction con-
nection gaskets, if necessary.
Air inflow through the self-moving cuffs of the oil
pump of the hydraulic system of the mounted at-
tachment or pump of the SS system.
Check the condition of the self-moving cuffs and re-
place, if necessary.
Increased oil heating during the operation of the system
Insufficient quantity of oil in the tank. Add oil to the tank to the upper mark of the oil meter
The oil pipelines are bent or rumpled. Eliminate the dents or replace the oil pipeline.
Unblocking of the parts of the stem valve of the dis-
tributor.
Replace stem valve.
The agricultural implement is not held in the transport position
(After lifting to the transport position, the implement is lowered spontaneously)
Oil leakage over sealing rings of the cylinder piston
or rod;
Replace the sealing rings of the cylinder piston.
The slide valves or borings in the distributor body. Replace the distributor.
During the power control, the tillage depth variation exceeds the agrotechnical norms, the engine
rotational speed drops in case of overloads
The correction rate cock is shut. Increase the automatic correction rate by turning
the handwheel counter-clockwise.
The central rod of the mounted attachment is set to
the lower hole of the shackle.
Set the central rod to the upper hole of the shackle
and, if the maximum tillage depth is insufficient to
the middle hole.
Maladjustment of the power sensor. Adjust the power sensor and then the power rod
(see section Adjustments).
Maladjustment of the power rod. Adjust the power rod (see section Adjustments).
Loosening of the tightness of the split hubs of the
levers on the intermediate shaft.
Tighten the bolts of the lever hubs on the intermedi-
ate shaft.
Distorted holes on the plough frog and frame con-
nected by the toe bar, insufficient stiffness of the
plough frame.
Repair the plough to ensure the frame stiffness and
its connection with the frog.


223

The governor handle fails to return by its own from the lifting position to the transport neutral
one
Jamming in the joints of the control handle with the
power governor
Eliminate the jamming, clean the surfaces of the ar-
ticulated joints from the corrosion traces; if neces-
sary, apply a layer of lubricant.
The latch spring bolt on the control handle is over-
tightened
Adjust the latch spring tension on the control han-
dle.
Maladjustment of the governor control rod. Adjust the rod length (see section Adjustments).
B. With hydraulic lift
The unloaded mounted attachment is not lifted; when setting any handles of the distributor to the
lifting or lowering position, no specific sound emitted by the pump under load
Clogging of the safety valve of the tractor distribu-
tor.
Disassemble and wash the safety valve. Adjust the
pressure maintained by the safety valve.
lifting or lowering position, a specific sound emitted by the pump under load is heard. After
stopping the engine and moving the position handle to the foremost position and then to the rear
position and starting the engine, the mounted attachment is lifted (the power handle shall be in
the foremost position).
Clogging the orifice in the overload valve. Remove the regulator-distributor from the tractor,
remove a bypass valve from it, wash the valve and
clean off the valve orifice.
lifting or lowering position, a specific sound emitted by the pump under load is heard. After
stopping the engine and moving the position handle to the foremost position and then to the rear
position and starting the engine, the mounted attachment is not lifted (the power handle shall be
in the foremost position).
Ingress of foreign particles under the spool valve. Remove the cover from the regulator-distributor, set
the position handle to the foremost position. The
spool valve lock ring shall rest against the body of
the regulator-distributor. Move the position handle
to the rear position. The spool valve shall move up-
wards to the distance of at least 7 mm. If not so,
remove the regulator-distributor, clean it from for-
eign particles jammed between the edges of the
spool valve and body.
The loaded mounted attachment is not lifted or is lifted too slowly
The fault becomes apparent as oil in the hydraulic
system is warmed up the pump is faulty.
Check the capacity of the pump. If the pump effi-
ciency is below 0.7, replace the pump.
The fault becomes apparent at any oil temperature
clogging of the overload valve.
Remove the regulator-distributor, take the bypass
valve away and wash it and the regulator-distributor
in diesel fuel.
The loaded mounted attachment is lifted slowly; after stopping the engine, the spontaneous
mounted attachment lowering is noticeable by eye, the position corrections are frequent, the
pressure hanging-up is possible
Destruction of the rubber seals of the regulator-
distributor.
Remove the regulator-distributor and replace rubber
seals by new ones.


224

The pump is not unloaded over the whole range of travel of the mounted attachment with load
when employing the position method of adjustment on reaching the specified position by the
mounted attachment
In case of minor displacements of the position han-
dle towards the lowering position, the pump is
shortly unloaded, on stopping the engine the leak-
proofness is normal

Jamming or loss of sealing of the valve-
accelerator.
Remove the regulator-distributor; take away the by-
pass valve, disassemble and wash it.
If necessary, hammer the valve ball to this seat.
The pump is not unloaded as the position handle is
shifted towards the lowering position, on stopping
the engine the leak-proofness is normal

Loss of sealing of the pressure setting valve.

Turn out on the top surface of the governor, remove
the springs, hammer the valve ball to this seat and
refit the parts.
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
Storage battery has low charge
Low level of controllable voltage. Replace the generator voltage regulator.
Slipping of the generator driving belt. Adjust the belt tension.
Increased transfer resistance between the storage bat-
tery terminals and wire lugs due to oxidation and loosen-
ing.
Clean the terminals, tighten and grease non-contact
parts with technical petroleum jelly. Tighten the fas-
tening of SB switch and the ground jumper.
Storage battery faulty. Replace.
Storage battery boils and requires frequent adding of distilled water
High level of the controllable voltage. Replace the generator voltage regulator.
Storage battery faulty. Replace.
Starter fails to go on and turn the engine crankshaft
One of wire lugs at the storage battery is disconnected. Tighten firmly the lugs on the SB terminals.
Heavy oxidation of wire lugs and terminals of the storage
battery.

Clean battery terminals and wire lugs, grease their non-
contact parts with technical petroleum jelly.
Engine start locking unit has operated or its switch is
faulty.
Set gearbox lever to leftmost or replace the switch.
Low starter starting moment due to storage battery dis-
charging.
Charge the battery to the norm.

Starter is faulty. Remove the starter and have it repaired.
Generator does not develop full power
Slipping of generator driving belt. Adjust.

Generator is faulty. Remove the generator and have it repaired.
Generator noise
Slipping or excessive tension of fan belt. Adjust.

Bearing wear. Remove the generator and have it repaired.
The pilot lamp of the electric torch pre-heater
Break in the electric torch pre-heater circuit. Eliminate.
The electric torch pre-heater circuit components are
faulty.
Replace.


225
CAB HEATING AND VENTILATION UNIT
Warm air does not enter the cab
No water circulation through the heating unit. The valve is shut off open it. Hoses are clogged
clean them. Air or ice blockage in the heater hoses
clean them. Fan has failed contact a qualified special-
ist.
High-humidity heated air goes into the cab
Water leakage in the radiator and heating system joints.
Hoses are damaged.
Eliminate.
AIR-CONDITIONER
The electromagnetic clutch of the compressor
(while turning the temperature regulator, no specific
metallic click is heard)
1. The electric equipment is faulty.
Check the serviceability of the block of pressure
sensors using a tester or multimeter: there shall be
no open circuit between the leads of the block of
sensors (red and pink wires).
Check the integrity of the connections of the electric
circuits from the compressor clutch to the air-
conditioner control panel.
2. Coolant leakage has occurred.
Detect the place of the coolant leakage.
Detection of the coolant leakage places, replace-
ment of the hoses and components of the air-
conditioner shall be performed by trained personnel
with the use of special equipment.
The air-conditioner fan motor does not operate The electric equipment is faulty.
Check the integrity of the respective fuse (25, see
the electric diagram) in the fuse block F4 located in
the instrument dashboard. Replace the blown fuse.
Check the presence of voltage at the air-conditioner
motor using a test lamp when the switch is set to
the ON position and the storage battery is connect-
ed to the battery. If the electric circuits are in good
order, but no voltage is applied to the air-
conditioner, replace the switch.
When the air-conditioner is switched to the cooling
mode, warm air is supplied to the cab
Destruction of the seal of the cock -11 (or 11).
Replace the cock -11 (or 11)
Coolant leakage from the ventilation compartment
of the cab
Rupture of the heater tubes (unfreezing of the
heater due to incomplete drainage during the opera-
tion with water in the cold season of the year).
Replace the climatic unit of the air-conditioner.
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
Insufficient air pressure in the tank, the pressure slowly grows and quickly drops when stopping
the engine
Air leakage in the system. Eliminate.
The compressor is faulty. Remove and send it to the shop.
Air pressure in the tank decreases quickly when stepping on the brake pedal
The brake cock is faulty. Remove and send it to the shop.
Increased oil ejection into the pneumatic system
The compressor is faulty. Remove and send it to the shop.
No air intake for inflating the tyres
The air intake valve plunger is insufficiently sunk in the
pressure regulator.
Screw on the connection hose nut fully on the connecting
branch.
The pressure regulator has switched the compressor to
idling.

Reduce the pressure in the tank by 1.5...2 kgf/cm
2
.


226

Trailer brakes operate inefficiently or are released slowly
Maladjustment of the brake valve actuator. Adjust.
Maladjustment of the brake valve. Remove and send it to the shop.
Trailer brake system has failed. Eliminate the fault.


227
TRANSPORTATION AND TOWING OF THE TRACTOR

The tractors shall be transported by rail-
way transport, on trucks and their trailers
as well as by towing and under its own
power.

When transporting the tractors:
Set the gearbox levers to the first gear;
Apply the parking/reserve brake;
Fasten the tractor to the platform with
the wire 0.3-5 mm, chains and guy
lines.

When handling the tractors, use the hoist
mechanisms with the lifting capacity of at
least 10 tf.

The ropes should be fastened at the front
axle beam or eye-nut (1) and at the half-
axles of the rear wheels as shown in the
diagram below. When fastening the ropes
by the eye-nut (1), draw the harness onto
the eye-nut body and fix it by means of a
stopper (2) through the eye of the eye-
nut.

It is allowed to tow the tractor with inop-
erative HPS pump at the speed of not
more than 10 km/h speed to a distance of
up to 5 km.
The eye fastened to the front ballast
weights and to the bracket of the weights
is provided for fastening the towing rope.
When towing the tractor, observe strictly
road regulations.

Attenti on! When being lifted by the
eye nuts, the tractor can move for-
ward (backward) to the distance of up
to 1.5 m.
It is forbidden to use tow clamp for lifting
the tractor.
It is strictly forbidden to tow FDA tractor
with the front wheels lifted.

Belarus 1221/1221/1221.2/1221.2/1221.3/1221.3 Section . Storage of the tractor
228
228
STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR

Prior to putting the tractor for a long-term
storage, perform the following operations:
Clean the tractor.
Clean the tractor inside and outside.
Gun-grease all the lube points, namely.
Drain oil from the engine crankcase,
power train, tank of the hydraulic sys-
tem and HPS, wheel reduction gears
and final drive of the FDA and refill
them with fresh clean oil.
Drain fuel from the fuel tanks and pour
about 5 l of preservation fuel.
Start the engine and let it run for 5...10
minutes until the feeding system is
filled.
Lift the RHM rods to the top position
and engage the fixing mechanism
(RHM with an autonomous power cyl-
inder).
Remove the storage batteries, charge
them and put for storage in a dry venti-
lated room with the temperature of
15..20. Check the condition of the
batteries every month and recharge
them as necessary.
Lift the front and rear axles of the trac-
tor by means of jacks and put the trac-
tor onto the stands for unloading the
tyres. Reduce the pressure in the tyres
down to 70% of the normal value.
Drain the cooling fluid from the engine
cooling system and the cab-heating
one.
Preserve the plunger of the hydraulic
steering cylinder or turn the front
wheels in such a way that the rod
would be in the retracted position.

Loosen the tension of the generator
and fan belts.
Put a jacket on the exhaust pipe hole.
Crank the engine crankshaft to several
revolutions at least once a month.

To remove the tractor from the long-term
storage, perform the following operations:
Remove the tractor from stands and
bring the pressure in tyres to its normal
value.
Fill up fuel tanks.
Check the level of cooling fluid and oil
in all the vessels to be filled.
Re-install fully charged storage batter-
ies
Remove the jacket from the exhaust
pipe.
Start the engine and carry out the func-
tional checks on all the tractor instru-
ments, controls and systems.
Check the operation of the lighting and
audible signalling devices.
Run the tractor without load to make
sure that it operates properly.

IMPORTANT! The operations for putting
the tractor for storage and removing
the same from the storage in the part
related to the engine shall be per-
formed according to the operating
manuals provided by the engine manu-
facturer.
Appendix BELARUS series 900

229
APPENDIX . ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT

List of the components of the electric connection diagram of the tractor

Designation Description
Q-
ty
A1 Stereo cassette radio 1
A2 Glow plugs 4
A3 Control panel 1
A4 Air-conditioner 1
A4.1 Air processing unit 1
A4.1.1 Air output temperature control 1
A4.2 Compressor and condenser
unit
1
4.3 Pressure sensors unit 1
M6 Fan motor 1
S1 Fan modes switch 1
YC Electromagnetic clutch of the
compressor
1
5 Electric torch preheater 1
BA1,BA2 Speaker 2
BK1 Temperature indicator sensor 1
BN1 Fuel level indicator sensor 1
BP1 Engine oil pressure gauge 1
BP2 Air pressure sensor 1
BV1,BV2 Rotational speed sensor 2
1, 2 Road headlight 2
E3, E4, 5,
6, 8, 9
Working headlight 6
E7 Cab lighting lamp 1
10 Number plate light 1
EL1, EL2 Lamp 12-60+55-1 2
EL3,EL7,EL8,
EL13,EL15,
EL16,EL25
Lamp 12-55-1 7
EL4 ...EL6,
EL9,EL10,
EL20,EL21
Lamp 12-5 7
EL11,EL14,
EL17,EL19,
EL22,EL24
Lamp 12-21-3 7
EL18,EL23 Lamp 12-10 2
F1...F4 Fuse boxes 4
FU1 Fuse 1
FU2, FU3 Fuse link 25 2
Designation Description
Q-
ty
G1 Alternator 14 V,1150 W 1
GB1,GB2 Storage battery 12 V, 88 A-h. 2
HA1 Horn 1
HA2 Signalling relay 1
HG1,HG2 Pilot lamp block 2
HL1...HL3 Road train sign light 3
HL4,HL5 Front light 2
HL6,HL7 Rear light 2
HL8 Signalling beacon 1
1 Relay glow plug 1
2 Instrumentation supply relay 1
3...6,
8...10
Normally opened relay 30 A 7
4 Normally closed relay 20 A 1
7 Starter solenoid switch 1
KH1 Parking brake pilot lamp
flasher
1
KH2 Turn indicator flasher 1
KT1 Glow plug block 1
2 Preheater control unit 1
1 Fan motor(90) 1
M2 Pantographic-type
windscreen wiper
1
M3 Starter 24 V, 4 kW 1
Starter 12 V, 3 kW 1
Starter 12 V, 2,7 kW 1
M4 Electric windscreen washer 1
M5 Windscreen wiper 1
M7 Fan motor (120 W) 1
P2 Combination meter -5 1
P3 Tachospeedometer 1
QS1 Remote battery disconnect
switch 24 V
1
QS2 Remote battery disconnect
switch 12 V
1
QS3 Manual battery disconnect
switch 12 V
1
QS4 Manual battery disconnect
switch 24 V
1
R1 Addional resistor of the fan
motor
1

230

Continuation of the Table

Designation Description Q-ty
SA1 Road train sign switch 1
SA2,
SA3,SA11
Working lights switch 3
SA4 Fan switch 1
SA5 Windscreen wiper switch 1
SA6 Starter switch with the start
interlocking
1
SA7 Combined switch 1
SA8 Battery disconnect switch 1
SA9 Windscreen washer switch 1
SA10 Upper/lower bean switch 1
SA12 Start interlocking switch 1
SA13 Signalling beacon switch 1
SA14 Starting aid switch 1
SB1 Fault signalling switch 1
SB2 Stop-light switch 1
SB3 Parking brake lamp switch 1
SK1 Emergency temperature
sensor
1
SP1 Air cleaner clogging sensor 1
SP2 Emergency air pressure
sensor
1
SP3 Emergency oil pressure
sensor
1
UZ1 Voltage converter 1
XS12.1
XS12.2
Socket 3212--7 2
XS12.3 Socket 3212--7 1
XS15.1 Socket 3615--6 1
XP12.1
XP12.2
Plug 3212--7 2
XP12.3 Plug 3212--7 1
XP15.1 Plug 3615--6 1
XA9.1 Socket for agricultural
implements
1
XT1 Branching unit 1
XT2.1,XT2.2 Two-contact junction panel 2
XT3.1,XT3.2 Three-contact junction panel 2
WA1 Antenna 1


231

Electric connection diagram of the tractor

232
Variants of electric equipment of the tractors


233

Connection diagram of the clearance lamps, number plate lights and instruments

234

Connection diagram of the road headlights
LOWER BEAM
RELAY
UPPER BEAM
RELAY

235

Connection diagram of the front and rear working lights and cab lighting lamp

236

Connection diagram of the wind- and rear screen wipers and windscreen washer

237

Diagram of connection of the parking brake and of the DL and PTO systems

238

Connection diagram of the road train sign lights and radio equipment

239

Connection diagram of the cab heater and fan with the fan motor power of 90 W
HEATER INTERLOCK
RELAY

240

Connection diagram of the cab heater and fan with the fan motor power of 120 W
HEATER INTERLOCK
RELAY

241

Diagram of the turn indicators and fault signalling

TURN INDICATORS
FLASHER POWER SUPPLY
RELAY

242


243

Diagram of the instrumentation dashboard 80-3805010-1

244

Diagram of the instrumentation dashboard 826-3805010

245
1. Power supply system

The Belarus tractors are equipped with
the following power supply systems:
On-board power system with the rated
voltage of 12 V and starting system with
the voltage of 12 V and two storage
batteries connected in parallel each with
the voltage of 12 V (Fig. 2, variants 1, 3
and Fig. 3);
On-board power system with the rated
voltage of 12 V and starting system with
the voltage of 24 V and two storage
batteries each with the voltage of 12 V
interconnected in parallel by means of
the circuit breaker (Fig. 2, variant 2 and
Fig. 4).
Fig. 2 shows the schematic of the power
supply system with four versions of
connection of the storage battery and
ground switches (circuit breakers):
Basic version starting system 24
V. The storage batteries GB1 and GB2
are interconnected in series through a
remotely controlled SB circuit breaker
QS1.
Variant 1 starting system 12 V.
The storage batteries GB1 and GB2 are
interconnected in parallel and connected
to the circuitry through a remotely
controlled SB circuit breaker QS2.
The storage batteries GB1 and GB2 are
interconnected in series through the
manually controlled battery disconnect
switch QS4.
GB1 and GB2 are interconnected
in parallel and connected to the circuitry
through the manually controlled battery
disconnect switch QS3.
The voltage indicator used on the
tractors has a zonal scale making it
possible to get the information on the
condition of the power supply system of
the tractor:
1. After setting the battery disconnect
switch to the on position before starting
the engine (when the consumers are not
energized), the voltage indicator pointer
is in the yellow zone (12-13.2 V) and
indicated the electromotive force of the
storage battery and degree of its charge:
12.7 V: 100% of charge;
12 V: 50% of the charge and less.
2. On starting the engine, the voltage
indicator pointer moves to the left red
zone (10-12 V). During the operation of
the starter, the voltage drop down to 6 V
is possible.
3. After starting the engine, the indicator
pointer indicated the voltage in the on-
board power system generated by the
alternator.
In the normal operation mode, the
pointer shall be in the green zone (13.2-
15.2 V). The short-time pointer
movement to the yellow zone (12-13.2
V) is allowed during the engine running
at low rotational speed and connection
of the consumers, the total power of
which exceeds the alternator output
power at this speed mode.
In the remaining operating modes, if the
voltmeter pointer is
to the left from the green zone, the
alternator or integral voltage adjuster
(IVA) are faulty or open circuit;
to the right from the green zone, the
IVA is faulty.


246

1.1. Troubleshooting of the power
supply system
A. No voltage in the on-board power
system after setting the battery
disconnect switch QS1 to the on
position:
Check the intactness of the fuse F1;
Check the contacts at the place of
connection of the wires to the SB
terminals;
Check the integrity of the circuit
from the storage battery to the
fuse.
B. No battery charging after starting
the engine:
Check the condition of the
alternator driving belt and voltage
regulation;
Check the intactness of the fuse F1;
Using a voltage indicator, check the
controllable voltage of the
alternator (Fig. 1), which shall be
14.2 15.2 V;
Check the reliability of the contacts in
the circuit from the alternator to the
voltage.

Note: The check shall be performed at
the rated rotational speed of the
engine and working headlights on.

C. The storage batteries are
systematically undercharged:
Check the value of the controllable
voltage (Fig. 1), and, if it is below the
allowable value, replace the IVA;
Check the technical condition of the
storage battery;

Fig. 1. Checking the controllable voltage value: 1
alternator G1; 2 voltage indicator.

Check the reliability of the contacts in
the connections of the terminals of the
wires from the alternator to the storage
battery having excluded the possible
increase of the resistance at the
terminals due to loosening of their
fastening or oxidization.

D. On the tractors with the power
supply system with the voltage of
12/24 V (Fig. 2) and voltage converter
UZ1, the left storage battery is not
charged;
Check the integrity of the fuse and
reliability of its fastening to the voltage
converter body -191-375901 (
14/28 V 8 A); if the fuse (20 A) is blown
off, the pilot lamp of the voltmeter in the
combined meter lights up;
Check the fastening the wires to the
terminals.


247

F
i
g
.

2
.

P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

s
y
s
t
e
m

o
f

t
h
e

t
r
a
c
t
o
r
s


248
2. Engine starting system

The engine starting system circuitry has
the following differences depending on
the supply voltage of the starter:
. Starter with the rated voltage of
12 V (Fig.3):
The power supply of 12 V is applied
to the starter from the two
interconnected batteries GB1 and
GB2, each 12 V;
The voltage is applied to the solenoid
starter switch for energizing the starter
from the terminal 87 of the solenoid
starter switch K7.
B. Starter 3 with the rated voltage of
24 V (Fig. 4):
The voltage of 24 V is applied to the
starter from the two storage batteries
GB1 and GB2 each having the voltage
of 12 V connected in series;
The voltage is applied to the solenoid
starter switch for energizing the starter
from the terminal 87 of the solenoid
starter switch K7.
The starter 3 supplied with the
voltage of 12 V and 24 V is switched on
by turning the starter and
instrumentation switch SA6 to the
position.
For the instrumentation dashboard 80-
3805010-1:
The relay 6 performs the function of
blocking against restart (starter blocking)
when the engine is running.
The starter blocking relay operates to
de-energize the starter solenoid switch
7 that causes the switching-off of the
starter.


249
F
i
g
.
3
.

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

s
y
s
t
e
m

1
2

V
,

s
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

a
i
d

s
y
s
t
e
m

(
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

t
o
r
c
h

p
r
e
-
h
e
a
t
e
r
)
.

C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
O
R

P
R
O
G
R
A
M
M
E
D

M
O
D
U
L
E


250

F
i
g
.

4
.

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

s
y
s
t
e
m

2
4

V
,

s
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

a
i
d

s
y
s
t
e
m

(
g
l
o
w

p
l
u
g
s
)


251
2.1. Troubleshooting in the starting
system

. Too low starting rotational speed of
the starter :
a) Eliminate the possible loosening of the
fastening or oxidization of the power
system circuit:
on the storage batteries;
on the battery disconnect switch;
of the battery connection jumper between
the cab and the tractor body;
on the starter terminals and fasteners.
b) Check the degree of charging of the
storage batteries.
If the rotational speed of the starter has not
changed after performing the said
operations, perform the maintenance or
repair of the starter.

B. The solenoid starter switch operates
(the sound of its operation is heard),
but the engine is not cranked:
a) if at that time the pilot lamps on the
tractors instrumentation dashboard
function normally:
check and clean, if necessary, the
contacts of the solenoid starter switch,
adjust the drive mechanism;
check the condition of the brush and
commutator assembly of the starter;
repair the starter;
b) if at that time the pilot lamps on the
tractors instrumentation dashboard
become considerably dimmer:
perform the operations specified above in
the item A.a.
c) if at that time the solenoid starter switch
operates cyclically:

Fig.5. Checking the integrity of the windings of
the solenoid starter switch 3.
1 Starter;
2 Pilot lamp:
A of the hold-in winding;
B of the pull-in and hold-in windings.

check the integrity of the hold-in winding
of the solenoid starter switch and integrity
of the termination of its leads:
1) disconnect the following wires from the
terminals of the solenoid starter switch:
wire from the terminal 5;
bus + from the power terminal to the
starter motor.
2) set the ground switch and connect the
test lamp to the terminals of the solenoid
starter switch as shown in Fig. 5. If the
windings are intact, the lamp shall be lit
dimly.

252
C. The starter cannot be switched on:
) Check the operability of the starter
check one wire of the test lamp to the
ground and another wire in turn:
1) to the power terminal of the starter (Fig.
6);
2) to the terminal of the solenoid starter
switch (having turned the starter switch key
to the second position) (Fig. 6);

NOTE. For the starting system with the
voltage of 24 V (Fig. 4) use the test lamp
rated at 24 V (24-21).

1) If the test lamp lights up in both cases,
test and repair the starter;
2) if the test lamp does not light up on both
cases or lights up in one case, repair the
electric circuits of power supply and control
of the start (see below).

b) Check the operation of the starter
interlock switch SA11 with the
gearbox reduction gear engaged (Fig.
7).
The NO interlock switch with the ball
pusher is located on the gearbox control
mechanism and integrated in the circuit
between the winding of the starter solenoid
switch 7 and ground.

Operation of the switch
On engaging the gearbox reduction gear,
the switch contacts are opened under the
action of the control shaft that prevents the
engine from being started.
When the reduction gear lever is set to the
neutral position or when the gearbox lever
is set to the Reduction gear ()
position, the shaft lug closes the switch
contacts, which provides connection to the
body for the starter solenoid switch and
possibility of starting the engine.
To check the switch operation, proceed as
follows:

Fig. 6. Checking the operability of the starter
3: 1 starter; 2 test lamp.

connect one wire of the test lamp to the
switch terminal with the wire and stretch
out another one to the "+" terminal of the
regular storage battery (Fig. 7);
set the battery disconnect switch to the
ON position;
set the gearbox lever to the neutral
position: the switch contacts shall be
closed and the test lamp shall be lit;
set the gearbox lever to the ON position:
the switch contacts shall be opened and
the test lamp shall not be lit.


253

Note: The test lamp shall be
energized from the power
terminal of the starter.

D. Check the condition of the
starting control circuits and
instruments:
a) Remove the side pieces of the
dashboard;
b) Check the operability of the
starter switch (SA6) by connecting
one wire of the test lamp to the
body and another wire to the
switch terminals in turn (Fig.8 and
9):
+ wire ;
or 30 wire (the key
shall be in the position II);
In both cases, the test lamp shall
be lit.

Fig. 7. Checking the operation of the starter interlock switch.
1 interlock switch; 2 test lamp;
2 is the neutral position of the gearbox lever.

Top view

Fig.8. Checking the operability of the starter switch (SA6). For
the instrumentation dashboard 80-3805010-1.
1 Starter switch;
2 Test lamp.
Starter switch key position:
OFF; I the measuring
instrumentation, pilot lamp blocks,
flashers of the turn indicators and
and parking brake pilot lamp, radio
receiver, key of the electric torch
pre-heater (or glow plugs) of the
engine starting aid system
(terminals K3, , or 58,
19, 15) are energized;
II the consumers of the position
I (except for the radio receiver,
or 15), starter solenoid
switch and winding of the electric
torch pre-heater through the button
of the electric torch pre-heater
(when being released, the key
returns to the position I) (terminals
3, , or 58, 15) are
energized;
III the radio receiver is
energized (terminal or 15).
c) Check the integrity of the circuits
and application of the voltage to
the terminals of the starter
solenoid switch (K7) (Fig. 10):
check one wire of the test lamp to
the body and another one in turn to

254
the relay terminals:
"" or "30" wire ;
"" or "85" wire K having
turned the key to the II
position.
In both cases, the test lamp shall
be lit.

d) check the integrity of the circuit
from the starter solenoid switch
(K7) to the solenoid starter switch:

ATTENTION! Set the gearbox
control lever to the reduction gear
position.

bridge the terminals "30" and "87"
of the starter solenoid switch 7
using an additional wire. The
starter shall be energized and the
engine shall be started (while
bypassing the starting control and
interlock circuits).

e) Check the operability of the
starter solenoid switch K7:
connect the terminal "86" of the
starter solenoid switch (of the wire
) to the tractor body (when doing
this, the circuits for interlocking the
starter depending on the position
of the gearbox lever position);
turn the starter key switch SA6
to the II position; the starter
solenoid switch shall operate and,
respectively, the diesel shall be
started.

Fig. 9. Checking the operability of the starter switch
(SA6). For the dashboard 826-3805010.
1 starter switch;
2 the test lamp.

Fig. 10. Checking the integrity of the circuits of the
starter solenoid switch 738.3747-30:
1 test lamp.
2 starter solenoid switch.


255
E. Check the integrity of the circuits
and units of the starter interlock
system with the gearbox engaged as
well as of the automatic disconnection
of the starter after starting the engine:
a) check the integrity of the circuit from
the interlock relay (K6) to the switch SA11
on the gearbox casing. To do this,
connect the test lamp between the
terminal + of the storage battery and the
terminal 88 of the relay (wire ), (Fig.
11). When it will be done,
the lamp shall be lit when the gearbox
lever is set to the neutral position and
intact circuit being checked;
the lamp shall not be lit when moving
the gearbox lever to the OFF position or,
if there is a fault in the circuit being
checked.
b) Check the integrity of the connection to
the body at the terminal "86" (wire ) of
the interlock relay.

NOTE! The permanent ground jumper
between the relay bracket and the
dashboard casing.

c) Check the integrity of the circuit from
the starter interlock relay (K6) to the
alternator terminals "", (Fig. 12) when
the engine is not running and battery
disconnect switch is set to the ON
position:
connect one wire of the test lamp to the
relay terminals "85" (wire ) and another
to the tractor body;
bridge shortly the terminals "+" and ""
on the alternator.
The test lamp shall be lit.
If the lamp is not lit, the circuit is broken.

ATTENTION! After checking remove
the jumper.

Fig. 11. Checking the integrity of the interlock
circuits to the switch on the gearbox casing:
1 interlock switch SA11;
2 starter interlock relay K6;
neutral position of the gearbox control.

Note! Energize the test lamp (3) from the
central fuse or from the starter.

Fig. 12. Checking the integrity of the circuit
from the interlock relay K6 to the terminals
of the alternator G1:
1. Alternator;
2. Interlock relay;
3. Test lamp.


256

d) Check the operability of the interlock relay
(K2) (Fig. 13):
connect the test lamp between the relay
terminal "30" (wire ) and battery terminal
"+".
The lamp shall be lit, when the gearbox lever
is set to the neutral position.
bridge shortly the terminals "+" and "" of
the alternator with a jumper.
The test lamp shall become dim.
If the above operating mode of the test lamp
fails and the electrical circuits checked
according to the described above items a, b
and c, replace the interlock relay K6.

ATTENTION! After checking, remove the
jumper.

F. The starter is not switched off
automatically after starting the engine:
check the voltage at the terminal of the
alternator (at the engine rotational speed
exceeding 500 rpm. The voltage shall
exceed 8 ;
check the working condition of the starter
interlock relay and its circuits.

Fig. 13. Checking the operability of the
interlock relay K6:
1 Interlock switch SA11;
2 Starter interlock relay;
3 Test lamp.
J umper

257
2.2. Electric torch pre-heater (ETPH).

The ETPH control system (2) has the
following peculiarities (see Fig. 3):
1. The ETPH coil is powered up by the key
switch (SA12) located on the
instrumentation dashboard.
2. The additional resistor R1 if connected
serially into the coil circuit.
3. When closing the contacts "30" and "87",
the ETPH relay (K8) shunts the additional
resistor. The relay winding is connected
into the circuit in parallel to the starter
solenoid switch (K7) and operates with in
the same mode with the latter.
4. Simultaneously with warming up the
ETPH coil, the test lamp in the pilot lamp
block HG2 on the instrumentation
dashboard.
5. When the pilot lamp operation will be
changed from the steady lighting to the
blinking, start the engine. On switching on
the starter, the current from the terminals
"" of the starter switch (SA6) is passed
through the second pair of contacts of the
switch (SA15) to the electric torch pre-
heater solenoid valve, which operates, the
fuel is fed to the suction manifold and
ignited by the preheated coil of the electric-
torch pre-heater. At the same time, the
contacts of the electric torch pre-heater
relay contacts (K8) are closed and the
additional resistor is excluded from the
circuit that compensates to compensate for
the voltage at the electric torch pre-heater
coil having occurred due to switching on
the starter.

After starting the engine, the starter and
relay are de-energized automatically. The
additional resistor in connected into the
electric-torch pre-heater coil again to
protect the same against fusing due to the
voltage increase after beginning of the
operation of the alternator.
To allow the engine to reach the stable
working mode, the work of the electric-torch
pre-heater s possible after automatic
switching-off of the starter at the cost of
continuing to keep the switch SA15 on the
on state and of the starter switch in the II"
position.

2.3. Pre-start pre-heating glow plugs
The glow plugs 2 (see Fig. 4) used as
starting aids for the turbocharged engines
certified according o the European
ecological norms (Euro-2).
The control scheme for the glow plugs 2
has the following peculiarities:
1. The glow plugs are energized by turning
the key of the starter switch SA6 to the
position.
2. The circuit for control of the glow plugs
includes the starting-aid pilot lamp , relay
glow plug (K1) and glow plug block (glow
plug control module) (K1). Here the relay
(K1) is a power relay and the unit (K1)
performs the functions of control of the
power relay while tracing the integrity of the
circuitry of the glows (2).


258
3. When turning the key of the starter
switch (SA6) to the position, the current
from the storage battery is passed through
K1 and K1 to the plugs 2. The pilot
lamp is lit steadily and, after expiration of
20 s, when the glow plugs will be warmed
up to the working temperature, the lamp will
be switched to the blinking mode signalling
on the readiness of the system to the start.
When turning the key of the switch (SA6) to
the position (), the starter is switched
to start the engine. The starting pilot lamp
lights up to indicate that the starting
systems are faultless. If the lamp starts
blinking at the frequency of 1.5 Hz, the
change gear lever is not in the neutral
position or there Is a fault in the starting
interlock circuit. If the lamp blinks at the
frequency of 3.0 Hz, there is a fault in the
circuit of the phase winding of the
alternator. Eliminate the faults. After
starting the engine, the pilot lamp shall
become dim.

Checking the operability of the electric
torch pre-heater (Fig. 14)

If the electric torch pre-heater does not
operate, check the intactness of the ETPH
coil and solenoid valve winding by
connecting the test lamp to the terminals
"+" of the storage battery and to the ETPH
terminals in turn:
) to the terminals "5" (coil): the lamp
shall light up. If not so, the coil has burned
out;
b) to the terminals "6" (valve winding): the
lamp shall be lit dimly.
If the lamp is lit brightly, there is a short
circuit in the winding. If the lamp is not lit,
the winding is broken.

Fig. 14. Checking the operability of the
electric torch pre-heater 2.
1 electric torch pre-heater;
2 test lamp;
3 storage battery.

Note: The test lamp shall be energized
from the power terminal of the starter or
from the storage battery.

ATTENTION: If the starter operates
when setting the switch (S15) to the ON
position, the connection of the coil or
winding of the ETPH valve is lost. As a
result, the current from the switch (SA15)
is passed through the coil and ETPH
winding to the terminal CT of the starter
switch (SA6) via solenoid valve control
circuit and further to the starter-
energizing circuit.

Replace the ETPH.

Diagnostics of faults in the circuits
controlling the glow plugs 2

1. If the test lamp in the left pilot lamp unit
on the instrumentation dashboard after
starting the engine is blinking, the relay glow
plug (K) is faulty (sticking of the relay
contacts).
2. If the test lamp blinks when turning the
key of the starter switch (SA6) to the
position, there is an open circuit between the
glow plugs (2) and the relay (K1).


259
Checking the operability of the glow
plugs (Fig. 15)

If there are difficulties with starting the
engine in the winter period of operation:
There can be two types of faults in the glow
plugs: internal short circuit causing the fuse
to blow out, or open circuit.
The operability of the glow plugs can be
checked by means of an ohmmeter: the
resistance of the operable glow plug rated
at 12 V at the temperature of 20 shall be
0.4-0.6 and that of the plug rated at 24 V
at the temperature of 20 2.0-2.5 .

Fig. 15. Checking the operability of the glow
plug 2.
1 Ohmmeter;
2 Glow plug.


260

3. Lighting and light signalling system
The protection of the system circuitry by
means of the fuses has the following
peculiarities:
1) Separate protection of the clearance
light circuits at the sides:
fuse (7) only protects the circuit of the
front and rear clearance lights of the left
side;
fuse (8) protects the circuit of the
clearance lights of the right side as well as
that for illumination of the number plate and
instruments.
2) Separate protection of the road headlight
lower-beam circuit for each side:

fuse (10) protects the circuit to the right
road headlight;
fuse (9) protects the circuit to the left road
headlight.
3) Protection of the upper-beam circuits of
both headlights and pilot lamp of their ON
state by means of the fuse (6).
4) Protection of the circuits of the rear
working lights and cab lighting lamp by
means of the fuse (2) and protection of the
front working lights by means of the fuse
(13).
5) Protection of the circuits of the stop lights
by means of the fuse (1).
6) Protection of the circuits of the turn
indicators by means of the fuse (12) and in
the fault signalling mode by means of the
fuse (3).

Troubleshooting of the system
If one of the devices of the lighting and light signalling does not operate, proceed as
follows:


261
3.1. Clearance light, road and working
lights

The clearance and road light as well as the
number plate light and lighting devices are
switched on by means of the central light
switch SA10.
The key switch SA10 is energized from
the fuse box (F1).
When setting the switch to the second
position (the first position corresponds to
the switched off state) the supplying
voltage is applied through the closed
contacts L-V of the switch to the relay and
after the relay to the fuses (8) (15 A) and
(7) (7.5 ) (to the wire ) and further to the
front and rear clearance lights of the left
and right sides as well as to the number
plate light and instrumentation backlight
lamps.
When setting the switch (SA10) to the third
position the clearance lights continue to be
energized, but already through the contacts
L-H; besides, due to closing the contacts I -
U, the supplying voltage is fed to the
steering-wheel mounted switch (SA7) (wire
) for switching on the required beam of
the headlights.
a) Lower beam of the road headlights.
The arm of the steering-wheel-mounted
switch (SA7) is in the top fixed position
the voltage is applied through its contacts
to the fuses (10) (7.5) and (9) (7.5 )
(wire ) and through the relay (K8) and
further to the circuits of the lower beams
of the right () and left () sides. The lower
beam relay (K8) unloads the contacts
(SA7) in the lower beam circuit.

b) Upper beam of the road headlights. The
arm of the steering-wheel-mounted switch
is in the bottom fixed position: the supplying
voltage is applied through the relay (K6)
(wire ) to the fuse (6) (15 ) (wire ) and
further to the upper beam circuit (wire 3).
The upper beam relay (K6) unloads the
contacts (SA7) in the upper beam circuit.
c) Signalling by switching on the upper
beam for short time.
The arm of the steering-wheel-mounted
switch is moved to the top unfixed position.
When it will be done, the upper beam of the
headlights is switched on irrespectively of
the position of the central light switch
(SA10). It is achieved due to breaking the
circuit of the switch (SA10) by the steering-
wheel-mounted switch (SA7) so that the
voltage is applied from the box (F1) through
the wires 3, (SA6) to the switch (SA7)
(wires ) while bypassing the central light
switch (SA10).
The front 3, 4 and rear 8, 9 working
lights and cab lighting lamp 7 are supplied
from the storage batteries GB1, GB2
through the fuse boxes F3 (25) and F4
(15) and switches S2, S3.


262
Adjusting the road headlights

The headlights should be adjusted as follows:
Mark out the screen as shown in Fig. 16. When doing this, mark the line of the centres
of the headlights - on the screen at the distance equal to the height of location of the
centres of the headlights above the ground level, and the lines B-B1 and E-E1 at the
distance (the distance between the centres of the headlights in the horizontal plane).
The distance should be measured immediately on the tractor. The air pressure in the
tyres shall correspond to the recommended norms;
Place the tractor on a flat level area perpendicularly to the screen at the distance of
10 m from it to the lenses of the front headlights so that the longitudinal plane of
symmetry of the tractor would intersect the screen along the line O-O1;
Switch on the lower beam and adjust firstly the position of one headlight (close another
headlight with a piece of dark cloth) and then of another headlight having loosened
preliminarily their fasteners on the bracket.

Fig. 16. Marking up the screen and adjusting the front headlights
- line of the centres of he headlights;
D-D line located lower than the line - by 150 mm;
-O1 symmetry line of the screen;
B-B1 vertical axis of the light spot of the left headlight;
-E1 vertical axis of the light spot of the right headlight.

The light of the headlights is considered to be adjusted, if the centre of the light spot on
the screen corresponds to that shown in the picture and the light spots from both
headlights are at equal height.


263

3.2. Turn indicators

The blinking mode of lighting of the
signalling lamps () of the turn
indicators is provided by the flasher
(KH2).
The functioning and correctness of
operation of the signalling lamps () is
monitored by means of the two pilot
lamps (K) of the tractor and trailer
located in the right block of pilot lamps
(HG1).
The circuit of the turn indicators is
supplied when setting the starter and
instrumentation switch (SA6) to the I
position.
On turning the arm of the steering-wheel-
mounted switch (SA7) clockwise or
counter-clockwise, respectively, the
following signal lamps of the turn
indicators light up:
of the right side (wire );
of the left side (wire ).
On setting the switch of the turn
indicators (SA7) to the ON position, the
current flows in the circuit and its value is
fixed by the electronic part of the flasher,
which specifies the operating mode of the
signalling lamps () with the blinking
frequency of 9030 cycles per minute as
well as the operating mode of the two
signalling lamps (K) (of the tractor and
trailer) corresponding to the load in the
circuits.
The pilot lamps (K) of the turn indicators
of the tractor and trailer are connected
permanently to the instrumentation supply
circuit (fuse (11)) and their second (minus)
lead shall be connected to the terminals ""
(pilot lamps of the tractor, wire ) and "2"
(pilot lamps of the trailer, wire ) of the
flasher (KH2).
The voltage is supplied from the box (F1)
through (SA6) to the power supply relay
(K2) (terminal 85) and further through the
terminal 87 to the fuse (12) of the box
(F2) to the fault signalling switch (SB1)
flasher of the turn indicators (wire ,
terminal 49), terminal 49 and further to
the steering-wheel-mounted switch (SA7)
(wire 3).
The operating mode of the pilot lamps
depends on the operable state of the
signalling lamps and, respectively, on their
total current load created in the electric
circuit by the lit signalling lamps of the
tractor and trailer:
Variant 1: the tractor operates with the
trailer:
a) The signalling lamps are intact both
lamps (K) are lit (of the tractor and trailer);
b) One of the three signalling lamps ()
on the tractor or trailer is faulty: the pilot
lamp (K) of the trailer is not lit while that of
the tractor continues blinking;
c) Two or free signalling lamps () of one
side are faulty: neither pilot lamp (K) is lit.
Variant 2: the tractor operates
without trailer:
a) The signalling lamps () are intact: the
pilot lamp of the tractor is blinking and the
pilot lamp of the trailer is not lit.
b) One or both signalling lamps are faulty:
the pilot lamp of the tractor is not lit.
Deviation from the specified operating
mode of the pilot lamps can be caused by:
using the signalling lamps with the rating
differing from the required one (lamps of
the type 12-21);
poor contacts in the specified circuits.
fault of the flasher (KH2).


264
3.3. Fault signalling

The tractors are provided with emergency
light signalling which makes it possible to
switch on the front and rear turn indicators
simultaneously in blinking mode in case of
emergency.
The emergency fault signalling is switched
on by the switch (SB1) located on the
instrumentation dashboard, which is
connected into the circuit of the flasher of
the turn indicators (KH2). Depending on the
position of the switch (SB1) the voltage is
applied to the flasher of the turn indicators
and pilot lamp from one of two fuses over
independent circuits:
1) The fault signalling switch (SB1) is set to
the OFF position the switch pushbutton
is sunk:
from the fuse (12) to the terminal "2" of
the switch and further through its contacts
to the terminal "4", which is connected with
the terminal "49" of the flasher (KH2). The
flasher and signalling lamp () operate in
the mode of the turn indicators as
described above (see item 9).
2) The fault signalling switch (SB1) is set to
the ON position the switch pushbutton is
released, the lamp embedded in the button
is blinking:
the voltage supplied from the fuse (3)
provides the operation of the fault signalling
when the starter and instrumentation switch
(SA6) is set to the OFF position. The
contacts of the switch (SB1) (terminals 1,3,7)
bridge the circuits of the signalling lamps of
the turn indicators of the left and right side
and the terminal "49" of the flasher that
ensures the synchronous blinking of all the
signalling lamps of the turn indicators.
3.4. Signalling of braking the tractor

The stop light is switched on by the switch
(SB2) located on the bracket to the right
under the cab floor. The switch rod is
actuated by the arm of the right brake
pedal through a swinging bracket.
The voltage is permanently applied to the
switch (SB2) (wire ) from the fuse (1).
When stepping on the brake pedal, the
pedal lever ceases to act on the bracket
and through the latter on the switch rod.
The rod returns to the initial position under
the action of the spring, the contacts of the
switch (SB2) are closed and the voltage is
applied (through wire 3) to the stop light
lamps of the rear light signalling units
(EL19) and (EL20) and to the terminals "6"
of the receptacle for connecting the
agricultural implements (9.1).
The beginning of switching on the stop
light is adjusted by bending the shelf of the
bracket coupled with the brake pedal arm
and acting upon the switch rod by its back
side.


265

3.5. Signalling of application of the
parking brake

The signalling of application of the parking
brake is ensured by the operation of the
following devices:
a) pilot lamp located in the right block of
pilot lamps (HG1);
b) switch (SB3) located on the bracket on
the right niche of the cab under the
parking brake lever;
c) flasher relay (KH1) located inside the
dashboard on the right. The flasher relay
related to the thermobimetallic type
provides the intermittent operating mode
of the pilot lamp.
The pilot lamp and flasher relay are
supplied from the fuse (11) after setting
the starter and instrumentation switch
(SA6) to the I position.

Current path: Box (F1), wire 3-3, wire 3-
3, SA6, wire 3-, terminal 85 power
supply relay (K4), terminal 87, fuse 2
of the box (F2), wire 16-, terminal
relay (KH1), terminal L, terminal 1 of
the block (HG1), terminal + of the relay
(KH1), wire 16-3, 16-3, switch (SB3).
Pay attention to connecting the flasher
relay:
Terminal "": (wire ) the voltage as
applied from the fuse 2.2;
Terminal L: (wire K) to the pilot lamp in
the block (HG1);
Terminal"+" - (wire 3) to the switch (SB3)
and further to the tractor body.

On applying the parking brake, the rod of
the switch (SB3) is released and its
contacts are closed. The terminal "+" of
the relay is connected with the body, the
test lamp lights up, the bimetallic contact
of the relay (KH1) begins warming up and
its periodical opening and, respectively,
flashing of the pilot lamp on the
instrumentation dashboard begins as well.
The fastening holes of the bracket have
oval shape that makes it possible to adjust
the moment of the beginning of setting the
switch to the ON position.

3.6. Connection diagram of the road
train sign lamps and radio equipment

The three lights of the road train sign are
fitted under the windscreen on the cab roof
and mounted in a separate bracket.
The switch of the lights (SA1) is mounted
on the upper panel in the tractor cab. On
setting the switch to the ON position, the
lamps (EL4), (EL5) and (EL6) of the three
orange lights and switch key illumination
light up.
The power supply voltage of 12 V is applied
from the unit (F1) through the wire 1-,
1-, to the box (F4), fuse 4.5 (15) and
wires 45-0, 45-0 to the switch (SA1). The
power supply voltage of 12 V for radio
equipment (1, WA1, BA1, BA2) is applied
from the box (F1) to the starter switch
(SA6). When turning the switch key to the
position is applied to the radio
equipment through the wires 21-, 21-
and fuse (FU1) including in the complete
set of the radio recorder.


266

4. Cab heating and ventilation system

The electric circuitry of the system has the following peculiarities:
The winding of the heater interlock relay K3 serving for preventing the discharge of
the storage battery when switching on the heater with the engine not running is
connected between the terminal of the alternator (G1) (wire ) and the tractor
body (wire );
To provide for reduced rotational speed of the fan in case of installation of the motor
with the power of 90 W (1), the power supply circuit comprises an additional
resistor (R1). The increased rotational speed is provided by the respective position
of the switch (SA4) supplying the fan motor with bypassing the additional resistor.
In case of installation of the motor with the power of 120 W (7) to the heater unit,
the circuit from the fuse 1 (25) of the box F3 (wire ) to the switch (SA4)
comprises the relays (K10) for setting the minimum rotational speed and (K9) for
setting the maximum speed. The said relays ensure the protection of the contacts of
the switch (SA4) against overcurrent.
When the engine has been started and the voltage at the terminal of the
alternator has exceeded 8 V, the interlock relay (K3) operates, its contacts 87-30
become closed and the supplying voltage is applied to the switch (SA4) (wire 3)
(contact L).
The switch (SA4) applies the supply voltage to the motor and provides the necessary
rotational speed of the fan.


267

4.1. Diagnostics and troubleshooting

In case of failure in the operation of the electric part of the heating and ventilation
system, the search of the faults shall be performed in the following sequence:

Fuse (16) (25) (Box F3, fuse 1)

Interlock relay of switching on the
fan (K3) in the dashboard

The voltage on the wire 3 to the
switch (SA4)

Relays K9 and K10

Start the engine;
Check the voltage at the terminal of
the alternator (shall be at least 8) and
terminal 85 of the relay (K3) (wire );
Check the connection to the tractor
body at the terminal 86 of the relay (K3)
(wire );
Check the presence of the voltage at
the terminal 30 of the relay (K3) (wire
3).
Check the voltage at the terminal 85
of the relay (K2) (wire K) and voltage at
the terminal 86 of the relay (K1) (wire 3)
in the positions and (SA4) for the
motor with the power of 120 W.

Switch (SA4)
Check the presence of the voltage at
the terminals 30 of the relay 9 and 10
(wire );
Check the operation of the relay K9 and
K10 (the voltage at the terminals 87
(wires K and ) for the motor with the
power of 120 W.
Motor 1 or 7


268

5. Windscreen wiper

5.1. Front windscreen wiper

The Belarus tractors are equipped with a
single-brush windscreen wiper with the
two-speed pantograph-type lever
mechanism with parking the brush:
brush length: 650 mm;
lever length: 600 mm;
cleaning angle: 89-94 degrees;
number of double strokes per minute:
a) Speed I: 34-46;
b) Speed II: 47-63.
The motor with a reduction gear consists of
the commutator-type motor, warm
reduction gear and rocker mechanism. The
second speed is provided at the cost of the
three brush in the commutator assembly of
the motor.
The windscreen operation modes are
switched over by a three-position key
switch (SA5) located in the shield of the
cab roof.
The electric circuits of the windscreen
wiper and washer are protected by a fuse
(4) (15 ). From their, the voltage is
applied permanently to the terminal "L" of
the switch (SA5) and to the terminal of the
end switch on the casing of the motor with
a reduction gear (wire ) as well as to the
rear windscreen wiper (5) and through
the switch (SA9) to the windscreen
washer (4).
One row of the contacts of the switch
(SA5) L, V and commutates the current
supplied to the motor brushes:
Position : the first speed: the contacts
L-V (wires -3) are closed;
Position II: the second speed: the
contacts L-H (wires -) are closed.
The second row of the contacts of the
switch (SA5) jointly with the end switch
serve for automatic stopping of the brush in
the parked position. The three contacts of
the end switch are mounted on the cover of
the motor with a reduction gear. Closing the
contacts in the required combination is
provided by the contact disk fastened to the
driven pinion of the reducing gear.
As the motor rotates, the terminal of the
end switch with the wire is connected
periodically with:
- terminal "+" (wire ) outside the parked
position;
- terminal "" (wire ) in the parked
position.
On setting the windscreen wiper switch to
the ON position, its contacts of the second
row (with the wires 3 and ) are closed and
the supply voltage is applied to the motor
through the closed contacts of the end
switch of the windscreen wiper and provide
the its operation in the first-speed mode
until the brush reaches the parked position.
As the brush enters the zone of the parked
position, the end switch breaks the power
supply circuit and then becomes connected
to the tractor body so that the motor is
short-circuited and its stop in the parked
position is accelerated due to the dynamic
braking.


269

The diagnostics and troubleshooting shall be performed in the following
sequence:

5.2. Rear screen wiper

The electrical single-brush, single-lever
and single speed rear screen wiper has
the following characteristics:
Brush length: 460 mm;
Lever length: 420 mm;
Cleaning angle: 1107 degrees;
Number of double strokes per minute:
45.
The switch of the rear screen wiper is
located on its decorative cover.
The power supply of the rear screen wiper
is provided from the circuit of the
windscreen wiper through a single-terminal
block located at the switch (SA5).
5.3. Windscreen washer
The electric windscreen flusher (4) with
external position of the electric pump. The
direction of spraying the fluid from the
nozzle is adjusted by turning the ball in the
fluid supply sector.
The fluid pressure in the system shall be
at least 60 kPa.
The duration of the continuous operation
shall be not more than 10 seconds.
The windscreen washer is switched on by
the switch (SA9). The windscreen washer
circuit is protected by the fuse (4) (15 ).

Belarus 900-952-Eng

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Belarus 900-952-Eng

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

1

Prior to tractor use, study operators

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi